Cosmographie in four bookes : containing the chorographie and historie of the whole vvorld, and all the principall kingdomes, provinces, seas and isles thereof / by Peter Heylyn.

COSMOGRAPHIE, Lib. IV. Part. II.

CONTAINING THE CHOROGRAPHY & HISTORY OF AMERICA, And all the principal Kingdoms, Provinces, Seas, and Isles thereof.

OF AMERICA.

AMERICA, the fourth and last part of the World, is bounded on the East with the Atlantick Ocean, and the Vergivian Seas, by which parted from Eu∣rope and Africa; which Seas, the Mariners call Mare del Nort; on the West with the Pacifique Ocean, by the Mariners called Mare del Zur, which di∣vides it from Asia; on the South with some part of Terra Australis Incog∣nita, from which separated by a long, but narrow Streit, called the Streits of Magellan; the North bounds of it hitherto not so well discovered, as that we can certainly affirm it to be Iland or Continent.

It is called by some, and that most aptly, THE NEW WORLD: New, for the late Discovery; and World, for the vast greatness of it. The most usual, and yet somewhat the more improper name, is that of America; because Americus Vespacius an Adventurous Florentine, discovered a great part of the Continent of it. But since the first light he had to finde out those parts, came from the directi∣ons and example of Columbus who first led the way; and that Sebastian Cabot touched at many pla∣ces which Americus Vespacius never saw: it might as properly have been called Columbana, Seba∣stiana, or Cabotia. The most improper name of all, and yet not much lessured then that of Ame∣rica, is, the West Indies: West in regard of the Western situation of it from these parts of Europe; and Indies, either as mistook for some part of India, at the first Discovery, or else because the Sea∣men used to call all Countries, if remote, and rich, by the name of India.

Many are of opinion, but rather grounded on conjectural presumptions, then Demonstrative Ar∣guments, that America was known long before our late Discoveries. Their Reasons drawn, 1. From the Doctrine of the Antipodes, which being maintained by many of the Ancient Writers, inferreth (as they think) a knowledge of these parts of the World which are opposite to us. But unto this it may be answered, that the knowledge of the Antipodes amongst the Antients was by supposition, at the best by Demonstration only, and not in fact; or thus•• that it was known that there were An∣tipodes, but the Antipodes were not known. 2ly. It is said that Hanno a noble 〈◊〉〈◊〉 discovered a

great Iland in the Western Ocean, and after a long voyage returned home again, not wanting Sea∣room, but Victuals, as he told the Senate. But he that writ the actions of Hanno in this famous Voy∣age, (which some conceive to be Hanno himself) informs us that he sailed not Westwards, but more towards the South: and therefore this great Iland, whatsoever it was, (whether Madera or some one of the Fortunate Ilands, I determine not) could not be America. 3. It is alleaged that Plato in his Timaus speaks of a great Iland of the Atlantick Ocean, Libyam & Africam adaquans (as out of him Tertullian hath it) as big as Libya, and Africk properly so called: which he confesseth to be drowned long before his time, and therefore possibly never extant but in some mens fancies. 4. That Aristotle in the Book de Mundo (if that Book be his) speaks of an Iland very fruitful, and full of navigable Rivers; discovered by the Carthaginians, and by them forbidden to be planted upon pain of death. Which Iland being affirmed by that Author to be Multorum dierum itinere a Gadibus remota, hath made some men conceive it to be this America, or some of the great Ilands of it. As if it might not be as well one of the Azores, or perhaps Madera, or some other of the Ilands in the Road of Hannos voyage. Certain I am, that one of the best friends the Phoenicians have, who would not gladly lose such an opportunity of ennobling their performances in Navigation, (could any thing be built upon it) doth wave the whole Relation as of doubtful credit, and knoweth of no such place as is there described by that Author, whosoever he were. 5. Some have produced these Verses of Seneca, to inferre a knowledge of this Country amongst the Antients. Viz.

Venient annis secula seris, Quibus Oceanus vincula rerum Laxet, & ingens pateat tellus, Novos{que} Typhis detegat Orbes, Nec sit Terris ultima Thule.

Which may be Englished in these words:

In the last dayes an Age shall come, Wherein the all-devouring Fome Shall lose its former bounds, and shew Another Continent to view. New-Worlds, which Night doth now conceal, A second Typhis shall reveal; And frozen Thule shall no more Be of the Earth the furthest Shore.

But this Argument can bring no necessary, nor so much as a probable inference of any such Continent as this, then known to Seneca: the Poet in that Chorus shewing as well the continual dangers, as the possible effects of Navigation; that there might be, not that there were more Lands discovered, then those formerly known. 6. Some hold this Country to be the Land of Ophir, to which Solomon is said in the holy Scriptures to have sent for Gold. But Ezion-Geber, which is there also said to be the station where his Navie lay, was situate in the bottom of the Red Sea, or Bay of Arabia: whereas if he had sent this way, his shipping must have lain at Joppa, or some other Port of the Mediterranean, and from thence set forwards thorow the Streits of Gibraltar, and so plainly Westward. 7. Finally, in the History of Wales writ by David Powel, it is reported that Madoc the son of Owen Gwinedth Prince of Wales, of purpose to decline ingaging in a Civil war raised in that Estate, in the year 1170. put himself to Sea, and after a long course of Navigation came into this Country; where after he had left his men, and fortified some places of advantage in it, he returned home for more supplies, which he carried with him in ten Barks; but neither he nor they looked after by the rest of that Nation. To which some adde, that here is still some smattering of the Welch or British tongue to be found amongst them; as that a Bird with a white head is called Pengwin, and the like: in which regard some sorry Statesmen went about to entitle Queen Elizabeth unto the soveraignty of these Countries; Others more wise, disswaded from that vain Ambition, considering that Welch men, as well as others, might be cast upon those parts by force of tempest, and easily implant some few words of their own among the people there inhabiting. And though I needs must say for the honour of Wales, that they have more grounds for what they say, then those which look for this New World in the Atlantis of Plato, the Atlantick Ilands of Aristotle and Plutarch, or the Discoveries of Hanno the Carthaginian: yet am I not so far convinced of the truth thereof, the use of the Mariners Com∣pass being not so antient (without which such a Voyage could not be performed) but that I may conclude with more satisfaction, that this Country was unknown to the former Ages.

But now, as Mela the Geographer said once of Britain, then newly conquered by the Romans; Britannia qualis sit, qualesque progeneret, mox certiora & magis explorata dicentur; quippe jam diu clausam aperit ecce Principum maximus (he means Claudius Caesar) nec indomitarum modo sed & in∣cognitarum ante se Gentium Victor: so may we say of America, on these late discoveries: What kind of Country it is, and what men it produceth, we do, and shall know more certainly then in for∣mer times; since those puissant Kings of Spain have laid open all the parts thereof, inhabited not only by unvanquished, but even unknown Nations. For God remembring the promise of his Son,

that his Gospel should before the end of the World be preached to all Nations, stirred up one Chri∣stopher Colon or Columbus, born at Nervy, in the Signeury of Genoa, to be the instrument for find∣ing out those parts of the World, to which the sound of the Gospel had not yet arived. Who be∣ing a man of great abilities, and born to undertake great matters, could not perswade himself (the motion of the Sun considered) but that there was another World to which that glorious Planet did impart both his light and heat when he went from us. This World he purposed to seek after, and opening his Design to the State of Genoa, An. 1486, was by them rejected. On this repulse he sent his brother Bartholomew to King Henry the seventh of England; who in his way hapned unfortu∣nately into the hands of Pirats, by whom detained a long while, but at last inlarged. Assoon as he was set at liberty, he repaired to the Court of England, where his Proposition sound such chearfull entertainment at the hands of the King, that Christopher Columbus was sent for to come thither also. But God had otherwise disposed of this rich purchase. For Christopher not knowing of his Brothers imprisonment, not hearing any tidings from him, conceived the offer of his service to have been neglected; and thereupon made his Desires known at the Court of Castile: where after many de∣layes, and six yeers attendance on the business, be was at last furnished with three ships only, and those not for Conquest, but Discovery. With this small strength he sailed on the main Ocean more then 60 days. yet could see no Land, so that the discontented Spaniards began to mutinie; and part∣ly out of scorn to be under the command of a Stranger, partly desirous to return, would not go a foot forwards. Just at that time it hapned that Columbus did discern the clouds to carry a cleerer co∣lour then they did before: and probably conceiving that this clearness proceeded from some nigh habitable place, restrained the time of their expectation within the compass of three days; passing his word to return again if they did not see the Land within that time. Toward the end of the third day, one of the Company called Rodrigo de Triane (he deserves to have his name recorded, being no otherwise rewarded for such joyful news) descried Fire; an evident Argument that they drew neer unto some shore. The place discovered was an Iland on the Coast of Florida, by the Natives called Guhanani; by Columbus S. Saviours; now counted one of the Lucaios. Landing his men, and causing a Tree to be cut down, he made a Cross thereof, which he e••ected neer the place where he came on Land; and by that Ceremony took possession of this NEW WORLD, for the Kings of Spain, Octob. 11. An. 1492. Afterwards he discovered Cuba and Hispaniola, and with much trea∣sure and content returned towards Spain: and after three other great Voyages fortunately finished, he died in the year 1506. and lieth buried at Sevil. Preferred for this good service by the Fings themselves, first to be Admiral of the Indies, and next unto the title of Duke De la Vega, in the Isle of Jamaica; but so maligned by most part of the Spaniards, that Bobadilla being 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into those parts for redress of grievances, loaded him with Irons, and returned him 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into Spain. Nor did they only stick after his death to deprive him of the honour of this Discovery (attribu••ing it to I 〈◊〉〈◊〉 not what Spaniard whose Cards and Descriptions he had seen) but i•• his life would often say that it was a mitter of no such difficulty to have sound these Countries: and that if he had not done it when he did, some body else might have done it for him. VVhose peevishriess he consuted by this modest artifice, desiring some of then who insolently enough had contended with him couching this Discovery, to make an Egg stand firmly upon one of its ends. Which when they could not do up∣on many Trials, he gently bruizing one end of it, made it stand upright; letting them see without any further reprehension, how easie it was to do that thing which we see another do be∣fore us.

But to proceed, Columbus having thus led the way, was seconded by Americus V••spusius, an old venturous Florentine, imploied therein by Emanuel King of Portugal; from whom the Continent or Main land of this Country, hath the name of Americas by which still known and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 common∣ly called. To him succeeded John Cabot, a Venetian, the Father of Sebastian Cabot, in behalf of Henry the seventh of England, who discovered all the North-east Coasts hereof, from the Cape of Florida in the South, to New found land and Terra di Laborador in the North causing the Ame∣rican Roytelets to turn all Homagers to that King and the Crown of England. Followed herein by divers private Adventurers and undertakers, out of all parts of Europe bordering on the Ocean. Ferdinand Magellanus was the first that compassed the whole World, and found the South Passage, called Fretum Magellanicum to this day: followed herein by Drake and Cavendish of England. Frobisher and Davies attempted a Discovery of the North-west passage; Willoughby and Burroughs of the North-east. So that according to that elegant saying of the learned Verulam, in his Ad∣vancement of learning, this great building the World, had never thorow lights made in it till these our dayes: by which as almost all parts of Learning, so in especiall this of Navigation, and by consequence of Cosmographie also, hath obtained an incredible proficiency in these later times.

For in the Infancy and first Ages of the World, (pardon me I beseech you this short but not unprofitable digression) men lived at home, neither intent upon any ••orreign Mer∣chandise, not inquisitive after the Lives and Fortunes of their Neighbours: or in the Lan∣guage of the Poet,

Nondum caesa suis peregrinum ut viseret Orbem, Montibus, in liquidas Pinus descenderat undas.

The Pine left not the Hils on which it stood To seek strange Lands, or rove upon the Flood.

But when the Providence of God had instructed Noah how to build the Ark, for the preservation of himself and his children from the general Deluge: the Posterity which descended from him had thereby a pattern for the making of Ships and other Vessels (perfected in more length of time) whereby to make the waters passable, and maintain a necessary intercourse betwixt Nation and Na∣tion. Tis true, the Heathen Writers which knew not Noah, attribute the invention of shipping to sundry men, according to such informations or traditions, as they had received: Strabo, to Minos King of Crete; Diodorus Siculus to Neptune, who was therefore called the God of the Seas, and Tibullus to the People of Tyre, a Town indeed of great wealth and traffick, and the most famous Empory of the elder times; saying

Prima ratem ventis credere docta Tyrus.

The Tyrians first the Art did finde To make Ships travell with the winde.

And questionless the Tyrians, and the rest of the Phoenicians enjoying a large Sea-coast, and many safe and capacious Havens, being in these times most strong at Sea, and making so many fortunate Navigations into most parts of the then known World, might give the Poet some good colour for his affirmation. From the Phoenicians, the Egyptians (their next neighbours) might derive the Art of Navigation; though being an ingenuous People they did add much to it. For whereas the first Vessels were either made of the body of some great Tree, made hollow by the Art of man; or else of divers boards fashioned into a Boat, and covered with the skins of Beasts; (such as are still in use amongst these Americans) the Phoenicians brought them first into strength and form; but the Egyptians added Decks unto them. By Danaus King of Egypt when he fled from his brother Rameses, the use of shipping was first brought amongst the Grecians: who before that time knew no other way of crossing their narrow Seas, but on Beams or Rasters tied to one another. Nave primus a•• Egypto Danaus advenit, ante cnim Ruibus navigabatur, as it is in Plinie: where we may see the true and genuine difference betwixt Ratis and Navis; though now both used indifferently for all sorts of shipping. Amongst the Grecians those of Crete were the ablest Sea-men; which gave oc∣casion to Aristotle to call Crete the Lady of the Sea; and to Strabo to make Mino; the Inventor of Ships. In following times, the Carthaginians, being a Colony of Tyre, were most considerable in this kinde; and by the benefit of their shipping much distressed the Romans. But so it hapned (as all things do and must concur to Gods publick purposes in the alteration of Estates) that a Tempest se∣parating a Quinqueremis or Gallie of five banks of Oars, from the rest of the Carthaginian Fleet, cast it on the shore of Italy: by which accident the Romans learning the Art of Ship-wrights, soon became Masters of the Sea. That France and Spain were taught the use of shipping by the Greeks and Phoenicians; is a thing past questioning: Marseilles in the one being a Phocean, and Gades in the other a Tyrian Colony. As for the Belgians and the Britains, it is probable that they first learnt it of the Romans (though formerly they had some way to transport themselves from one shore to the other.) For Casar telleth us of the Belgae, Ad eos Mercatores minimeè commeant, that they were not at all visited by Forraign Merchants. And the same Caesar found the Seas betwixt France and Britain so ill furnished with Vessels, that he was sain to make ships to transport his Ar∣my: Singulari Militum studio circiter sexcentas & duodetriginta Naves invenit, as his own words are. Having thus brought Navigation to the greatest height which it had in those days; let us look back again on the Inventors of particular Vessels; and the Tackle unto them belonging. That the Phoenicians first invented open Vessels, and the Egyptians Ships with Decks, hath been said before: and unto them also is referred the Invention of Gallies with two Banks of Oars upon aside; which kinde of Vessels grew so large in the course of time, that Ptolomy Philopator is said to have made a Callie of 50 banks. Great Ships of burden, called Ciraera, we owe to the Cypriots; Cock boats, or Skiffs (Scaphas) to the Illyrians or Liburnians: Brigantines (Celoces) to the Rhodians; and Fri∣gots or light Barks (Lembos) unto the Cyrenians. The Phaselis, and Pamphyli (which we may ren∣der Men of War) were the invention of the Pamphylians, and the Inhabitants of Phaselis a Town of Lycia, in Asia Minor. As for Tackle, the Boeotians invented the Oar; Daedalaus and his son Icarus, the Masts and Sails: Which gave occasion to the Poets to seign, that flying out of Crete they made wings to their bodies; and that Icarus soaring too high, melted the VVax which fastened his wings unto his shoulders, and thereby perished; the truth being, that presuming too much on this new invention, he ran himself upon a Rock, and was cast away. For Hippagines, vessels for the transporting of Horse, we are indebted to the Salaminians; for grapling hooks, to Anacharsis; for Anchors to the Tuscans; and for the Rudder, Helm, or Art of Steering to Typhis the chief P••∣lot in the famous Argo: who noting that a Kite when she flew, guided her whole body by her Tail; effected that in the devices of Art, which he had observed in the works of Nature. By these helps some great Voyages were performed in the elder times; the greatest, those of Jason Vlysses, and Alexander, with the Fleets of Solomon, and the Egyptian Kings. Of these, Jason and his compa∣nions. say led in the ship called Argo, through the Euxine Sea, and part of the Mediterranean; Vlys∣ses through the Mediterranean only; small gullets if compared with the Ocean. Alexander's jour∣ney so famoused, and accounted then so hazardous, was but sayling down the River Indus, and four∣hundred surlongs into the Ocean; and for the Fleets of Solomon, and the Kings of Egypt, it is

very apparant, that they went with great leisure, and crawled close by the shore-side: otherwise it had been impossible to have consumed three whole years in going from Ezion-Geber into India, and returnning again; which was the usual time of these voyages, as appeareth in 1 King. 10. 22. After the fall of the Roman Monarchy, the most potent States by Sea in the Mediterranean were the Genoese and Venetians, in the Ocean the English and the Hans-towns, neither of which ever at∣tempted any great discoveries.

But in the year 1300. one Flavio, of Malphi in the Realm of Naples, found out the Compass, or Pixis Nautica, consisting of 8 winds only, the four principal, and four collateral: And not long after, the people of Bruges and Antwerp perfected that excellent invention, adding 24 other sub∣ordinate winds or points. By means of this excellent Instrument, and with all by the good success of Columbus: the Portugals, Eastward; the Spaniards, Westward; and the English, Northwards, have made many glorious and fortunate Expeditions; which had been utterly impossible to have been performed, and had been foolishly undertaken, when that help was wanting. I know there hath been much pains taken by some learned men, to prove the use of the Mariners Compass to be far more antient then is now commonly pretended. Fuller, a very learned and industrious man, but bet∣ter skilled in the Hebrew tongue, then the Philologie of the Greeks and Latines, will have it known to Solomon, and by him taught unto the Tyrians and Phaenicians (the most famous Sea-men of old times) but he brings no Argument of weight to make good the cause. Nor is it possible that such an excel∣lent invention, so beneficial to the common good of all mankind, should have been forgotten and discontinued for the use of more then 2000 years, if ever the Tyrians and Phoenicians had been masters of it; who could not possibly conceal it (had they been so minded) from the Common-Mariners, or they not have communicated it for gain, or desire of glory, to the Greeks and Romans, under whom successively they lived. As little moment do I find in some other Arguments, as that the Lapis He∣raclius of the Antient writers, or the Versoria of Plautus, should be by them intended of the Ma∣riners Compass. For plainly the Versoria of Plautus, is no other then that peece of tackle which our Mariners now call the Belin, by which they use to turn their Sails, and fit them to the change of every wind. And so much doth appear by the Poet himself, in the Comedie which he cals Mercator; say∣ing, Hinc ventus nunc secundus est, cape modo Versoriam. So called from Verso, to turn often; or from Versum the first Supine of Verto; whence Velum vertere is a common phrase amongst the La∣tines, used for the shifting of the Sail as the wind doth vary. As for the Load stone, it is called in∣deed Heraclius Lapis, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 by the Greeks, not because Hercules Tyrius whom the Phoenicians invocated when they were at Sea, had first found out the vertue of it, as our Fuller thinketh; but because first found neer Heraclea, a City of Lydia. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, saith Hesychius the old Grammarian. Called for the same reason Magnes, by the writers both Greek and Latine, because first found in the Territory of Magnesia, a City of Lydia also, whereof Heraclea was a part. So Suidas telleth us for the Greeks, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉: Heraclium Lapidem quidam Magnesiam reddiderunt, quia Heraclea pars est Magnesiae. Called for the very same reason Lydius Lapis also, and by them known only as a touch stone. Thus old Lucretius for the Latines,

Quem Magneta vocant patrio de nomine Graii, Magnetum quia sit patriis de finibus ortus.

Which Stone the Greeks do Magnes name, Because it from Magnesia came.

But I have rambled further then I did intend, drawn by the vertue of the Load-stone too much out of my way. It is time now to return again into America: where the Spaniards at their first Arrival found the People without all manner of Apparel, nought skilled in Agriculture, making their bread either of a Plant called Maize, or a kind of Root called Jucca; a Root wherein is a venemous liquor not inferior to the most deadly poisons; but having first queezed out this juice, and after dryed and prepared the Root, they made their Bread of it. They worshipped Devilish Spirits, whom they called Zemes; in remembrance of whom they kept certain Images made of Cotton wooll, like our Childrens Babies: to which they did great reverence, as supposing the Spirit of the Zemes to be in them; and to blind them the more, the Devil would cause these Puppets to seem to move, and to make a noise: They stood also in so great fear of them, that they durst not displease them; for if their wils were not fulfilled, the Devil strait executed vengeance upon some of their Children; so holding this infatuated People in perpetual thraldom. So ignorant they were of all things which they had not seen, that they thought the Christians to be immortal: wondring exceedingly at the Sails, Masts, and Tacklings of their Ships; themselves knowing no Ships or other Vessels, but huge Troughs made of some great bodied tree. But this opinion of the Christians immortality (in the sense they meant it) did not long continue: for having taken some of them, they held their heads under the water till they had quite choaked them; by which they knew them to be mortal like other men. Quite destitute of all good learning, they reckoned their time by a confused observation of the course of the Moon: and strangely admired to see the Spaniards know the health and affairs of one another, only by reading of a Letter. Of a plain and honest nature, for the most part, they were found to be; Loving and kind in their entertainments, and apt to do good offices both private and

publike, accord••ng to their understandings: encouraged thereunto by an opinion which they had, that beyond some certain hills (but they knew not where) those which lived honestly and justly, or offered up their lives in defence of their Country, should find a place of everlasting peace and happi∣ness. So natural is the knowledge of the Souls immortality, and of some Ubi for the future reception of it, that we find some tract or other of it in most barbarous Nations. And as for Gold and Silver, which the new come Christians so adored, they esteemed them no otherwise then as drosse; though many times they adorned themselves therewith for the colours sake, as they did also with shels, fea∣thers, and the like fine Gew-gawes.

Of complexion most of these Americans were reasonably fair and cleer, little inclining unto blackness: notwithstanding that a great part of this Country lieth under the same parallel with AE∣thiopia, Libya, and the Land of Negroes. So that the extraordinary heat of the Sun is not (as some imagine) the cause of that blackness: though accidentally it may turn the skin into such a colour; as we see in many Country-Lasses, even in colder Climates, whose faces are continually exposed to the Sun and weather. Others more wise in their own conceits (but in no bodies else) will have the Natural Seed of the Africans to be black of colour; contrary both to sense and reason, Experience and true Natural Philosophie being both against it. And some will have this Blackness laid as a curse on Cham, (from whose posterity the African Nations do derive themselves) because, forsooth, he had carnal knowledge of his wife when they were in the Ark: a fancie as ridiculous, as the other false. So that we must refer it wholly to Gods secret pleasure, though possibly enough the curse of God on Cham and on his posterity (though for some cause unknown to us) hath an influence on it.

Touching the Original of this People, it is most probable that they descended from the Tartars; for which there are some Arguments of especial weight. For first, it may be proved in the way of Negation, that they came not from Europe, as having no remainder of the Arts. Learning, and Civi∣lities of it: And secondly, that they came not from Africk, in regard they have no black men a∣mongst them, except some few which dwell on the Sea coasts over against Guinea in Africk, from whence they are supposed by some rempest to have been brought hither: Thirdly, that they have not the least token or shew of the arts and industry of China, India, or any civil Region on that side of Asia. The affirmative Arguments prove first, that they came from Asia; next in particular from Tartary. That they came out of Asia, is more then manifest, in that the West-side of the Country towards Asia is far more populous then the East towards Europe: of which there can be no other reason assigned, then that three parts were first inhabited, and that from hence the rest was peopled. Next, the idolatry of the people, and the particularities thereof, their incivility, and barbarous qualities, tell us that they are most like the Tartars of any. Thirdly, the West-side of America if if it be not Continent with Tartary, is yet disjoyned by a very small Strait, as may be perceived in all our Maps and Cards, as also in the Description of these Countries: so that there is into these Countries a very quick and easie passage. And fourthly, the people of Quivira, which of all the Pro∣vinces of America is the the nearest unto Tartary, are said to, follow in their whole course of their life, the Seasons and best pasturing of their Cattel, just like the Scythian Nomades, or Tartarian Hordes; an evident argument of their Original descent.

But from what Root soever they did first descend, certain it is that they had setled here many Ages since, and overspread all the parts and quarters of this spacious Continent; there being no place which the Spaniards or any other Adventurers found desolate or waste, and without Inhabitants. But their numbers much diminished since these late Discoveries; the Spaniards behaving themselves most inhumanely towards this unarmed and naked People, killing them up like sheep appointed to the slaughter, or otherwise consuming them in their Mines and works of drudgery. And had not Charles the fifth ordained with most Christian prudence, that the Natives should not be compelled to work in the Mines against their wils, but that the Spaniards should provide themselves of Slaves elsewhere, the Natives in a little longer time had been quite exterminated, to the great reproach of Christianity and the Gospel. For so exceeding barbarous and bloody were they at their first coming thither, that Haithney, a Noble-man amongst them, being perswaded to imbrace the Christian faith, demanded first what he should get by being of that Religion? and was answered, that he should get Heaven & the joys there of: Then would he know, what place was destinate to such as died unbaptized? and was answered, that they went to Hell, & the torments of it: Finally, asking unto which of these two Places the Spaniards went? and being told they went to Heaven; he renounced his Baptism, protesting that he would rather go to Hell with the unbaptized, then to live in Heaven with so cruel a people. The rest were driven unto the Font like so many horses to the watering place; and received into the Church of Christ without any instruction: inso much that one old Frier (as himself con∣fessed to Charles the fifth) had Christened 700000 of them, and another of that rank 300000. never acquainting them with any of the Articles of the Christian faith, or points of Religious con∣versation, (except it were to be obedient to their Pastors and Teachers.) Yet here I must confess, (for I am ••oth to defraud any man of his due) there hath been made a great improvement of Chri∣stianity: the number of Christians in this Country, being thought by some learned men of the Church of Rome to equal all those of the Latine Churches in Europe. And though perhaps con∣strained at first unto it as a new Religion, and of a stricter Rule then that which before they had; yet by long time and education, it is now grown more plausible and familiar to them. The Church hereof governed by the four Archbishops of 1 Mexico, 2 Lima. 3 S. Foy & 4 Dominico; who have under them 25 Suffragan Bishops, all liberally endowed and provided for.

VVhen this new world came first acquainted with the old, Isabel Queen of Castile, would not permit any of her husband Ferdinando's subjects to be planted here, viz. Arragonians, or Valenti∣ans, but licensed the Castilians, Andalusians, Biscains▪ and the rest of her own people only, envying the wealth hereof to the rest. VVhen she was dead, Ferdinando licensed generally all the Spaniards, excluding only the Portugals. But so rich a prize could not so warily be senced, but that Portugals, French, English, and now of late the Low-country-men have laid in their own Barns part of the Spa∣niards harvest; who well hoped to have had a Monopoly of so wealthy a Region, and to have enjoy∣ed without any rivall or competitor, the possession (I cannot say the love) of a country so abun∣dantly fruitful. For though some of the Kings of Spain, have been used to say, that they loved the East Indies for their Mistress only, in whose favours they could patiently enough endure a Rival; but esteemed America as their wife, in whose love they could not brook a Competitor without fowl dis∣honour; yet by his leave (or without it rather) some of his neighbours have made bold with his wife in these later times, though in the affections of his Mistress they have greater interest. But these attempts of the English and Hollanders, have been an occasion of great strength to the whole Coun∣try. For whereas in our first VVars with Spain, our private Adventures found the Sea-coasts almost naked of defence, and thereupon many a rich and prosperous voyage to these parts: the Spaniards upon sight of that weakness and disadvantage, so strongly fortified their Havens and Sea-Towns, that towards the later end of the reign of Queen Elizabeth, we were not able to accomplish that with great and publick Forces, which before had been performed by small and private; which caused our Captains and Adventurers, failing oftentimes in the Continent, to make up their Market on the Seas, in the return of the Spanish Navies, as they yet do.

This New World is very plentifull of Spices, Fruits, and such Creatures which the old World never knew; stocked with such store of Kine and Bulls, (brought hither out of Europe since the first dis∣covery) that the Spaniards kill thousands of them yearly, for their tallow and hides only; blest with such abundance of Gold, that they found in many of their Mines more Gold then Earth: a Mettal which the Americans not regarding, greedily exchanged for hammers, knives, axes, and the like tools of iron; for before, they were wont to make their Canoes or Boats plain without, and hollow with∣in, by the force of fire. Other particularities shall be specified in the particular Descriptions of the several Countries. I shall now only take a brief view of such of their Beasts and Fowls, as either this old World did not know, or knew not in such shapes and qualities, as are there presented. Their Lyons less in greatness then those in Africa, are said to be of colour gray, and so nimble as to climb Trees; their Dogs snowted like Foxes, but deprived of that property which the Logicians call Pro∣prium quarto modo, for they could not bark: their Hogs with talons sharp as Razors, and the na∣vil of their bodies on the ••idge of their backs: their Stags and Deer without Horns; their Sheep (they call them Lamas) not only profitable as with us, for food and raiment, but accustomed to the carrying of burdens, some of of 150 pound weight. Amongst such strange Beasts as this old World kew not, we may reckon that deformed one (whose name I find not) whose forepart resembleth a Fox, the hinder part an Ape, except the Feet only which are like a Mans: beneath her belly a Re∣ceptacle like a Purse where she keeps her young till they be able to shift for themselves, never co∣ming thence but when they suck, and then in again. The Armadilla is in form like a barbed Horse, seeming to be armed all over, and that with Artificial (rather then natural) Plates, which do shut and open. The Vi••ugue resembleth a Goat, but greater and more profitable; of the Fleece where∣of they make Rugs. Coverings, and Stuffs; and in the Belly finde the Bezoar, sometimes two or three, a loveraign Antidote against Poisons and venemous Diseases. A kinde of Hare resembling a Want in his feet, and a Cat in his tail, under whose chin nature hath fastned a little Bag, which she hath also taught him to use as a Store house; for in this, having filled his Belly, he preserveth the rem∣nant of his Provision. The Pigritia, a little Beast (not so named for nought) which in fourteen days cannot go so far as a man may easily throw a stone. Then for their Birds, they have them there in such variety of colours, that the Indians will perfectly represent in Feathers whatsoever they see drawn with Pencils; insomuch as a Figure of S. Francis made of Feathers was presented to Pope Sixtus Quintus, whose eye could not discern them to be natural colours, but thought them pencil-work, till he made tryal with his fingers. One called the Tominejo, of all colours, so little that it seems no bigger then a Bee or Butter-flie; the mouth thereof no bigger then the eye of a needle; yet yielding not to the Nightingale in the sweetness of its note and Musick; the Bird and Nest put into Gold Scales, not weighing above 24. grains, yet beautified with Feathers of so many colours, espe∣cially in the neck and brest, that the Indians make great use of them in their Feather pictures. Others as big as these are little. The Condores of such strength and greatness, that they will fall upon a Sheep or Calf, open it, and eat it. Like Miracles of nature have they in their Fruits and Plants, more proper unto Natural History then to this Discourse: and many medicinal Drugs of rare operation, which I leave to the consideration of the Learned Herbarists. I am too much a Fool to be a Physitian, and therefore will not deal in such things as are out of my Element. Yet somewhat of this kinde we may chance to meet with in the Description and Survey of the several Provinces, into which this new World is divided.

The whole is naturally divided into two great Peninsulas; whereof that towards the North is called Mexicana, from Mexico the chief City and Province of it, supposed (for the most Nor∣thern parts of it are not yet discovered) to contain 13000 miles in compass. That towards the South, hath the name of Peruana, from the great Country of Peru, the circumnavigation whereof

is reckoned at 17000 Italian miles. The Isthmus which joyneth these two together, very long but narrow; in some places not above twelve miles from Sea to Sea; in many not above seventeen. By the Spaniards it is called the Streite of Darien, from a River of that name in Peruana, neer unto the Isthmus, and is so small a Ligament for so great a Body that some have thought of turning these two Peninsulas into perfect Ilands. Certain it is, that many have motioned to the Councel of Spain, the cutting of a navigable channel through this small Isthmus, so to shorten their common voyages to China, and the Moluccoes. But the Kings of Spain have not hitherto attempted it; partly because if he should imploy the Americans in the work, he should lose these few of them, which his people have suffered to live; partly because the Slaves which they yearly buy out of Africa, do but suffice for the Mines and Sugar-houses; but principally, lest the passages by the Cape of good hope, being left, those Seas might become a receptacle of Pirats. Which doubtless was a very prudent and Po∣litick consideration. Many times I have read of the like attempts began, but never of any finished. Sesostris King of Egypt, Darius of Persia, one of the Ptolomies, and a late capricious Portugal, had the like Plot, to make a passage from the Red-Sea to the Mediterranean: so had Caesar, Caligula, and Nero, Emperours of Rome, upon the Corinthian Isthmus. Another of the same nature, had Charls the great, to let the Rhene into the Danow; the like had Lucius Verus to joyn the Rhene, and the Rhone: all which, in their peculiar places, we have already touched. Nicanor also King of Syria, intended to have made a channel, from the Caspian to the Euxine Sea; an infinite project: but nei∣ther he nor any of the rest could finish these works; God it seemeth, being not pleased at such proud and haughty enterprises. And yet perhaps the want of treasure hath not been the least cause why the like projects have not proceeded; besides the dreadfull noyses and apparitions, which (as we have already said) continually affrighted the workmen.

Not less observable then this great but unsuccessful design, of cutting a passage thorow this Isth∣mus from one Sea to the other, was that notable, but a like successless Attempt of John Oxenham, an adventurous Englishman, in a passage over it by Land. This man being one of the Followers of Sir Francis Drake, ariving in a small Bark with ••0 of his Companions, a little above Nombre di Dios▪ the chiesest Town of all the Isthmus, drew his Ship on Land, covered it with boughs, and marched over the Land with his Company guided by Negroes, till he came to a River. There he cut down Wood, made him a Pinnace, entred the South Sea, went to the Isle of Pearls, where he stayed ten days: intercepted in two Spanish Ships (who feared no Enemy on that side) 60000 pound weight of Gold, 200000 pound weight in bars of silver, and returned in safety to the Land. And though by the mutinie of some of his own Company he neither returned into his Country, nor unto his ••hip: yet is it an Adventure not to be forgotten, in that never attempted by any other; and by the Spanish Writers recorded with much admiration.

But to return to the Division of this Country, and the two main parts thereof which this Streit uniteth: Mexicana, or the Northern Peninsula, may be most properly divided into the Conti∣nent and Ilands: the Continent again into the several Provinces of 1 Estotiland, 2 Nova Francia, 3 Virginia; 4 Florida, 5 Califormia, 6 Nova Gallicia, 7 Nova Hispania, and 8 Guatimala; each of them branched into many sub divisions, and lesser Territories. Peruana, or the Southern Penin∣sula, taking in some part of the Isthmus, as before we did, hath on the Continent the Provinces of 1 Castella Aurea, 2 Nova Granado, 3 Peru, 4 Chile, 5 Paraguay, 6 Brasil, 7 Guiana, and 8 Paria, with their several members, parts, and particular Regions. The Ilands which belong to both dis∣persed either in the Southern Ocean, called Mare del Zur, where there is not any one of note, but 1. Those called Los Ladrones, and 2 the Ilands of Solomon: or in the Northern Ocean, or Mare del Norte, reduced unto 3 the Caribes, 4 Porto Rico, 5 Hispaniola, 6 Cuba, and 7 Jamaica. In the survey of which particulars we will begin with those which lie on the North-east of this great Con∣tinent, not possessed by the Spaniard; and passing thorow the Plantations of such other Nations as have any footing in the same, come by degrees to the Estates of the King of Spain, that we may lay them altogether without interruption: beginning with Estotiland, the most Northern part, and that which (as some say) was discovered first.

OF ESTOTILAND.

ESTOTILAND, as under that name we comprehend those Regions of the Mexicana which lie most towards the North and East, hath on the East the main Ocean, on the South, Canada, or Nova Francia; on the West, some unknown Tract not yet dis∣covered; and on the North a Bay or Inlet of the Sea called Hudsons Straits, and called so from Henry Hudson an Englishman, who by this way endeavoured to finde out a more commodious and quick passage to Cathay and China, then had been for∣merly discovered. It comprehends, 1 Estotiland specially so called, 2 Terra Corterialis, 3 New∣found Land, and 4 the Isles of Bacaleos.

1. And first Estotiland specially so called, is the most Northern Region on the East side of Ame∣rica, lying betwixt Hudsons Straits on the North; and Terra Corterialis, on the South. The soil sufficiently enriched with natural endowments, said to have in it Mines of Gold and other Mettals; but I doubt it lieth too much North for Gold, whatsoever it may do for Brass and Iron. The People rude and void of goodness, naked, notwithstanding the extream cold of the Country; not having either the wit or the care to cover their bodies with the skins of those Beasts which they kill by hunt∣ing; though their Bellies teach them to keep life by the Flesh thereof. Said by the first Discoverers to sow Corn, to make Beer or Ale, and to have many Barks of their own with which they traded into Groen-land; as also to have many Cities and Castles, some Temples consecrate to their Idols, where they first Sacrificed men, and after eat them. The Language which they spake, expressed in Characters of their own; but some knowledge of the Latine Tongue there had been amongst them, and Latine Books in the Library of one of their Kings, understood by few.

Such were the Reports made of this Country by the first Discoverers, who were certain Fishermen of Freezland, cast by a Tempest on this Coast about the year 1350. Six of them only got on Land, where all died save one: who after along wandring from one Princes Court to another, found means to return into his own Country: the King whereof called Zichumi, being a great Adventurer in the feats of Arms, prepared for the further Discovery and Conquest of it. Animared thereunto by the opportune coming of Nicolo and Antonio Zeni, two noble Gentlemen of Venice, who desiring to see the fashions of the World, furnished a ship at their own charges, and passing the Straits of Gibraltar held their course northward, with an intent to see England and Flanders. But driven by tempest on this Iland, An. 1380. They were kindly welcomed by the King, then newly prosperous in a War against those of Norway: who liked Nicolo so well, that he gave him a command in his Na∣vie, and under his good conduct woon many Ilands, discovered Groen-land, and provided for the conquest of Estotiland also. But Nicolo in the main time dying, the business was pursued by his bro∣ther Antonio, the King in person making one in the undertaking: who liked the Country so well, being once possessed of it, that he built a City in it, and there determining to spend the rest of his days, sent back Antonio unto Freezland, with the most of his People.

This is the substance of the story of the first Discovery, published long since by one Francisco Marcellino out of the Letters of the Zeni, which had they been considered of as they might have been, we had not so long wanted the acquaintance of this part of the World. But whether it were that their reports were esteemed as fabulous by the States of Europe, or that the time was not yet ripe for this great Discovery; there was nothing done in pursuance of it: Zichumi never going back to his own Country, and Freezland not long after conquered by the Kings of Norway. So that the knowledge of it was quite lost again till these later days. Said in the Letters of the Zeni, to be well stored with Fowl, and the Eggs of Birds which they found there for their refreshing: the Haven where they Landed to be called Cape Trin; the People to be of small Stature, fearfull, and to hide themselves in Caves, at the sight of the Freezlanders: that there was a Mountain always burning or casting smoak; together with a certain Spring, whence issued a water as black as Pitch; but no such Cities, Forts, and Temples, as the Fisherman spake of. The Country West from Freez∣land 1000 miles.

To give you the face of it as it stand, as the present, it is said to be well cultivated, fruitfull of all necessaries for the life of man, and rich in mettals; but extream cold: watered with four Rivers, which rising out of an high Mountain in the midst of the Country, disperse themselves over all parts of it. The People said to be more ingenious, of better judgements, and more skilled in most Me∣chanick Arts then the rest of the Americans were at the first Discovery; which argueth some more civil People to have been formerly amongst them. Their Garments of the skins of Beasts or Sea∣Calves; with which also they covered the outside of their Boats, to Keep out the water, and make them able to endure the Sea. VVhat Towns they have, and whether the name of Cape Trin be still remaining, I am not able to discover; this Country lying still for the most part hidden in a Northern Mist. All we can say, is, that some English names have been imposed of late on some

Capes and Promontories lying on the Northern shores hereof towards Hudsons Straits, by Hudson and such others of the English Nation who pursued that enterprise. Of which sort are Prince Henry's Foreland; towards the East, almost at the entries of those Straits: and then proceeding towards the West, Cape Charls, Kings Foreland: and last of all, Cape Wolstenham, at the end thereof, where these Straits open into a large and capacious Bay, called Hudsons Bay. But of these more particu∣larly in another place, where we endeavour the Discovery of such parts of the World as are yet un∣known, and so within the compass of a Terra incognita.

2. TERRA CORTERIALIS hath on the North Estotiland, on the South New-France. So called from Gaspar Corterialis, who in the year 1500 left his name unto it. It is called also Terra di-Laborodoro, both from the pains required of the Husbandman, and the great recompence which it gives him: in the same sence as Campania in the Realm of Naples is named Terra di Lavoro. By the French, who succeeded in the possession hereof after the Spaniard had forsook it, it was called New-Bretagne, with reference to Bretagne in France their own natural Country.

The People at the first coming of Corterialis were found to be barbarous enough, well coloured, swift of foot, and very good Archers: their clothing of Beasts skins, their habitations Caves, or some sorry Cottages; their Religion Paganism, or none; their directions Sooth-saying. Not so forgetful of the Law which Nature had planted in them, as not to know the necessary use of marriage; but extremely jealous. Better conditioned at the present then in former times, by their neer neighbour∣hood to the French, and commerce with Forreiners: affirmed to be very well disposed, to feed most generally on Fish, and to adorn themselves with Bracelets of brasse or silver. Their chief Towns, 1 Brest, 2 Sancta Maria, 3 Cabo Marzo, of which little memorable.

The Country first discovered by Sebastian Cabot, the son of John Cabot before mentioned: who in the year 1499. at the charges and encouragement of King Henry 7. setting sail from Bristol, first made the discovery of these parts, as far as to the Latitude of 67 and an half, (which brings Est••tiland within the compass also of his Discoveries.) The Land which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 first saw, he called Prima Vesta; and an Iland lying before it he called S. Johns, because discovered on the day of S. John Baptist. They found upon the Country plenty of White Bears, Stags greater then ours, Scut-fishes of a yard long, and such store of Cod fish (which the Inhabitants called Baccalaos) that their multitudes sometimes staied his ships, hence the occasion of their name. Recurning home, he found great preparations for a war in Scotland: so that nothing else was done in this Discovery by the English Nation. But three years after, Gaspar Corterialis a Portugueze, setting sail from Lisbon, fell upon those parts of Cabots Dis∣coveries, which since bear his name: from whence he brought the peece of a gilded Sword of Italian workmanship, left there most probably by one of the Cabots Returning again the next year, he was no more heard of; drowned in the sea, or slain by the Salvages on the land; as was his brother Michael, in the year next following. Neglected after this, till the French having planted in Nova Francia, cast an eye upon it; who gave the name of Brest to a town hereof, (according to the name of a noted Port in little Bretagne:) but whether they setled any Colonie in it, or only did resort unto it in the way of trading, I am not able to determine.

3. NEW••FOVND-LAND, (Terra Nova, as the Latines call it) is a great Iland lying on the South of Corterialis; from which parted by a Frith or Streit called Golfe des Chasteaux. So called from the late discovery of it, when discovered first, though it be some forces of years ago: as Wick∣hams College in Oxford hath the name of New College, though founded divers Ages past, because it was the Newest when that name was given.

The dimensions of the Country I have nowhere met with. But for the quantity hereof it is said to be better inhabited in the North parts then in the South, though the South the fitter of the two for habitation. Furnished upon the sea coasts with aboundance of Codfish, as also with Herrings, Salmons, Thornbacks, Smelts, Oysters, and Muscles with Pearls in them. Within the Land a goodly Country, naturally beautified with Roses, sown with Pease, planted with stately Trees, and otherwise diversi∣fied both for pleasure and profit: the Air hereof never very extreme, more temperate in the depth of winter then with us in England, the Brocks being never so frozen over, that the ice is able to bear a dog; & those little Frosts but seldom holding 3 nights together. The people of reasonable stature, full eyed, broad faced, but beardless, their faces coloured with Oker; their houses, Poles set round meeting together in the top, and covered over with skins, an hearth or fire-place in the midst; their Boats of Bark, 20 foot long, and 4 in breadth, not weighing above 100 pound weight, every of which will carry four men, and is by them carried to all places of their Removes.

Places of most importance in it are the several Havens (of which it is conceived to have more, and more commodious, then any one Iland of the World for the bigness of it): not beautified with towns or buildings, but yielding very safe stations to the greatest ships: the chief whereof 1 Rennosa or Roigneuse, on the North of the Promontory called Cape de Raz the South-East Angle of the Iland; of much resort for fishing, from several Countries. 2 Portus Formosus, or Fair-Haven, three miles North of the other, capable of great ships, and bearing into the main land above 40 miles. Situate in the Latitude of 46. and 40 minutes. 3 Thornbay, by the Portugals named Enseada Grande. 4 Trinity Bay on the North of Cape S. Francis, by the Portugals called Bahia de la Conception; a large Bay, five miles broad in the narrowest place, yet safe withall and of very good Anchorage. 5 Bona Vesta, the name of a Port and Promontory. 6 White-Bay, or Bay-Blanche, as the French call it, safe and capacious, on the North of the promontory of S. John. Betwixt which and Cape de Grat, on the North-east Angle of the Iland, is no Port of note. Then on the South-side of the Iland, and the West of

Cape de Raz, is 7 Port Trespassez, 8 Port Presenza, and 9 Port des Basques (or the Biscains Haven) and on the West-side, having doubled the Cape de Raye, in the South-west Angle of the Iland, there is 10 S. Georges Bay; all of them safe, capacious, and of great resort.

4. Before the Iland, at the distance of 25 Leagues from Cape de Raye, lieth a long bank or ridge of ground, extended in length many hundred leagues, in breadth 24 leagues where broadest, in other places but sixteen; and all about it certain Ilands, which Cabot by one common name called BACALAOS (that name peculiar now unto one alone) from the great multitudes of Codfish (by the Natives called Bacalaos) which swarmed hereabouts; so numerous, that they hindred the passage of his ships, as before was noted, and lay in such shoals upon the Coasts, that the Bears caught them with their claws and drew them on land. The Government at that time by Kings, before whom the People in the most formal expressions of duty and reverence used to rub their noses, or stroke their foreheads: which if the King observed or accepred of, and meant to grace the party which had so adored him, he turned his head to his left (shoulder as a mark of favour.

The first Discoverers of this Country (but not known then to be an Iland) were the two Cabots, John, and his son Sebastian, imployed herein by Henry the 7. 1497. as before was noted: the business being laid aside at his coming back, was afterwards revived by Thorn and Eliot, two of Bristol; who taking a more perfect view of it then was took by the Cabots, ascribed to themselves the discovery of it, and animated King Henry the 8, unto the enterprise, which was done An. 1527 but with ill success. In the mean time the Normans, Portugals, and Britons of France had resorted to it; and changed the names which by the English had been given to the Bayes and Promontories. But the English would not so relinquish their pretensions to the Primier Seisin: And therefore in the year 1583. Sir Humfrey ••ilbert took possession of it in the name of the Queen of England, interdicted all other Nations the use of Fishing, and intended to have setled there an English Colonie. But being wracked in his return, the sending of the Colonie was discontinued till the year 1608. when undertook by John Guy a Merchant of Bristol, who most successfully performed it; the Colonie so prospering in a little time, that they had Wheat, Rye, Turneps, Coleworts of their own sowing; some proba∣bility of metals, a certainty of Sables, Musk, and other precious commodities, besides their fish∣ing, though that the great occasion of their setling there. Such plenty is there found of Ling and Cod-fish, all about the Coasts, that ordinarily our men take 200 or 300 of them within four houres space; which they convey from hence to all parts of Europe.

OF CANADA.

CANADA is bounded on the North with Corterialis, on the South with New-Eng∣land, on the East with the Main Ocean; the Countries lying on the West, either not yet discovered, or not perfectly known. So called from the River Canada, the grea∣test, not of this Province only, but of all this Peninsula. A River which hath its Fountain in the undiscovered parts of this Northern Tract, sometimes inlarged into great Lakes, and presently reduced to a narrower channell, with many great windings and Reaches in it. Having embosomed almost all the rest of the Rivers of this Country, it emptieth it self into the Great Bay of St. Lawrence, over against the Isle of Assumption, being at the mouth 40 Leagues in breadth, and 150 Fathom deep. It is also called Nova Francia from the French, who following the tract of Cabot and Corterialis made a further Discovery of these parts, and planted several Colonies in them. The business first undertaken by Jaques Cartier, An. 1534. received here gladly by the Natives, with singing, dancing, and expressing much signe of joy: pursued by Mon∣sieur Roberval, sent thither in the year 1542. by King Francis the first, not only to discover the Country, but to plant some parts of it, who built there a fair Fortress for his greater safety; follow∣ed therein by divers others of that Nation, in their several times.

The nature of the soil and people we shall best discover in the several parts of it; each differing from one another, and so not easily conformed to a general Character. Look we now only on the principal Rivers of the whole, 1 Canada, of which before, 2 Pemtegonet or Norumbegue, as some call it, of which more hereafter. 3. Quimbeque falling into the Ocean as the others do, 4 Rio S. Jo∣han, ending its course in a large Bay called Bay Francoise, interposed betwixt Nova Scotia and the rest of this Country. 5 Les trois Riviers, which rising far north, and passing thorow two great Lakes, falleth into the Canada, 6 Sagnenay, of the same Original, Course, and Fall. A River of so strong a Current, that it suffereth not the Sea to flow up its Channel; so deep, that in many places it attaineth to 100 Fathoms; and though but narrow at the mouth, yet groweth it broader and broader upwards: and having received many lesser streams, looseth it self at last, where the other doth.

It containeth in it the several Regions of 1 Novia Francia, specially so called, 2 Nova Scotia, 3 Norumbegue, and 4 the Isles adjoyning.

1. NOVA FRANCIA specially so named, is situate on the South of Corterialis, and on the North of the great River Canada towards the East; but on both sides of it, in the Western and more in-land parts. The Country naturally full of Stags, Bears, Hares, Matterns and Foxes, whose flesh the People did eat raw (till more civilized) having first dried it either in the smoak or Sun, as they do their Fish. They have also store of Conies, Fowle and Fish great plenty; one Fish more me∣morable then the rest, which they call Adothnel, whose body and head is like that of a Grey-hound. But their greatest Jewels are their Chains of Esurgnie; a shell-fish of the whitest colour, excellent for the stanching of blood; which they fashion into Beads and Bracelets, and so wear, or sell them. Not very plentifull of fruits, or fit for tillage; yet it becedeth some Corn, and of pulse good plenty. The Aire more cold then in other Countries of like height, partly by reason of the greatness of the River, which being wholly of fresh water, and so large withall, chilleth the Aire on both sides of it; partly because of the abundance of Ice, and those hills of snow which the north-winde passeth over in the way to this Country.

The People, when the French first discovered them, very rude and barbarous; few of them furni∣shed with houses, but removing from one place to another, as their food decayed, and carrying all their goods with them (a thing easily done) upon those removes. Such as lived towards the Sea, or the greater Rivers, somewhat better housed. For in the day time they fish in their Boats, which they draw unto the Land at night, and turning them upside down, sleep under them. As ill apparelled as housed for they went all naked, except a little piece of skin before their Privities. Some of them had their heads quite shaven, excepting one Bush of hair on the top of the Crown, which they suf∣fered to grow to the length of an horses Tail, tied up with Leather-strings in a knot. Each man al∣lowed his two or three wives apiece; and they so constant to their Husband that they never marry after his death, but keep themselves continually in a mourning habit, a vizard as it were, made of grease and Coal-dust, which they spread over all their bodies. The women labour more then the men, both in fishing and husbandry; digging the ground instead of Ploughing, with certain pieces of wood, where they sow their Maiz (a Plant of which they make their Bread, in most parts of A∣merica) Idolaters in general before the coming of the French, as they are most of them at this day; the French and others which have planted in these Northern parts having added little more unto Chri∣stianity, then by the Colonies they brought with them. Yet in the midst of this darkness they saw so much light, as to believe that when they died, they went immediatly to the Stars, from thence con∣veyed

to certain green and pleasant fields full of flowers and fruits. Plain Evidence that they believed the immortality of the soul, and that there was some place appointed for reception of it.

The chief Towns of it at that time, 1. Hochelaga, round in figure, compassed about with three Course of timber Ramparts, one within the other, sharp at the top, about two Rods high; with one gate only to give entrance, and that well fortified (in their kind) with Piles and Bars. It had in it 50 great houses, in the midst of every one a Court, and in the middle of that Court a place which they made their fire on. Situate far within the Land, about six or seven Leagues from the banks of the River Canada, in the most pleasant part of the Country; and therefore made the seat of their King whom they highly reverenced, and carried him on their shoulders sitting on a Carpet of skins. 2 Stadac, or Stadacone, and 3. Quebecque, which the French call S. Croix, on the course of the same River also; this last a Colonie of the French. 4 Tadonsac, a safe but small Haven, not capable of above 20 ships; at the mouth of Saguenay. 5 Franco-Roy, a Castle built by Monseiur Roberval, when he came first into this Country. 7 S. Lewis, designed for a French Colonie by Monseiur de Champlain, An. 1611. but never came to great effect: yet so much Champlain got by the under∣taking, that he left it his name to a great Lake of this Country (full of little Ilands) in the Lands of the Uroqueis, inhabiting on the South of the river Canada, into which it emptieth it self at the last.

2. NOVA SCOTIA containeth that part of the Countries of Canada or Nova Francia, which the French call Accadie or Cadie, (being a Peninsula or Demy-Iland) with so much of the main-land as lieth between the River Canada and the large Bay called Bay-Francoise, from the River of S. Croix upon the West, to the Isle of Assumption on the East. So called by King James, in the Grant of these Countries to Sir William Alexander, after Lord Secretary of Scotland, and by King Charles for his approved fidelity most deservedly created Earl of Sterling. The Letters Patents of which Donation bear Date Anno 1621. What time the French having been outed of their holds here by Sir Sam. Argal Governour of Virginia, had abandoned the South parts of Canada, and betook themselves more into the North, and the higher parts of the Course of that River. And in pursuance of this Grant, the said Sir William Alexander in the year 1622. sent a Colonie hither: and having procured a new Map to be made of the Country, caused the Peninsula lying on this side of the Bay Francoise to be called Nova Caledonia; that on the North thereof to be called Nova Alexandria; giving new names also unto most of the Ports and Promontories. For the better accomplishment of which business, he obtained also a Patent for advancing a certain number of Per∣sons to the hereditary dignity of Baronets, or Knights of Nova Scotia, as we call them commonly, distinguished from others by a Ribbin of Orange tauney; the money raised upon which Patent was to be wholly imployed towards this Plantation. But being unable with those helps (as certainly Plantations are of too great burden for a private person) or willing to imploy his money to more profit, he sold Port-Royal to the French, and after discontinued his endeavours in it.

Places of most importance in it, 1. Port Royal, in Accadie or Nova Caledonia, on the Bay-Francoise, once made a Colonie of the French by Monsieur de Monts, An. 1604. continued with much diffi∣culty till the year 1613. when destroyed by Sir Samuel Argal then Governour of the English Plan∣tations in Virginia, by reason that the Jesuites whose neighbourhood he liked not of, had begun to nest there. Sold since again unto the French, as before is said, by whom still possessed. 2 S. Lukes Bay, by the French called Port au Monton. 3 Gaspe, a noted Port in New-Alexandria, opposite to the Isle of Assumption. 4 Gachepe, on a fair Bay in the same Coast also.

3. NORVMBEGA hath on the North-east Nova Scotia, on the South west Virginia. The air is of a good temper, the soil fruitful, and the people in differently civil; all of them, as well men as women, painting their faces. The men are much affected to hunting; and therefore never give their daughters to any, unless he be well skilled in that game also. The Women are here very chast, and so well love their husbands, that if at any time they chance to be slain, the widows will neither marry, nor eat flesh, till the death of their husbands be revenged. They both dance much; and for more nim∣bleness, sometimes stark naked. The Sea upon the Coasts so shallow and so full of sands, that it is very ill failing all along these shores. The towns, or habitations rather, so differently called by the French, Portugals, and Spaniard, that there is not much certainty known of them. Yet most have formerly agreed upon Norumbegua, or Arampec, as the Natives call it; said to be a large, populous, and well-built town, and to be situate on a fair and capacious River of the same name also. But later Observations tell us there is no such matter; that the River which the first Relations did intend, is called Pemtegonet, neither large nor pleasant; and that the place by them meant is called Agguncia, so far from being a fair City, that there are only a few sheds or Cabins covered with the barks of trees, or the skins of beasts. Howsoever I have let it stand on the first reports, it being possible enough that the Town might fall into decay, deserted on the coming of so many several Pretenders; and that the Sheds or Cabins which the last men speak of, may be only the remainders of it.

4. Adjoyning to these Countries of Canada are several Ilands not joyned in any common name, but yet deserving some consideration in this place and time. The principal whereof, 1 NATISCO∣TEC, called the Isle of Assumption, situate in the very mouth of the River, was first discovered by Jaques Carher, An. 1534. in length 35 Leagues, seven or eight in breadth. The Iland very plain and level, of a fruitful soil, beautified with Trees of several sorts, replenished with great plenty both of Fowl and Fish, and furnished with convenient Rodes, though with no good Havens. Not hitherto inhabited, for ought I can find. 2 RAMEAE, a frie of little Ilands in the great Golf of S. Lawrence,

on the South of Natiscotec, first found out or frequented by the Citizens of S. Malo in Bretagne, An. 1590. of great resort for the Morse-fishing, used upon the Coasts, which is here so gainfull, that a French Bark in a very little time killed 1500 of them. These Morses (take this by the way) are a kinde of Sea-Horses, or Sea-Oxen, with two teeth of a foot long growing downwards out of the upper Jaw, sold dearer then Ivory, because esteemed a Soveraign Antidote against poisons. They have also four feet, no ears, the horns about half an ell in length; the skin when dressed, twice as thick as that of a Bull; their flesh when young, as sweet and tender as a Veal. So fat and unctuous that with the bellies of five of them, there is made usually an Hogs-head of Train-oil, as good as that of the Whale. 3. BRION, a small Iland on the South of the Rameae, about two Leagues in length, and as many in breadth; of a rich soil, fat pasturage, well shaded with tall and lofty trees; and neighboured by a smaller Iland called Isle Blanche, of the like fertility. 4. BRITON, (Insula Brito∣num) so named from Jaques Breton a Frenchman, in the time of Francis the first, called also the I∣land of S. Lawrence, is situate on the South east of the Isle of Brion, in form triangular, in compass about 80 Leagues; pleasant and fruitfull, though for the most part swelled with hils. Destitute of Rivers but interlaced with great Arms of the Sea, well stored with shell-fish; and in the midst there∣of a great Lake full of little Ilands: the Woods replenished with plenty of Deer, black Foxes, and a Bird called Pengwin. Inhabited by the Natives only, though the Portugals did sometimes endea∣vour a Plantation in it; but finding the Aire too cold for them, they again deserted it. The chief Hauen is by the English called Newport, by the French Port aux Anglois, from the great resort of the English to it, in regard of their fishing. 5. ISLE DE SABLE, by the French so called from the sands which lie high about it; distant from the Breton Isle about 30 Leagues to the South, 15 Leagues in compass, but more long then broad, and of unsafe Landing. The planting of it, in regard of the safety of the place, attempted twice by the French, and once by the Portugals, but without success. 6. Others of less note, as Menego, and Les Isles des Oiseaux, I pass over purpose∣ly; there being nothing or but little to be spoken of them.

So it appears by this Accompt that though the French have given the name of Nova Francia, to all these Countries; yet they never had the honour of the first discoverie, wherein the English and the Portugueze had precedency of them: nor are possessed of any considerable part thereof, the Scots putting in for a large share; the English Masters of the best Ports, and all the Inlands of the Coun∣try in the hands of the Salvages. Of these some great and powerfull Nations over-sway the rest the chief whereof are the Yroquois on the North-east of Norumbegua, neighboured by the Ochataignins, the Alboumequins, and the Nebicerines, the Souriquois, and Etechimins of Accadie and new Alex∣andria: the Montagnets, and the Attogovantans, on the banks of the Canada. All of them stout and hardy people, false of their words, treacherous in their practises, and merciless in their revenges. So well acquainted with the factions and divisions of Europe, that they know how to make use of one Nation against another; and by that means to keep themselves in their first estate, without being subject unto any. So that the footing which the English, French, or Scots have obtained amongst them, serve rather to secure themselves in the way of their Trading, then to entitle them unto any possession or command in the Country; the French being shut up in a few weak Forts on the North of the Canada; the Scots pretending only to a Bay or two in the South of Accadie; and the Eng∣lish being only Tenants at the will of the Natives for such conveniency of fishing as they have in the adjoyning Ilands.

OF VIRGINIA.

VIRGINIA hath on the North Canada, on the South Florida; on the East Mare del Noort; the western boundaries not known, or not well discovered. So called in honour of Queen Elizabeth, that Virgin-Monarch; when discovered (to any purpose) by Sir Walter Raleigh, An. 1584. By the natural Inhabitants cal∣led Apalchen, from a Town of that name; one of the chief in all the Country.

The Inland parts hereof are Mountainous and barren, full of thick woods, a Re∣ceptacle for wilde Beasts, and the wilder Salvages. Towards the Sea more plain and fruitfull, as will appear by the Survey of its several Provinces; Premising first that Virginia in the full Lati∣tude thereof extendeth from the 34th. degree where it joyns with Florida, unto the 44th. where it quartereth on Norumbega.

The first Discovery hereof by the two Cabots, Father and Son, An. 1497. did first entitle the Crown of England to this Country; The Design after seconded by one Mr. Hare, bringing thence certain of the petit Kings or Princes hereof; who did Homage to K. Henry the 8. then sitting in his Royal Throne in the Palace of Westminster: but nothing further done in pursuance of it. And though John Verazzani, a noble Florentine, at the incouragement and charge of King Francis the first, An. 1524. discovered more of the Country then Cabot did; yet the French too much in love with the pleasures of France, or intangled in Civill Wars amongst themselves, looked no further after it: Insomuch that the Country lying thus neglected, was re-discovered by the charges and di∣rection of Sir Walter Raleigh, then Captain of the Guard, and in great power and favour with Queen Elizabeth, An. 1584. who sending Master Philip Amadas, and Master Arthur Barlow upon this employment, did by them take possession of it in Queen Elizabeths name, in honour of whom he caused it to be called Virginia. The next year he sent hither a Colonie under the conduct of the noble Sir Richard Greenvile: who not supplied with necessaries for their subsistence, returned home again. In the year 1587, a second Colonie is sent hither, but as successless as the first: the business being undertaken only on a private Purse, not owned as the interesse of the State, or of publick moment, till the year 1606. In the mean time the North parts of this Country being more perfect∣ly discovered by Captain Bartholomew Gosnold, An. 1602. and the middle parts being taken up by the Hollanders not long after, that is to say, in the year 1609. the whole became divided into these three parts, 1 New-England, 2 Novum Belgium, 3 Virginia stristly and specially so called. To which the Isles of the Bermudas shall come in for a fourth.

NEW ENGLAND hath on the North east Norumbegua, and on the South-west Novum Bel∣gium. So called by the Adventurers by whom first planted, not so much because opposite to Nova Albion, as some men conceive; as in imitation of the like adjuncts of distinction, given by the French and Spaniards to Nova Francia, Nova Hispania, Nova Gallicia, Nova Granada, and the like.

The Country situate in the middle of the Temperate Zone, betwixt the degrees of 41. & 44. equally distant from the Artick Circle, and the Tropick of Cancer; by consequence naturally of the same degree of heat with France or Italy: But by reason of the thick mists which arise from the Seas ad∣joyning, those heats so moderated, that the Aire is found to be exceedingly agreeable to an English body. The soil not only fruitfull of such commodities as grow there naturally but also of all sorts of grain which were brought from England. Great store of Woods and trees both for fruit and building; plenty of Deer within the VVoods, of salt and fish upon the shores; and as for Turkies, Partriges, Swans, Geese, Cranes, Ducks, Pigeons, such a full variety, as serves not only for necessity, but for Pride and Luxury. The Commodities of most note for maintaining of Traf∣fick, rich Furs, and many sorts of Fish, some Amber, Flax, Linnen, Iron, Pitch, Masts, Cables, Timber fit for shipping: in a word whatsoever comes to England by the way of the Sound, might be at bet∣ter rates, and with far less trouble be supplied from hence; at least, if we believe the Relations of it published in the year 1622.

The People for the most part well enough disposed, if not roughly handled, hospitable, and more civil then the rest of their Neighbours. So tractable and docile in matters of Religion, that liking well the Rites and Ceremonies of the English at their first setling there Anno 1608. they would use to say that King James was a good King, and his God a good God, but their Tanto naught. Which Tanto was an evil Spirit which did haunt and trouble them every Moon, and therefore they worshipped him for fear. which notwithstanding, I finde not any great increase of Christianity amongst the Natives: our English Undertakers thinking it sufficient if they aud their houses served the Lord, without caring what became of the souls of the wretched People; which hitherto have sate in dark∣ness and the shadow of death, notwithstanding those New lights whith have shined amongst them.

And as for those New-comers which have planted there, all English, though some immediately out of Holland; I cannot better tell you of what strain they were, then in the words of John de La••••, Novi Orbis lib. 3. cap 8. where he observeth, Primos hosce Colonos, uti & illos qui postea accesserunt, potissimùm aut omnino fuisse ex eorum hominum Secta, quos in Anglia Brownistas & Puritanos vo∣cant, quales non pauci & in Belgium superioribus annis se receperunt, & hinc ad socios sunt profecti. They were (saith he) either for the most part or altogether of that Sect, which in England are called Brownists or Puritans; many of which had formerly betaken themselves to Holland, but afterwards went thence to joyn with their Brethren in New-England.

Principal Rivers of this part, 1 Tamescot, where our men found. Oysters of nine inches long. 2 Nansic, a River of the Tarentines, one of the chief Nations of this tract. 3 Sagahadoc, of most note, and deservedly too: Of a mile and an half broad at the mouth or influx, and so upwards for the space of a dayes journey, where it maketh a large Lake three dayes journey broad, with six Ilands in it; nourished with two large Channels, the one from the North east, the other from the North-west, each of them rising from a Lake, the least of which four dayes journey long, two broad, the other double it. Of lesse note, 4 Apanawapesk, 5 Ramassoc, 6 Ashamahaga, &c.

The Country on the Sea side full of notable Havens, populous, and very well inhabited; insomuch as Captain Smith reckoned in the space of 70 miles above twenty Havens, some of them capable of 500 or 1000 sail; most of them sheltered from the furies of wind and sea, by the interposition of some Ilands, of which about 200 lie upon that Coast. In the space of 70 miles he reckoneth forty Villages of the Barbarous people, the chief of which, 1 Macadacut, 2 Segocket, 3 Pemmaquid, 4 Nusconcus, 5 Kennebecque, &c. all called by the name of some Brook or water upon which they were seated. Since added by the English, 1 S Georges Fort, the first Plantation of the English, built by them at the mouth of the River Sagahadoc, in a Demy-Iland, An. 1607. 2 New Plimouth, seated in a large and capacious Bay; at the first building (An. 1620.) consisting of nineteen families only, but in short time improved to an handsom Town: which as it was the first Town, so it was the first Church which was setled there, modelled according to the form of Mr. Robinsons Church in Holland, that notorious Separatist, and after made a pattern to the rest of these Churches, each absolute and Independent in it self, without subordination unto any Superior. For my part, I behold Episcopacie as the Primitive Government of the Church of Christ: but if there were no other Pretenders to it then Presbyterie and Independencie. I should as soon look for the ••cepter and shrone of Christ (as they please to phrase it) in the Co-ordination of New England, as in the Presbyteries of Geneva, or the Kirk of Scotland. 3 Bristow, upon the Seaside also, but more North then Plimouth. 4 Barstaple, so called with reference to a noted Sea town of that name in Devonshire; as 5 Boston, with like refe∣rence to as noted a Sea port in Lincolnshire. 6 Quillipiack, on the Bay of Massachusets; a Town of an old name, but a new plantation.

This part of Virginia first discovered by Captain Gosnold, An 1602. and the next year more per∣fectly surveyed by some of Bristol, was by King James An. 1606. granted unto a certain Corporation of Knights, Gentlemen, and Merchants, to be planted and disposed of for the publike; Sir John Popham, then Chief Justice of the Common Pleas, being one of the Chief also in that Commission. By his encouragement, and principally at his charge, a Colonie was sent thither An. 1607. under the Presidencie of Captain George Popham, and Ralegh Gilbert, who built the Fortress of S. George at the mouth of Sagahadoc. But the President dying the next year, and not long after him the Chief-Justice also, the Colonie despairing of good success, returned home again. Successlesly again attempted An. 1614. the Vndertakers were resolved to make further trial of their fortune, and in the year 1616 sent our eight ships more: but it never setled into form till the year 1620. when by the building of New Plimouth, and some encouragements sent thence to bring others on, it grew in very short time to so swift a growth, that no Plantation for the time ever went beyond it. The growth of old Rome and New England had the like foundation: both Sanctuaries, Ad quae turba omnis ex finitimis gentibus novarum rerum cupida confluxit, as Livy telleth us of the one; resorted to by such of the neighbour∣ing Nations, as longed for innovations in Church and State.

2. NOVVM BELGIVM or NIEVW NEDERLANDT, hath on the North-east New-England, on the South-west Virginia specially so called. So named from the Netherlanders, who began their plantation in it An. 1614. the Country being then void, and consequently open to the next Pretender, according to that Maxime in the Civil laws, Quae nullius sunt, in bonis dantur occupanti. And yet they had some better title then a bare Intrusion, having bought Hudsons Cards and Maps, and otherwise contented him for the charge and pains of his Discovery, An. 1609. Of which more anon.

This part of the Country extended from the 38. Degree and an half, to the 41. 15. of a good temperature both of Aire and soil: fruitfull of those things which the Earth brought forth of its own accord, abundance of wilde Grapes, and Nuts, Trees of great height and bulk for shipping; plenty of Herbage, store of Plants, the effects of nature: and where the People did their part, such increase of Maize (a Plant of which they make their Bread) as shewed their care and industry to be well bestowed. Since the planting of the Hollanders there, abundantly well furnished (with∣in their command) with Wheat and other sorts of Grain; as also of Flax, Hemp, and such other Commodities as were brought hither out of Europe. The Woods replenished with Deer, and the Plains with Fowl; the Rivers not inferiour to any in Sturgeons, Salmons, and other the best sort•• of Fish which can swim in the water.

The People though divided into many Nations, and of different Languages, are much of the same disposition with the other Savages. Clad in Beasts skins, for the most part without certain dwellings, dwelling toegether many Families of them under one poor roof, made of Poles meet∣ing at the top, and covered with the bark of Trees. Their houshold stuff a Tabacco Pipe, a wooden dish, and an Hatchet made of a broad flint; their weapons, Bow and Arrows, but their Arrows made or headed with the bones of fishes. Their Religion Idolatry, or worse, their chief God the Devil, whom they worship under the name of Menetto; but with less pomp and Ceremony then is used in Africk. Of manners, fearfull and suspicious (not without good cause) wonderfull greedy of revenge; but if well used, tractable and obedient unto their Superiours; fickle, but very faith∣full unto those who trust them: conceived to be inclinable to the Christian Faith, if they had fallen into the hands and command of those who had studied godliness more then gain.

Rivers of note they have not many. That want supplyed by many large and capacious Bays, all along the Coast; the principal of those that be 1 Manhattes, by some called Nassovius, but by the Dutch commonly Noordt Rivier, which falleth into the Sea at May Port, so called by Cornelius May, the Master of a Ship of Holland, at their first Plantation; another channel of it, which from the noise thereof they call Hell-gate, emptying it self against an Iland called the Isle of Nuts. The River about 15, or 16. Fathom deep at the mouth thereof, affordeth a safe Road for shipping, but of difficult entrance. 2 Zuid Rivier, so called because more Southerly then the other; as fair as that, but hitherto not so well discovered.

Towns here are few either of the old or New Plantations. The Natural Inhabitants live together in Tribes, many Families of those Tribes under one Roof, as before was said; but those Families so remote from one another, that their Habitations are not capable of the name of a Town, and hard∣ly of a scattered Village. Nor do I finde that either the Hollanders or the English (who now di∣vide the whole among them) are much given to building; The title of the Dutch being subject unto some disputes; and the Possession of the English not confirmed and setled. Hudson an Englishman, had spent some time in the Discovery of this Country, and given his name to one of the Rivers of it. With him the Hollanders, An. 1609. as before is said, compounded for his Charts, and Maps, and whatsoever he could challenge in the right and success of that his Voyage. But they were hardly warm in their new habitations, when Sir Samuel Argal. Governour of Virginia, specially so called (having dispossessed the French of that part of Canada, now called Nova Scotia, An. 1613.) disputed the possession with them; alledging that Hudson, under whose sale they claimed that Country, being an Englishman, and licensed to discover those Northern parts by the King of England, could not alienate or dismember it (being but a part or Province of Virginia) from the Crown thereof. Here∣upon the Dutch Governour submits himself and his Plantation to his Majesty of England, and the Governour of Virginia for, and under him. But a new Governour being sent from Amsterdam in the year next following, not only failed in paying the conditioned Tributes; but began to for∣tifie himself, and entitle those of Amsterdam to a just propriety. To which end, he gave unto the Country the name of New Netherland, conferred new names on all the Bays and Rivers of it; and possessed himself of a little Iland neer that Branch of the Noordt-River, which themselves call Hell-gate: where he laid the foundation of a Town, called New-Amsterdam; and built a Fortress by the name of Orange-Fort, which he garrisonned, and planted with five pieces of Cannon, com∣plaint whereof being made unto King Charles, and by him represented to the States of Holland: it was declared by the said States in a publick instrument, that they were no ways interessed in it, but that it was a private undertaking of the West-Indian Company of Amsterdam; and so referred it wholly to his Majesties pleasure. Which being declared, a Commission was forthwith granted to Sir George Calvert, Lord Baltimore to plant the Southern parts thereof, which lie next Virginia, by the name of MARY-LAND; the like not long after to Sir Edmund Loyden, for planting and pos∣sessing the more Northern parts which lie towards New-England, by the name of Nova Albion. And though the Hollanders did then seem willing to be gone, and leave all they had there, for the sum of 2500. l. yet taking advantage of the troubles which not long after followed in England, they have not only raised their demands to a greater height; but furnished the Native Indians with Arms, and taught them how to use their Weapons. A most mischievous and wicked Act; not only tending to the damage and discouragement of the present Adventurers, but even unto the extirpation of all Christians out of all these Countries. But the best is, they were the first that smarted by it; the Sal∣vages thus armed and trained, fell fowl upon them, destroying their Farme-Houses, and forcing them to betake themselves to their Forts and Fastnesses. What hath been since done (for the giving of new names to some of the old places, I look on as a thing of nothing) either in getting out the Dutch, or planting Colonies of the English, I can hardly say: but I fear that little will be acted, or to little pur∣pose, till it be made a Work of more publick interesse.

3. VIRGINIA specially so called, hath on the North••east Nieu Netherlandt, on the South west, Flo∣rida, the name restrained to this part only, since the two last Plantations, which before was common to the whole. The Country lieth extended from the 34. to the 38. degree of Northern Latitude; by consequence the Aire inclined unto heats, if not refreshed and moderated by a constant Gale of Eastern winds which they call the Brize; and the blasts driving on it from the open Seas. Diversified most pleasantly into hills and valleys; the Mountains clothed with woods, and the Fields with fruits. The soil so fruitful that an Acre of Land well ordered will return 200 Bushels, or 25 Quarter of Corn. Said also to be rich in veins of Allom, as also in Pitch, Turpentine, store of Cedars, Grapes, Oile, plenty of sweet Gams, several sorts of Plants for the Dyers use, some Mines of Iron and Cop∣per,

of Timber trees almost infinite numbers; as also great abundance of Cattel, Fish, Fowl, Fruit, and of Maiz no scarcity. Some Christall found amongst the Mountains, on the shore some Pearls; nothing deficient either in the soil or Aire for the incouragement and reward of a thriving Nation.

The People are but few in number for so large a Country, and those as different in size, as in speeeh or manner; Some of them, whom they call Sasques-hanoxi, of so vast a greatness, that in compa∣rison of the English they seemed as Giants: clad with the skins of Bears, and Wolves in so strange manner that the head of the Beast hung before their breasts instead of a Jewel; their Arms, Bows, Arrows, and a Club. Some on the other side, whom they call Wigcocomoci; of so low a stature, that in relation to the other, they appear as Pigmies. But generally they are all of tall stature, well limbed, for the most part without Beards, and the one half of the head kept shaven: clothed in loose Mantles made of the skins of Deer, with an Apron of the same to hide their nakedness; the rest of their bodies painted over with the figures of Serpents or of some other Creature of as horrid shape. Strong and accustomed to the cold which they patiently endure, or feel not: wavering and inconstant, crafty, and somewhat more industrious then the rest of the Savages; but given to anger, and as greedy of revenge as any. Gods they have many, for they worship all things (and them on∣ly) which are like to hurt them, as Fire, Water, Lightning, Thunder &c. So that it may be said of them, as once Lactantius said of the ancient Romans (did not the ignorance of these poor Wretches render them excusable, and make them fitter objects for our Prayers and pittie, then our scorns) Dignissimi homines qui Deos suos semper haberent praesentes. One Devil-God above all the rest (they call him Oke) whom they worship, as themselves confess, more for fear then Love. Not yet con∣verted from these horrible and gross Idolatries by the long neighbourhood of the English; accused in that respect most justly by those of Rome.

No Country for the bigness of it can be better watered, or yield fairer Rivers, the principal of which 1 Powhatan (so called by the name of that petit Roitelet, whose Territory it passeth tho∣row) which having run a course of an hundred miles, and Navigable all that way by smaller Vessels, is at his fall into the Sea about three miles broad. 2 Apamatuck, 3 Nansamund, and 4 Chikaha∣mania, all Tributaries to Pawhatan. 5 Pamanuke, fourteen miles more North then Pawhatan, but of lesser note. 6 Toppahanock, Navigable 130 miles. 7 Patawomeke, passable by Boat 140 miles, and six or seven miles broad where it falleth into the Sea; increased by many lesser streams which come out of the Mountains, and generally well stored with Fish. 8 Pawtunxut, of a shorter Race, but a deeper Channel then most of the former (16. or 18. Fathom deep) and of more choise of fish then the others are.

Along the Banks of these Rivers dwell their several Tribes, scarce any one of which making up an hundred men (that of Patawomeke excepted, which is able to arm after their manner 160) many not yielding above 30. and some not so many. Their Habitations not containing above ten or twelve houses a piece, but in those houses sundry particular Families, are for the most part covered with the barks of Trees; so placed, that the Common Market place standeth in the midst, at an equal distance; the houses of their Weroances (or the chiefs of their Tribes) and that which serveth them for a Temple, being somewhat finer then the rest. And of these Habitations some are presented to us by the names of Ooanoke, by the English called the Blinde Town, 2 Pemeoke, 3 Shycoake, said by my Author to be Civitas ampla, a large City, but we must understand him with Relation to the rest of this Country. 4 Chowanoak, 5 Secatan; 6 Mattaken, 7 Weopomioke, 8 Pyshokonnok, said to be in∣habited by none but women, 9 Chipano▪ 10 Muscamunge, both upon the Sea; most of them called by the name of those several Tribes which inhabit in them.

In reference to the English and their Plantations, we are to know that they made choice of the Southside of a large and goodly Bay for the place of their dwelling. A Bay which thrusting it self a great way up into this Country, and receiving into it many of the Rivers before mentioned, is by the Natives called Chesepoack, and yeildeth the only safe entrance into this part of the Country: the Capes thereof for that cause fortified by the English; that on the Southern point being called Cape Henry, and the other Cape Charles, according to the names of the two young Princes. Towns of most note which have been either since built or frequented by them, 1 James Town (Jacobipolis, so na∣med in honour of King Iames; on the South-side of that Bay, not far from the River Chikahama∣nia: first founded in the year 1606, at what time it was trenched about, and some Ordnance planted on the Works. 2 Henries Town (Henricopolis) so named in honour of Prince Henry, the eldest son of King Iames, built in a convenient place more within the Land, 80 miles from Iames Town. 3 Dales-gift, so called, because built and planted at the charge of Sir Thomas Dale, An. 1610. 4 Ber∣muda, an open Burrough five miles from Henricopolis. 5 Ketoughtan, a noted and frequented Port in the Bay of Chesepoack, very much traded by the English. 6 Wicocomoco the chief Town of Pawha∣tan, one of the Roitelets of this Country; much courted by the English at their first setling here, and a long time after: a Crown being sent him by King Iames with many other rich presents, the bet∣ter to sweeten and oblige him; but for all that he proved a treacherous and unfaithfull neigh∣bour.

The sum of the Affairs of this last Plantation, is, that the business being resumed in the year 1606, and a Commission granted to certain Noblemen and Merchants to advance the work, they fell in hand, by the Counsell and incouragement of Capt. Smith, with the building of Iames Town (having first fortified Cape Henry) in which Town he fixed a Colony of 100 men. These being almost consumed by

famine and other miseries, were the next year recruited with 120 more brought by Captain Newport: but a Fire having casually consumed their houses, once again discouraged them. But the houses being reedified, and a Church added to the houses, by the industry of Smith their Governour, the Colonie began to flourish, and to increase in reputation amongst the Savages. especially having made (as they believed) a friend of Pawhatan. In the year 1609. the Lord De la Ware was appoint∣ed Governour, and Smith commanded to return; who left here 490 persons, (and of them 200 expert Souldiers) 3 Ships, 7 Boats, 24 great Guns, 300 Muskets, with victuals and ammunition necessary; and 39 of their Weroances or Petit-Kings Tributaries and Contributioners to the English. Sir Thomas Gates and Sir George Summers, sent thither with 9 ships and 500 men, lost a great part of their numbers in the Isle of Bermudaz: the rest not well according with the old Plantation, were at the point of returning home, when happily the Lord De la Ware arrived with three Ships more, An. 1610. But falling into a desperate sickness, and come home to England, he recommended the estate of the English there to Sir Thomas Dale, who furnished them with Men, Cattel, and other necessaries: after whom came Sir Thomas Gates with 300 men, and some heads of Cattel. And then the Government hereof being conferred on Henry Earl of Southampton, the affairs here began to settle in a prosperous way; when unexpectedly in the year 1621. the Salvages falling on them (fearing no such treacherie) killed 340 of their men; and had also then surprized James Town, if one of the Savages, who had received the Christian faith, had not discovered their intention. Since that, recovered of that blow, it went happily forwards: and might by this time have been raised to some power and greatness, if the English by diverting on some by plantations, and by imploying indigent and necessitous persons in so great a work, had not discouraged the design. For certainly one might say of this Plantation, as the Scripture doth of the Camp of David in the time of Saul, that few or none were sent unto it (except the Principals) but such as were in distress, or debt, or some way or other discontented: men never likely to advance and pursue a business of such publicke interesse. Commendable howsoever in this particular, (though perhaps that commendation do belong to their Governours) that being here, they kept themselves constantly to those Forms of Worship which were established and observed in the Church of England.

As for the Natives of the whole, they were divided (as was said) into several Tribes, every Tribe under the command of their several Chiefs: which Chiefs though many in number, and of little power, knew well enough how to keep their State unto their Subjects, and to shew it also unto Strangers. For when Powhatan was pleased to give audience unto Captain Newport and the rest of the English sent from Smith, they found him on a Bed of Mats, his Pillow of Leather imbroidered with white Beads and Pearl, attired with a Robe of skins like an Irish Mantle: at his head and feet an handsom young woman; on each side of the room twenty others, with their necks and shoulders painted Red▪ and about their necks a great chain of Beads; his principal men sitting before them in like manner. Yet notwithstanding this great State, (and great it was indeed for such pe••it Princes) he and the rest became so subject to the English, that in Smiths time they did not only pay their Tributes or Contributions, but at his command would send their Slaves and Subjects to James-Town, to receive correction for wrongs done to the Colonie. And it is probable enough that those of New-England, being the greater and more powerful Plantation (as followed with the stronger zeal, and carried on by the united purses of a prevalent Faction) were of like influence also amongst the Natives; though I find it not expressed in so many particulars.

4. The Isles of BERMVDAZ, many in number (some say 400 at the least) are situate directly East from Virginia, from which they are distant 500 English miles, 3300 of the same miles from the City of London. So called from John Bermudaz a Spaniard, by whom first discovered Called also the Summer-Ilands, from the shipwrack of Sir George Summers upon that Coast; so much delighted with the sadness of the misadventure, that he endeavoured what he could to settle a Plantation in it.

That of more same and greatness then all the rest, to which the name is now most properly ascri∣bed, is situate in the Latitude of 32. & 30 minutes. Well stored, when first discovered, with plenty of Hogs, divers fruits, Mulberries, Palmitos, Cedars; as also of Silk-worms, Pearls and Amber, and such rich Commodities: of Fowl so infinite an abundance, that our men took a thousand of one sort, as big as a Pigeon, within two or three hours. The Aire hereof very sound and healthy, found by experience (the best Argument in such a point) to be agreeable to the body of an English man; yet terribly exposed to tempests of rain, thunder, and lightning: For which, and for the many shipwracks happening on the Coasts thereof, and want of other Inhabitants to be said to own it; the Manners have pleased to call it the Iland of Devils. The soil affirmed to be as fertile as any, well watered, plentiful in Maize, of which they have two Harvests yearly: that which is sowed in March, being cut in July; and that which is sowed in August, being mowed in December. No ven••mous creature to be found in all the Iland, or will live, brought hither. And besides these Com∣modities, of so safe a being, so fenced about with Rocks and ••lets, that without knowledge of the passages, a Boat of ten Tuns cannot be brought into the Haven; yet with such knowledge, there is entrance for the greatest ships. The English have since added to there strengths of nature, such additional helps, by Block-houses, Forts and Bulwarks in convenient places, as may give it the title of Impregnable.

It was first discovered (but rather accidentally then upon design) by John Bermudaz, a Spaniard, about the year 1522. and thereupon a Proposition made in the Council of Spain, for setling a Plan∣tation in it; as a place not to be avoided by the Spanish Fleets in their return from the Bay of Me∣xico by the Streits of Bahama. Neglected notwithstanding, till the like accidental coming of Sir George Summers, sent to Virginia with some Companies of English by the Lord De la Ware, An. 1609. Who being shipwracked on this Coast, had the opportunity to survey the Iland; which he so liked, that he endeavoured a Plantation in it, at his coming home. An. 1612. the first Colonie was sent over under Richard More, who in three years erected eight or nine Forts in convenient places, which he planted with Ordinance. An. 1616. a new Supply is sent over under Captain Daniel Tucker, who applied themselves to sowing Corn, setting of Trees brought thither from other parts of A∣merica, and planting that gainful Weed Tobacco. An. 1619. the business is taken more to heart, and made a matter of the Publick, many great Lords and men of Honour being interessed in it: Captain Butler sent thither with 500 men, the Isle divided into Tribes or Cantreds, to each Tribe a Burrough; the whole reduced to a setled Government both in Church and State, according to the Law of England. After this, all things so succeeded, that in the year 1623. here were said to be three thousand English, ten Forts, and in those Forts fifty peeces of Ordinance; their numbers since increasing daily, both by Children borne within the Iland, and supplies from England.

OF FLORIDA.

FLORIDA is bounded on the North-east with Virginia; on the East with Mare del Noort; on the South and some part of the West with the Gulf of Mexico; on the rest of the West with part of New Gallicia, and some Countries hitherto not disco∣vered. Extended from the River of Palmes in the 25 degree of Latitude to Rio de Secco in the 34. which evidently speaketh it for a Country of large dimensions.

It was first discovered by the English under the conduct of Sebastian Cabat, An. 1497. after∣wards better searched into by John de Ponce, a Spaniard, who took possession of it in the name of that King, An. 1527. and by him called Florida, either because he landed there upon Palm-Sunday, which the Spaniards call Pascua di Flores, or Pascha Florida; or else quia Florida erat Regio, by rea∣son of that fresh verdure and flourishing estate in which he found it. But by the Natives it is said to be called Jaquasa.

This Country lying Parallel to Castile in Spain, is said to be of the same temper both for Aire and Soil, but that it is abundantly more fruitfull: the heart of the ground not being here worn out by continual Tillage as perhaps it may be in the other. For here they have great abundance of Maize (the natural bread-Corn of the Country) which they sowe twice a year, viz. March and June, and reap in the third month after, laying it in some publick Barns, and thence distribute it to the neccssities of particular persons. Well stored with several sorts of Fruit, as Mulberries, Cherries, Chelnuts, Grapes, and Plums of both excellent taste and colour: Beasts wilde and came of all kindes which these Countries yield; and of like sorts of Fowl. The Woods and Forrests full of the largest Okes, and the loftiest Cedars; some Cypress-Trees and Bays of a large proportion; with great plenty of that Wood which the Inhabitants call Pavame, and the French name Sassafras; the bark whereof is Medicinal against some Diseases; and another Tree which we call Esquine, affirmed to be a Sove∣raign and present Remedie for the French disease. It is also said to be enriched with some Mines of Gold and Silver, neglected by the Natives, till the coming of the Spaniards and French put a price upon them; and to have in it Emeralds of great worth and beauty, with many Tarquoises and Pearls. Others report that all the Gold and Silver which they have amongst them came from some ships which had been wracked upon those Coasts: contrary whereunto it is said by the Natives, that in the Hills which they call Apalatei, there are found great Veins of a reddish Mettal, which the French concluded to be Gold, though they wanted time and opportunity to search in∣to them.

The People are of an Olive-Colour, great stature, and well proportioned; naked except their Privities, which they hide with the skins of Stags: their Arms and knees stained with divers paint∣ings not to be washed off; their hair black, and hanging down as low as their thighs. Cunning they be, and excellent in the Arts of dissimulation. So stomackfull that they do naturally love War and Revenge, insomuch that they are continually in War with one or other. They are crafty also and very intelligent, as appeareth by the Answer they gave to Ferdinando Soto, a Spaniard, who was here among them An. 1549. For when he went to perswade the people that he was the son of God, and came to teach them the Law: Not so, replyed a Floridan, for God never bad thee to kill and slay, and work all kinde of mischief against us. The Women when their Husbands are dead, use to cut off their hair close to their ears, and strew it on his Sepulchre; and cannot marry again, till their hair be grown long enough to cover their shoulders. Hermophrodites are here also in great plenty, whom they use as beasts to carry their luggage, and put them to all kinde of drudgery. They have all a gross belief of the souls immortality, but are otherwise Idolaters.

Mountains this Country hath not many, as being generally plain and level; the chiefest those cal∣led Apalatei before mentioned; supposed by the Inhabitants to be rich in Mines of Gold. Rivers of most note, 1 Rio Secco, 2 Rio Grande, 3 Serraevahi; the two first named so by the Spaniards, and the last by the Natives: 4 Garunna, 5 Ligeis, 6 Axona, 7 Sequana, and 8 Charente, so called by the French, according to the names of the best Rivers in France; both French and Spaniards having se∣verally and successively the possession of it. Here are also 9 Rio de Flores, or the River of Flowers; 10 Rio de Neives, or the River of Snow; and 11 Rio de Spirito Santo, or the River of the Holy Ghost, all of them falling into the Bay of Mexico. A particular description of these Rivers, their rise, course, and greatness, I finde not in any of my Authors. Only Mercator telleth us of a twelfth River, called Porto Riale, reckoned the chiefest of this Country, the mouth whereof is three miles broad, where it openeth into the Sea betwixt two Promontories, the one towards the West, and the other pointing to the North. Some of these Rivers are affirmed to be haunted with Crocodiles, a creature dangerous alike both by Land and VVater.

The Country not so well discovered and planted hitherto as to be divided into Provinces, is com∣monly distributed into several Tribes, as were all Nations of the VVorld at their first Discovery.

The principal of these they reckon the Quevenes, Marianes, Canagadi, Camoni, Avavares, and Malicones, the Susolas, Quitones, and other names not usual unto us of Europe; though these more passable then many which have gone before: mollified perhaps by the French and Spaniards, and not presented to us in their natural roughness; all governed by their Paracoussi, or several Chiefs, and those at deadly Fewds, and continual Wars with one another. Some have adventured on the names of particular Provinces, as Panuca, Avanares, Abarduosia, Joguazia, Apalchia, An∣thia, Samovia, Colas; but they acquaint us neither with their site nor bounds: except it be that Pa∣nuca lyeth on the borders of Hispania Nova, beyond the large and spacious Bay of the Holy Ghost; and Calos neer the Cape called Cape di Florida. Others distinguish it by the names of the several Roytelets, which varying with the change of the person, makes that division to be very variable and uncertain also. But it is generally agreed that the Peninsula, which pointeth on the Isle of Cuba, hath the name of Tegesta or Florida specially so called; the name of Florida being first given by John Ponce unto this part only, though afterwards communicated unto all the rest of this Country. A Demy-Iland stretching in length from the South to the North 100 Leagues; in breadth where broadest 30 Leagues, and in some places 20 only. Well known by the Cape of Martyrs, looking into the Isle of Cuba; the River of the holy Ghost, and three goodly Bays, the chief whereof, that entituled to S. Joseph; all opening into the Gulf of Mexico, or the Bay of New Spain The whole environed about, save where it is joyned unto the Continent, with Bars of sands, and scattered Ilands, which serve unto it as the out-works to some notable Fortress.

Chief Towns hereof, 1 S. Helens, on or neer a Promontory, so named where this Country bor∣dereth on Virginia: once fortified and possessed by the Spaniard, but not long since abandoned. 2 Fort de Charles, Arx Carolina in the Latine, built by the French upon the Banks of the River Maio, and so called in honour of Charles the ninth, in whose time the Conquest of this Country was undertaken: but ruined by the Spaniard in the VVar between them. 3 Port Royal, a well fre∣quented Haven on the Mouth of the River, of that name; but whether there be any Town now re∣maining, I am not able to say. More in the Land (for these lie all upon the Borders towards Virgi∣nia, Apalche supposed to be a place of great consideration, and in regard of the opinion which was had of the wealth thereof; (but found to be a small Town, of but 40 Cottages) and there∣fore first attempted and took in by the Spaniard, in their invasion of this Countrey under Pamphi∣lus of Narvaes, An. 1528. recovered by the Natives after his departure. 5 Ante, an open Burrough, nine days journey from Apalche, where the Salvages gave the Spaniards a sharp encounter, and slew many of them; but being vanquished at the last, they forsook the Town; of it self not te∣nable. 6 Ocalis, an unwalled Town, but consisting of 600 Sheds (for I dare hardly call them Houses) the chief of the Kingdom of Acuera. 7 Osachile, the chief Seat of the King so called; and, 8 Vitacuchus, a Burrough of 200 Cottages, the principal of the Kingdom of Vitacuchus, both taken by the Spaniards at the same time also. 9 S. Matthews, on the Eastern shore of the Demi-Iland above mentioned, possessed and fortified by the Spaniard. 10 S. Augustines on the same shore, but more South then the other, situate at the mouth of a small River so named, fortified by the Spaniard with many a strong Castle: but for all that taken by Sir Francis Drake, An. 1485. there being found in the Fort of S. John, in which the strength of the Town consisted, 18 brass pieces, and 20000 Florents in ready money, for the pay of the Garrison. Repaired afterwards more strongly then ever formerly. The Spaniards have also Garrisons in two other places of this Country, viz. S. Philip, and S. Jago; but I cannot say distinctly in what part they are.

The Government of this Country, is of one kinde only, though managed by several persons: the Supream power residing in the Chiefs of their several Tribes; at such continual enmity with one another, that they very seldom Joyn together in any Counsels, wherein the publick is concerned. So that the Spaniards may affirm of the present Floridans, as the Romans did of the ancient Britans; Nec quicquam adversus Validissimas gentes utilius nobis fuit, quam quod in commune non consulebant. The not communicating of their Counsells, hastned on their bondage. Yet in the Government of these Chiefs there was somewhat of the Parliamentary way used with us in Europe. For as in all mat∣ters of concernment those Chiefs advised with their Counsell, so if it were a business which concerned the publike, their Priests and others of most note for gravity and wisdom, were admitted to the Consultation. But being severally too weak for a strong Invader, and never joyned together to de∣fend themselves, they made themselves an easie prey to the French and Spaniards. Et sic dum singuli pugnabant, universi vincebantur; by trusting to their single forces they were all subdued. For in the year 1512 John Ponce a Native of Leon in Spain, setting sail with three ships from the Iland of Porto Rico, on Palm-Sunday fell on the Peninsula before described, and for that cause or from the flouri∣shing verdure of it, called it Florida; but did no more then scowre along upon the coasts, and give new names to such of the Promontories and Rivers as he had discovered; and having only a slight skirmish with some of the Salvages returned back again. The business eight years after was again revived by Vasques de Ayllon, who setting sail from the Haven of Plata, in Hispaniola, attained un∣to the Northeast parts of this Continent, bordering on Virginia, where he left names unto the Pro∣montory of S. Helen and the River of Jordan: and having treacherously enslaved some of the Na∣tives (whom he had invited to a Feast) prepared for Spain; where he obtained the Kings Patent for a new Plantation. But his perfidiousness could not prosper. For in the year 1524 coming with his ships upon this Coast, one of them perished on the Rocks, and 200 of his men being killed at their landing, he gave over the Enterprise: the Spaniards hitherto making no more use of these Dis∣coveries,

then wickedly to enrich themselves by stealing Men, whom as wickedly they sold for Slaves. Nor had the voyage of Pamphilus de Narvaez An. 1528. any better end; though undertaken with a Band of 400 foot and 80 horse. For having took possession of the Country in the name of his So∣veraign Charles the fifth, finding some hopes of great treasures to be had at Apalche (distant above a moneths journey from the place of his landing) he would needs march thither. In which action, though he got that and some other Towns, yet he lost himself; few of his men returning safe into their Country, and they not knowing what became of their Generall. As fruitless, but more famous was the enterprise of Hernandes a Soto, begun in the year 1538. and continued till 1543. who with a little Army of 350 Horse, and 90 Foot, overran a great part of the Country, and brought many of the Petit Princes under the command of Spain. But making only a Depraedatorie war of it to enrich himself, and waste the Country, without setling any Colonie, or building any fortifications in it to make good his gettings, the Action ended with his life, which he lost by a Feaver: the remnant of his Souldiers, whom the war had spared, under the conduct of Ludovico Muscoso di Alvarado, recovering Mexico not without great difficulties.

And so the Spaniards leave the Stage, and the French enter, sent on this voyage by Gaspar Coligni Admiral of France, An. 1562. under the conduct of Ribault; who falling on that part of the Conti∣nent which heth on the East side of the Peninsula, gave the first Promontory which he touched at the name of Cape Francois: and after running Northward along that Coast, new-named the Rivers thereof by the names of the Seine, the Loire, the Somme, the Garund, and others of most note in his own Country. Coming as far North as the great River of Porto-Royal, he there built a little Fortress which he called Fort Charles, where he left 26 of his men to keep possession, and returned for France: his soldiers following not long after, as well as they could, destitute of supplies from home, and not able with so small a number to command them there. The Action reinforced about two years after under the conduct of Landonier, who had accompanied Ribault in the former voyage: by whom some further progress was made in this undertaking, and a little Town built on the banks of the River Maio, (so called by Ribault, because in that moneth discovered by him) which he named Charles-Fort, Arx Carolina in the Latine. But a mutinie hapning amongst his men, and some complaints made of him in the Court of France; he was called home, and Ribault sent again to pursue the enter∣prise: Who entring on his charge in August, An. 1565. was presently set on by the Spaniards both by sea and land; his ships forced violently on the Rocks, the new Town sacked, the Colonie put unto the sword, very few escaping; Ribault himself murdered in cold blood by the Enemy, after faith given him for his life. It was thought that above 600 French were slain in this action. So ended the French hopes in Florida, the King being then preparing for a new Civil war, and loth to engage him∣self against the Spaniard, till the year 1627. when at the charge of Dominicus Gurgius a private per∣son, out of an honest zeal to the honour of his Country, and to cry quittance with the Spaniards for their treacherous cruelty, it revived again. And though he found the Spaniards, after the defeat of Ribault, had repaired and fortified Arx Carolina, and raised two Castles more on the banks of the Maio, which they had furnished with such Peeces as they took from the French, and garrisoned with 400 soldiers: Yet giving a couragious onset, by the aid of the Salvages, (to whom the name and neighbourhood of the Spaniards was exceeding odious) he forced them all, demolished the works, and hanged all such of the Soldiers as the sword had spared; and so returned into France: where in stead of honour and reward for so great a service, he was in danger of losing both his life and fortunes, compelled to lurk amongst his friends till the times were changed. The Spaniards after this, to keep some kind of possession, though not finding it in riches answerable to their greedy desires, fortified S. Matthews and S. Augustines on the East-side of the Demy Iland, with the Castles of S. Philip and S. Jago in other parts of the Country towards the North east: thinking himself so strong in the Gulf of Mexico, that no forrein forces dare appear on that side of the Country. So that it seems he playes the part of Aesops Dog in the Manger, neither resolved to plant there himself, nor willing that any others should.

Having thus taken a survey of the main Land of Florida, let us next take a view of such Ilands as lie dispersed up and down in the Seas adjoyning, called by one general name LVCAIOS or LV∣CAIAE INSVLAE; many in number, but reducible to these three heads, 1 The Tortugas, 2 ••he Martyres, & 3 The Lucaios specially so called.

1 THE TORTVGAS are seven or eight little Ilands lying on an heap at the South west point of the Peninsula, called the Cape of Florida, in the height of 25 Degrees; distant from the Port of Havana in the Isle of Cuba (opposite unto which they lie) about six leagues. Well known amongst the Sailers, because much avoided; or rather avoided because known, the danger of their company making their further acquaintance shunned.

2 THE MARTYRES, called also the Caios, are three great Rocks rather then Ilands, covered with a white sand, and full of bushes; the middle most of the three the greatest: situate over against the South-east Promont••ry of the said Peninsula, called from hence Cabeca de los Martyres, or the Cape of Martyrs. Denominated thus by John Ponce the Spaniard, in his first discovery of this Coun∣try, because they seemed afar off to have some resemblance to men impaled upon Stakes, as many of the Martyrs were in the Primitive times. Infamous for the many shipwracks which have since there hapned; but of great observation amongst Sea faring men, because they know by leave∣ing these Rocks or Ilands on the left hand of them, that they are already entred in the Streits.

3. THE LVCAIOS specially lie dispersed on the East of the Peninsula; many in number, and so called from Lucaioneque, the greatest and most Northern of them, situate in the 27 degree of Latitude; of more length then breadth, but hitherto known by name only. Of greater note, though not so big, is that called 2 Bahama, in the middle way betwixt Lucaoneyn and the Peninsula; in length 13 Leagues, and eight in breadth; memorable for giving name to the violent current interposing betwixt it and the Demy-Iland, called the Streits of Bahama, yet not so streit but that they are 16 miles in breadth, though of so forcible a Course, that many times neither winde nor Oars can pre∣vail against it. 3 Guanahani, the most famous of all these Ilands, because the first that was discover∣ed by Columbus, being then almost out of hope of proceeding further; who thereupon caused it to be called S. Saviours; well shaded at that time with Trees, full of fresh Springs, and very plenti∣full of Cotton: now overgrown with shrubs, and bushes. 4 Guanima, by Columbus when first dis∣covered, called S. Maria de Conception; begirt about with Rocks and quick sands, but otherwise of a pleasant and fruitfull soyl, full or delicate Springs. Others there are to the number of 24. or there∣abouts, whose names occur in many of our larger Maps: but being we finde nothing of them but their very names, I shall not trouble my self with the Nomenclature.

Of all in general it is said that they obeyed their King so strictly (for a King they had) that if he commanded them to leap down from an high Rock, they performed the same; though he gave no reason but his Will. The Women of so perfect beauty, that many of the bordering Nations for∣sook their own Countries, to enjoy their Loves: their shape and beauty the more discernable in re∣gard not suffered to wear any thing till their purgations, nor after that but nets of Cotton, filled with leaves of Herbs. But now, and long since, there are neither men nor women to be found in any of them: the People being long since wasted by the Spaniards in the Mines of Cuba and Hispa∣niola; or consumed by Famine and Diseases, or otherwise made away in Prisons, and by several Tor∣ments; to the number of a Million and 200000, as some have told us. And so we pass unto the other side of those Northern Conntries; opposite to Nova Francia, Virginia, and the main Land of Florida: that when we fall into the Countries now possessed by the Spaniard, we may not wander out of them till this work be finished; except it be to take a progress into some of the Ilands, which cannot otherwise be visited but by such a start.

OF CALIFORMIA

CALIFORMIA in the large and general acception of it, containeth all those Pro∣vinces of Mexicana, which lie on the West-side of that Northern Peninsula, beyond Nova Gallicia, and New Spain: though in the stricter, limited to that Province onely which lieth like a Demy-Iland on the other side of a long and spacious Gulf, called Mer Vermiglio, and from hence the Bay of Califormia. But taking it in the largest sense, it hath on the West, and so unto those undiscovered parrs which lie furthest North, to the Streits of Anian. So witnesseth John de Laet, 1. 6. c. 11. CALIFORMIA communiter dicitur quicquid terrarum Novae Hispaniae atque Galliciae ad Occidentem objicitur, ad extremos Americae Septentrionalis terminos, & Fretum quod vulgo Anian vocant. Limited in the stricter sense and acception of it, to an Iland (as it is now generally conceived to be) extended in a full length from North to South, on the West hereof. So that for our more regular proceeding in the Chorographie and Story of it, we must divide it into the Continent and the Iland: the Continent subdivided into the two large Provinces of 1 Quivira, and 2 Cibola; the Iland into 3 Califormia specially so called, and 4 Nova Albion.

And first, the Continent of this part which we call Califormia, hath on the East some parts of Nova Gallicia, and besides that those vast and undiscovered Countries which lie on the West-side of Canada and Virginia, on the opposite shore: bound on the North with the unknown parts of this Mexicana; on the North-west, with the Streits of Anian, if such Streits there be; on the West, with the Sea inter∣posing betwixt it and the Iland called Mer Vermiglio; and on the South and South-west with the rest of Nova Gallicia, from which parted by a great River called Rio del Noort: A River, which rising in the 40 degree of Northern latitude, first parteth Tignez a Province of Quivira, from that of New-Mexico, one of the Provinces of Nova Gallicia; and after a long course falleth into the Sea called Mer Vermiglio, above Cinoloa, another of the Provinces of that Division. Divided as before was said, into the two great Provinces of 1 Quivira, and 2 Cibola.

1 QVIVIRA, taking up the most Northern parts of this side of America, is said to be very plain and level; of few trees, not many houses, nor much stored of people; quite destitute of fruits and corn, and yielding nothing for mans life but the flesh of beasts, which they eat raw, and swallow down in great bits without any chewing. The men apparelled in Buls-skins from the head to the feet; the women, though in a cold Country, with no other garment then their hair, which they wear so long, that it serveth them in stead of a vail to hide their nakedness. They live in Hoords and compa∣nies, like the Hoords of the Tartars, not having any certain dwellings (except some chief men) but remove from one place to another, like the antient Nomades. Neer neighbours unto Tartary, from whence (not being much distant from it) it is supposed that the Inhabitants first came, and from hence by degrees peopled all America.

The Country being full of herbage, breeds great store of Cattel; differing not much in bigness from those of Europe, but that they have an high bunch betwixt their shoulders, bristled upon the back like Bores, with somwhat which resembleth the name in Horses, and the beard in Goats; their legs short, and clad with fetlocks, their horns short, but sharp; the whole Beast of an aspect so horrid, that an Horse will not venture neer them, till well acquainted. Yet in these Beasts lie all their Riches; these being to this people, as we say with us of our Ale to drunkards, meat, drink, and cloth, and more too: For the hides yield them houses, or at least the covering of them; their bones, bodkins; their hair, thread; their sinews, ropes; their horns, maws, and bladders, vessels; their dung, fire; their Calveskins, budgets to draw and keep water; their blood, drink; and their flesh, meat. There is thought to be some traffick from China, or Cathay, hither: For when Vasques di Coronado conquered it, he saw in the further Sea certain ships, not of common making, which seemed to be well laden, and did bear in their prows the figure of Pelicans; which could not be conjectured to come from any Country but one of these two. I know some place this Country more within the Land: and others are so far from letting it look towards any part of the Sea, that they have laid it close unto the back of Virginia. For my part, I have laid it along the Coasts, upon good authority; though I deny not but that some parts hereof may be more remote. Or else to reconcile the difference, it may thus be ended; that the maritime parts being known by other names, the Inlands might retain more speci∣ally the name of Quivira, as we have seen in many other Countries before described.

And this I am the rather inclined to think, because I find mention of three Provinces on the North of Cibola, but in the way unto Quivira; the one called Seio, the other called Cicuic, and the third Tignez: which I look upon as the maritime parts of the same one Country; but better peopled and frequented then the Inlands are, because lying in the way of trafick. The principal Towns of which Provinces, 1 Acus, or Acuco, a small town, but situate in a strong and defensible place; about which groweth some store of Cotton, which from the place the Natives call by the name of Acuco.

2 Tignez, on the banks of a River so called; inhabited by a stout and couragious people, who being resolved not to fall alive into the hands of the Spaniards, when besieged by Vasques de Coronado, after they had held out above six weeks, laid all their housholdstuffe and treasure in an heap together, which they set on fire; and taking their wives and children into the midst of their ranks, made a desperate Sally on the Enemy. A resolution worthy of a better fortune, most of them being slain in the fight, and the rest trod under the horses feet, or drowned in passing over the River. Yet would not those few which were left give up the Town, till it was fired about their ears, and no longer te∣nable: the Spaniard buying this victory (notwithstanding the great odds of their Arms) with the loss of most of their horses, the death of seven of their men, and the wounding of eighty. 3 Cicuic, a small Burrough, but the chief of that Province, four dayes journey from Tignez: from whence the whole way unto Quivira, specially so called, being 90 miles, hath in it neither stone, nor tree, nor any land-mark; insomuch as the Spaniards were fain to make heaps of Cow-dung, to serve for their direction in their coming back.

The first discovery of this Country is to be attributed to the diligence of Antonio de Mendoza Viceroy of Mexico, who desirous to get wealth and honour by some new Adventures, imployed in the discovery of these Northern parts Prier Marco de Nisa. By him and by a Negro which he had for his Guide, there was some light gotten of Cibola, the next Province to this; but so disguised in lyes, and wrapt up in fictions, that that light was little more then darkness. Yet by that glimmering, Francisco Vasques di Coronado, in the year 1540. undertook the business; and sped so well, that having made his way through Cibola, he took the Town of Tignez, as we heard before, and laid his way open to Quivira. Moved to a further journey by the report of the Salvages, (who desired to hasten him out of their Country) telling him of the wealth of a Tatarax, who reigned in the inland parts of Quivira, a Bearded man (those of this Country wearing none) of a white complexion, and one who in his Chappel worshipped a Crosse and the Queen of Heaven. On went the Spaniards towards Qui∣vira, and found out the Tatarax, a poor naked Prince, master of no more treasure then a brazen plate hanging on his brest, and without any such sign of Christianity as they did expect. So frustrated of all their hopes, and having got-nothing but their labour for their pains, and the honour of a new discovery, with the loss of many of their men they returned to Mexico, An. 1542. Some Friers made bold to stay behind, but were all slain by the people of Quivira, except onely one, who like Jobs messenger was left to carry news of the murder: The Spaniards never after looking into these cold Countries, where nothing else was to be gotten but blows and hunger.

2. CIBOLA hath on the North Quivira, on the South and South-east parts of New Gallicia, from which divided by the River called Rio del Nort, as before was said; the West-side of it washed with the Mer Vermiglio, interposed betwixt it and the Iland, ot California specially so called. By the Natives it is called Zuni.

The Air hereof indifferently temperate, if not too much subject in the winter to frosts and snows. The Country for the most part level, rarely swelled with hils, but those very rockie. No Trees that bear them any fruit; few Trees at all, except it be a Wood of Cedars, from which abundantly sup∣plied both with fewel and timber, plenty of Maize, and small white Pease, which they make their bread of; great store of Venison, but they kill it only for the skin; some quantities of Sheep, known for such by their Fleeces only, but otherwise as big each of them as an Horse or Oxe, some of their horns weighing fifty pounds. Of Lyons, Beares, and Tygers so great a number, that they have more then enough for themselves, and could well spare them to their neighbours.

The People generally well limbed, and tall of stature, ingenious in respect of some other Salvages; and though naked except their Privities only, or covered only with a Mantle, yet those Mantles wrought in divers colours, which with some quantity of Cotton which they have amongst them (none of it growing in their Country) shew them to be an industrious Nation, and to maintain a course of trade with some of their neighbours. A further Argument of which is those painted skins, which they have from Cicuique, or some other Country which lies towards the Ocean; my Author telling that they travel for them eight dayes journey towards the North; and probably enough may be some of those Commodities which the Inhabitants of the maritime Provinces of Quivira do receive from Cathay or China, with which they are supposed to traffick, as before was said. Like industry is noted in the Women also, one of which will grind and knead more Maize in a day, then the women of Mexico do in four. In other things not differing from the rest of the Salvages.

This Country was first made known to the Spaniards by the Travels of Frier Marco de Nisa, em∣ployed on new Discoveries by Antonio de Mendoza, as before was said. Leaving Conliacan, the most Northern Province of Nova Gallicia, he overcame a tedious Desart four dayes journey long, at the end of which he met some people who told him of a pleasant Country four dayes journey further, unto which he went: And staying at a place called Vacapa, he dispatched the Negro, whom he took with him for his Guide, to search towards the North; by whom he was advertised after four dayes absence, that he had been informed of a large and wealthy Province called Cibola, a moneths journey thence, wherein were seven great Cities under the Government of one Princess, the houses of which were built of stone, many stories high, the Lintrels of their Doors adorned with Turquoises; with many other strange reports of their markets, multitudes, and riches. But neither the Frier nor the Negro had the hap to see it: the Negro being killed on the very borders, and the Frier so terrified with the news, that he thought it better to return, and satisfie the Vice Roy with some handsome

Fiction, then put himself upon the danger of a further journey. To that end he enlarged and amplified the Reports which the Negro sent him; gave to the Desarts in his way the name of the Kingdoms of Tonteac and Marata; ascribed unto this last a great City called Abacus, once well inhabited, but at that time destroyed by wars; to the other a more ci∣vil and well clothed People, then in other places. Inflamed with which reports Vasques de Coro∣nado undertook the action, but found the Frier to be a Frier; nothing of moment true in all his Relations: the Kingdom of Marata to be found only in the Friers brains; Tonteac to be nothing but a great Lake, on whose Banks had once been many Cottages, now consumed by Wars. And as for the seven Cities of such wealth and bigness, he found them to be seven poor Burroughs; all situate within the compass of four Leagues, which made up that so famous Kingdom which the Frier dreamt of. The biggest of them held about 500 Cottages; the rest of them not above half that number. One of them, lest he might be said to return without doing something, he besieged, and took: but found it such an hot piece of service, that he was twice beaten down with stones, as he scaled the Rampiers: but having taken it at the last, he found in it great plenty of Maize to refresh his Army, and caused the Town (consisting of 200 houses or thereabouts) to be called Granada, for some resemblance which it had to that City in Spain. Such as have since endeavoured the Discovery of these North-west parts, and sailed along the shores hereof on Mer Vermiglio, have added here∣unto the names of some points or Promontories: known in the Maps by the names of Po de S. Clara, not far from the mouth or influx of Rio del Nort, 2 Las Plaias, 3 S. Michael, 4 Rio de Toron, 5 La∣ques del Oro bordering on Quivira; and 6 Rey Coronado, on the East of that.

Betwixt this Region and Quivira specially so called, lieth a Country, which the said Vasques names Tucayan, memorable for the famous River of Huex, on the Banks whereof for the space of 20 Leagues stand 15 Burroughs well-built, and furnished with Stoves, (if he hath not in this part of the Story out-lied the Frier) as in other cold, but more civil Countries, against the extremities of Winter. This Region stretching seven days journey to the River of Cicuique, I reckon to be∣long to the North-east parts of Cibola. As I do also the fruitfull Valley of Aroia de Corazones which they passed in their way hither from Conliacan; with the Town and Territory of Chichilticala, and the Valley of Nuestra Sennora, or our Ladies Dale, in the South parts of it: not knowing otherwise what Province to refer them to.

Proceed we now unto the Iland, the other general part of this Division, parted from Cibola and New Gallicia by a narrow Sea called Mer Vermiglio; and by some, the Golf of Califormia; envi∣roned on all other parts by the main Ocean. Extended in a great length from the 22d. degree of Northern Latitude to the 42d. but the breadth not answerable. The most Northern point hereof, called Cabo Blance, of which little memorable. The most Southern, called the Cape of S. Lucas, remarkable for the great prize there taken from the Spaniards by Captain Cavendish in his Circum∣navigation of the World, An. 1587. Supposed informer times to have been joyned, in the North parts of it, above the Latitude of 27. to the rest of the Continent, and so described in most of our later Maps, till the year 1626 and after that in the Chart or Map of John de Laet, An. 1633. which I wonder at: himself affirming, that in many of the old Maps it was made an Iland; l. 6 cap. 11. and that he had seen a fair Map in parchment, a very fair and ancient draught, Quae Califormiam in ingen∣tis Insulae modum, a Continente divideret, in which it was expressed for a spacious Iland, lib. 6. cap. 17. The reason of the Errour was, that those who first endeavoured the Discovery of it, sayling up the Sea of Mer Vermiglio, found it to grow narrower and narrower towards the North; till it seem∣ed to be no bigger then some mighty River; but that of such a violent current that no Boat was able to pass upwards with wind or Oar, unless haled up with Cords by the strength of men. And ta∣king it to be a River, they gave it the name of Rio de Bona Guia; known by that name, and continued in the opinion of being a River till the year 1620 or thereabouts. At what time some Adventurers beating on these Coasts fell accidentally upon a strait but violent passage, on the North hereof, which brought them with a strong current into Mer Vermiglio: discovering by that Accident, that the waters falling into that Sea, was not a River, as formerly had been supposed; but a violent breaking in of the Northern Ocean; by consequence that this part of Califormia was not a Demi-Iland or Penin∣sula but a perfect Iland. And looking on it as an Iland, we have divided it into Nova Albion, and Califormia specially so called.

1. And first Califormia specially so called, containeth the Southern parts hereof, as far as to the Latitude of 38. where it bordereth on Nova Albion, of which Country though so neer to New Spain, and New Gallicia, and though discovered so long since, we yet know but little: the Spani∣ards either wanting men for new Plantations, or finding small incouragements here to invite them to it. Furnished on the Sea-coasts with great plenty both of Fish and Fowl, which they finde in great Ilands of Weeds floating on the Seas: and more within the Land, with a kinde of Beast haired like a Goat, and with teats like a Cow, but otherwise resembling Deer, which they kill with their Dogs. Some Mountains in it said to cast Fire Ashes, which the Spaniards for that reason call Caco∣fogo. The People numerous, and thicke set; insomuch that on the Banks of the supposed River of Bona Guia were numbred three and twenty Nations, all of severall Languages. In their persons like the rest of the Salvages; but of different dresses. Some of them painting their Faces all over, some half way only; others with painted Vizards resembling faces: holes in their nostrils for their Pendants; the tips of their Ears loaded, if not over-loaded, with the bones of Fishes hanging at them. A girdle about their waste, to which they fasten a bunch of feathers that

hang down behinde them like a Tail: the Women using the like Bunches before them also. Their chief God the Sun, (as that of Cibola is the Water) which they most affectionately worship, as the cause of the increase of their fruits and plants. Joyned in commission with which God, they were taught by Alarcon a Spaniard to worship a woodden Crosse (the more irrational Idolatry of the two) which he caused to be erected at his coming away, with instructions to kneel before it every morning, at the first rising of the Sun: so teaching them to worship their two Idols at once, or to translate their devotions from the Sun a Creature of God's, to a plain wooden Cross (of which they knew nothing but the form) the work of a Carpenter. It is also told us of this people, that each family is ordered by the Father of it, without other government: yet so well managed, that they allowed but one wife to a man and punished Adultery with death; the Maids not sufferd to converse or talk with men before their marriage, but to abide at home and work; the Widows not to marry again, till they had mourned at least half a year for the death of their Husbands. Matters more savouring an Viopian Commonwealth, then a Califormian.

Places of most observation in it, 1 The Capes of S.Clara, and S.Lucas; the first on the South east point of the Peninsula towards New Gallicia; the other on the South-west towards Asia. 2 S.Crosses, (Sinus S. Crucis) a capacious and convenient Haven neer the Cape of S.Clara, so called because discovered upon Holy-Rood day. 3 Cabo di las Plaias, more within the Bay; so named, be∣cause the shore shewed in little hillocks, without grass or shrubs; the Spanish word signifying as much. 4 Cabo Boxo, towards the bottom of the Gulf, (from whence the land on the other side may be easily seen) in the Latitude of 29. 5 S.Andrews, a convenient Haven, and not far off an Iland of the same name, with some Cottages in it. 6 S.Thome, an Iland of 25 Leagues in compass, at the mouth of the Gulf; rising towards the the South in an high Mountain, under which a convenient Road for shipping, the Sea being thereabouts 25 sathoms. Then on the other side towards the Sea, we have 7 S.Abad, a convenient Haven, surrounded with a Country which seemed rich and pleasant. 8 Cape Irinidado, a Promontory well known to Sea men. 9 Cape de Cedros so called from the Cedars growing neer it, in the Latitude of 28, & 15 minutes; with an Iland not far off of the same name also. 10 Cape Enganno, in the Latitude of 31. 11 Puebla de las Canoas, so named from the mul∣titude of Boats (by themselves called Cances) which the people used: four degrees more North∣ward then that Cape. And 12 Cabo de Galera, so named from the resemblance which it had to an Hat, in the Latitude of 36. But these two last I take to be wi••hin the Country of Seyo, one of the Provinces of Quivira. Understand here, that these are onely the names of places, not of Towns or Villages, (for whether there be any such, I am yet unsatisfied:) and that there are many other Promontor••es, Bayes, Rivers and Ilands on both sides of this Region, which I find no names for.

The first discovery of this Country we owe to Ferdinando Cortez (of whom more hereafter) who in the year 1534. furnished out two ships from the Haven of S.Jago in the Western shores of Hispania Nova, to search these Seas: who making some small progress in it, encouraged him the next year to pursue it in person; and passing up the Gulf as high as to the River of S. Peter and Paul, (so called, because discovered on the 29 of June, the Annual feast of those Apostles) for want of victuals and other necessary provisions, returned back again. The business having slept a while, was in the year 1539. awakened by Francisco de Vlloa, one that had accompanied Cortez the time be∣fore: who did not only search to the bottom of the Gulf, but having thorowly canvassed all the Eastern shores, he turned his course, and made as fortunate a Discovery also of the VVestern coasts. Landing, he took possession of the Country with the wonted ceremonies for the King of Spain, and in the place set up a Cross to serve as a Remembrance of his being there. After him followed Fer∣nando the Alarcon, who discovered many Leagues up the course of the supposed River of Buena Guia, where Naguacatus one of the Chiefs of their Clans or Tribes did submit unto him: advancing so far towards the North, that at the last he heard news of Cibala; but unprovided at that time for a journey thither. And on the other side, Rodorico Cabrillo, in the year 1642. coasting along the VVestern shores of this Country, discovered two small Ilands beyond Cape Galera; the one of which he called S.Lukes, and the other the Iland of Possession: and beyond them a fair Haven, which he called Sardinas, more properly belonging to the Province of Seyo. But yet not finding what they looked for, which was Gold and Silver; and hungry Honour yielding but a poor subsistence: the further search of these Countries was quite laid aside; almost as little known now, as before Columbus first set sail upon New Discoveries.

4. NOVA ALBION formerly conceived to be a part of the Continent, hath of late times been found to have taken up but some part of this Iland; lying about the 38 degree of Latitude, and so Northwards as far as to Cape Blanco, as they call it now. Discovered by Sir Francis Drake in his Circumnavigation of the World, An. 1577. and by him named Nova Albion, in honour of Eng∣land, his own Country, which was once called Albion.

The Country abundantly replenished with Herds of Deer, grasing upon the hills by thousands: as also with a kinde of Conies, in their feet somewhat l••ke a Want, and on each side a Sack where they keep such victuals as they cannot eat. The flesh of these Conies serves the People for food; and of their skins, the kings or Chiefs of their several Tribes, make their Royal robes. The men quite na∣ked; the Women with a piece of Mat instead of an Apron, chaste, and obedient to their Husbands. Their houses made of Turf and Osier, so wrought together, as serves to keep them from the Cold:

in the midst whereof they have an Hearth where they make fire, about which they lye along upon Beds of Bulrushes. VVhat Towns they have, and whether they have any or not, and by what names called if they have any, must be referred to a further Discovery: there being nothing to that purpose delivered hitherto. And yet not seated so far North, but that it may be capable of a further light, if any noble Undertakers would adventure on it.

The English were no sooner landed, but the Inhabitants presented themselves before the Generall, with presents of Feathers, and Kalls of Net-work made of Bull-rushes; which he received and re∣quited with great humanity. The news of their Arrivall being carried further, one of their Kings thought fit to bestow a visit on them. A person of a goodly stature, attired in Cony-skins, with many tall men attending on him; one going before him with a Mace, at which hanged three Crowns; with as many Chains; the Chains of bone, but the Crowns of Knit-work, made of Feathers, very ingeniously composed. After him followed many of the common sort, every one having his face painted with white, black, and some other colours; and every one with some present or other in their hands, even the very Boys. Being brought into the Generals presence, the Mace-bearer made a long Speech, which might be well meant, though not understood: and that being ended, the King caused the Crown to be put upon the Generals head, and the three Chains about his neck: the Com∣mon People offering Sacrifices about the Fields in great Solemnity. Not to be interdicted those Su∣perstitions, though the English (whom they took for Gods) seemed offended at them. Finally, after much kindness expressed on both sides, the General promising in the name of the Queen of England, to take them into his protection; he caused a Pillar to be erected in the place; on which he fastned the Arms of England, the Queens name, and his own, and so returned unto his Ships. But the Country lying so far off that no benefit could redound by it to the English Nation, but the honour of the first Discovery: the name of Nova Albion by little and little was forgotten, and at last quite left out of the Maps or Charts; only a Point or Promontory, by the name of Po de Francisco Draco, being left unto us to preserve his memory. And though we have caused the name of Nova Albion to be restored unto the Maps, as it was before: yet we must let the Reader know, that the name of New Albion hath been given lately with as much propriety, but more hopes of profit and advan∣tage, to that part of Virginia which lieth betwixt Mary Land and New England, as before was noted.

Opposite to Cape Blance, in the extreme North parts of America, the supposed Kingdome of ANIAN, from whence the Streits of Anian which are thought by some to part America from Asia, do derive their name; is conceived to lie. Supposed, and supposed only; for not certainly known: the very being of such a Kingdom, and such Streits, being much suspected.

OF NOVA GALLICIA.

NOVA GALLICIA is bounded on the East and South with Nova Hispania, or New Spain; on the West with the River Buena Guia, and the Gulf of Califormia; the Countries beyond it on the North not discovered hitherto. So called because of some resemblance which it was thought to have to Gallicia a Province of Spain in Europe; the word Nova being added to it for distinctions sake.

It is situate between the 18. and 28. degree of Northern Latitude, which measured from the Port of the Nativity (by the Spaniards called Natividad, and contractedly Navidad) where it confi∣neth on New Spain, to the most Northern border of Cinaloa, makes 300 Leagues: the breadth hereof, for so much as is possessed by the Spaniards, but an hundred only. But taking in New Biscay, and Nova Mexicana into the Accompt, the breadth will be greater then the length.

The Aire hereof generally very temperate, but more inclined to heat then cold, many times sub∣ject unto Thunders and great storms of rain; but for the most part of so sound a constitution, that the Inhabitants attain to a good old Age; contagious diseases seldom known amongst them. The ground by consequence somewhat of the driest; if not moystned with the morning dewes, which fall very frequently: and whether by the temperature of the Aire or Soil, apt to produce a kinde of Gnat (which the Latines call Cimices) affirmed to be as big as a bean, which by their stings do very often plague the People, and raise blisters on their bodies as big as Walnuts.

The Country more Mountainous then plain, and in most parts sandy; Quarries of stone in ma∣ny places, but little Marble, or any other stone of value. Good store of Mines of Brass and Silver, few of Gold or Iron; and amongst all their Mettals a great Mixture of Lead. The soil so rich that it yields 60 measures of Wheat for one; and for one of Maize, above two hundred: the Rivers plentifull of Fish, and the Woods of Beasts; great store of Bees without stings, which make their Honey in the Forrests without other Hives. And as for Apples, Pears, Citrons, Figs, Malcotons, and other Europaean Fruits, they thrive better here then they do in Spain, except the Cherry and the Olive: of which the last is most an end undermined by Emmets, and the first thrusts out such an harvest of Leaves (occasioned by the natural rankness of the ground) that they seldom come to their perfection.

The people wavering and inconstant, apt upon any discontent to forsake their houses, betake themselves unto the woods, and many times to return to their antient Barbarism. Crafty, and docile even in matters which concern Religion: but slothful and impatient of any labour, to which not to be hired but for very great wages. Much given to singing, dancing, and sometimes to drinking; and were it not that they loved their Liquour, few of them would betake themselves to the cares of Husbandry. Of stature reasonably tall; their garments for the most part a shirt of Cotton, with a Mantle over it, fastned with two Buckles about their shoulders. They dwell in Villages and Towns, according to the greatness of their several Tribes: those Tribes commanded by their Chiefs, who succeed hereditarily; but subject to the Judges and other Officers of the King of Spain. As for the Spaniards who here dwell, they betake themselves generally to merchandise, and the search of metals, some few to husbandry and grasing; but make not the best use which they might of the Country: For though here be great plenty both of Sugar-Canes and of Caccineel, yet they neglect to refine the one, and attend the ordering of the other; finding perhaps an easier or a greater profit in the other Commodities.

Mountains of most note in all this Country, is that betwixt Guadalaiara and Zacatecas, a League in height, but of such a precipice withal, that no horse nor cattel can ascend it: their other hils rocky, but clothed with woods, full of vast Pines, large Okes, and great store of Wolves. The River of most name is that called Bazania, which rising out of the Lake of Mechuacan in Nova Hispania, fals down a Cataract about four Leagues from Guadalaiara, of ten fathoms deep, and so tumbleth into Mare del Zur: in no place fordable, nor having any passage over it but on Reeds and Rafts, on which the passenger sitteth with his commodities, his horse swimming by; not safe at any time, and at most times dangerous. Some Lakes here be of 20, some of 12 Leagues compass; environed with rich Pastures on every side. Those of less note shall be remembred in their proper places.

It comprehends the Provinces of 1 Cinaloa, 2 Conliaoan, 3 Xalisco, and 4 Guadalaiara; on the Western Shores, 5 Zacatecas, 6 New Biscay, 7 Nova Mexicana, more within the Land. Of all these somewhat shall be said, though of each but little.

1. CINALOA, is the most northern Province of New Gallicia, bounded upon the West with the River of Buena Guia, and some part of the Bay of Califormia; on the East with a long chain of Mountains, called the Hills of Tepecsuan; on the North with the South parts of Cibola, on the South with Conliacan.

The Aire for the most part clear and healthy; the Soil fat and fruitful productive of Maize, Pulse, a

sort of long Pease which the Latines call Phaseoli, but we have no proper English name for; of which abundantly plentifull. Great store of Cotton-wooll, wherewith both Sexes are apparrelled. Well watered with the Rivers, 1 Petatlan, 2 Tamochala 3 Pascua, 4 Yaquim; of no long course, all of them rising from the hills of Tepersuam, and those but 36 Leagues distant from the Sea-shores. By reason of these Rivers here are very rich pastures, which breed great store of Kine, Oxen, and other Cattell.

The People are generally tall, higher then the Spaniards by a hand breadth, warlike and strong, not conquered by the Spaniard without great difficulty; their Armes a Bow and poisoned Ar∣rows, with great massie Clubs. Their Garments for the most part of Cotton-wooll; their hair nourished to a great length, which the men tye up in a Knot, but the Women suffer to hang down to the full length of it. Both Sexes at the first coming of the Spaniards thither, without Clothes at all, but to hide their shame; most miserably poor, worshippers of the Sun, and not a few Cannibals amongst them.

Chief Towns hereof, 1 S.Philip and Jacob, situate on the bank of a River about 42 Leagues from the Town of Couliacan, but of no great note; 2 S.Johns de Cinaloa, a Colony of the Spani∣ards planted here long sixce; and re-inforced by a supply brought thither in the year 1554 by Fran∣cisco de Tharra; scarce able to defend themselves from the old Inhabitants, who ever and anon di∣sturb them with a fresh Alarme. Besides these here are only some scattered Villages, and those not many: the Spaniards finding only 25 old Forts in all the Country, when they first made themselves Masters of it under the Conduct of Nonnez de Guzman, Anno 1542. People every where submitting without any resistance, or if they gathered to an head, soon dispersed again. For what could naked men do against an Army?

2. COVLIACAN, or CVLVCAN, lieth on the South of Cinaloa, coasting along the Bay of Califormia, which it hath on the West; and part of New Biscay on the East. The Country well provided of fruits, inferiour unto none for all sorts of Provisions; and not without some Mines of Silver found out by the Spaniards. The chief Rivers of it, 1 Rio de Macheras or the Ri∣ver of Women, in the North part of the Province; so called because the Spaniards found there more women then men; occasioning the opinion that it was inhabited by Amazons. 2 Rio de Sal, a goodly River; both sides whereof are very well Peopled. 3 Piastla, more to∣wards Xalisco.

The People not much different from the rest of Gallicia, save that their Women were more handsom both for dress and personage: all clothed in Garments of Cotton-wool, when first known to the Spaniards; and yet the men not free from the Sin of Sodom. Their houses neatly thatched with straw; and over the Lintrels of the Doors some Paintings as shameless as the very fowlest of Aretines Postures. Ignorant of Gold, which they had no Mines of; but of late times acquainted, to their cost, with Silver; which they are compelled to dig, and re∣fine for the Spaniards.

Chief Towns hereof 1 Hiustla, on the River so called, about a dayes journey from the Sea; well built and artificially contrived in respect of others; never recovered of that blow which it had from the Spaniards, who in the Conquest of this Country wasted all before them. 2 Quinola, neer Rio des Mugeres. 3 Quatrabarrios, an old Town but new named by the Spaniards, because it consisted of tour parts. 4 El Leon, an old Burrough which from a Lyon there found, had this new name also. 5 Couliacan on a River so named, once the chief of this Province. 4 S. Michael, on the River of Women, built by Nonnez de Guzman, in the Latitude of 25. but afterwards de∣serted or removed rather to a fitter place: and now fixed in the Valley of Harroba, two Leagues from the Sea, in a flourishing and wealthy Soil both for Corn and Pasturage. The whole Country conquered by the Spaniards, Anno 1531. under Nonnez de Guzman; most barbarously burning down the Towns, and destroying the People; as if they came not to subdue but root out the Nation.

3. XALISCO, or GALESCO, as some Writers call it, hath on the North Cou∣liacan, on the South New Spain, on the East the Province of Guadalaiara; on the West the large Bay of Califormia. So called from Xalisco the chief Town of it, when subdued by the Spaniards.

The Soil hereof very fit for Maize, which it yields good store of, but not often herbage good for Cattel, which is reckoned for their greatest want. The North parts called Chiametla, of the two most fruitfull, and better peopled; having in it store of Wax and Honey, with some Mines of Silver. The People formerly Man-eaters, and much given to quarrell; from which Re∣formed since their Conversion to the Gospel: Tenacious still of one of their ancient Customs, which is to carry the smallest burden upon their shoulders, and not under their armes; which to do they think very much mis-becoming.

Chief Rivers hereof 1 S.Sebastians, 2 Rio de Spiritu Sancto, and 3 the great and famous River of Barania spoken of before. Upon the banks of which are situate their most principal Towns, viz. 1 Xalisco, giving name to the whole Province, and to a large Promontory, called by the Spa∣niards Sierra de Xalisco, thrusting it self into the Bay of Califormia, over against the ••slands called the Three Maries; the City taken and destroyed by Nonnez de Guzman, Ana 1530. 2 Compostella,

now the chief City of the Country, and a Bishops See; founded by the said Nonnez de Guzman, An. 1531. when he had fully conquered the Country: by whom peopled with Spaniards, and by him called Del Spiritu Saato. But founded in so ill a place, and so bad an air, destitute both of food for men and grass for horses, as plainly shewed him to have better judgment in Souldiery then in Archi∣tecture. 3 Purification, a small Burrough on the Sea-side, and in the extremity of this Country to∣wards Nova Hispania, neer the Port of Natividad. 4 S. Sebastian in Chiametla, on the River so called, first built by Francisco de Tharra above mentioned; who having found hereabouts some rich Mines of Silver, brought hither in the year 1554 a new Spanish Colonie; and building houses for his Miners in convenient places, occasioned the whole Tract to be called de Tharra.

4 GVADALAIARA hath on the West Xalisco, on the East and South some parts of Nova Hi∣spania, on the North the Province of Zacatecas; well watered with the River Barania which runneth thorow the midst thereof, some of his by-streams moystening the other parts. The Country very wealthy in Mines of Silver, plentiful of Maize, and fortunate in the production of Wheat and such other fruits, as were brought hither out of Europe. The Character of the People we have before ap∣plied in generall to all the Natives of New Gallicia, but most peculiar unto these.

Chief Towns hereof, 1 Guadalaiara, so called by the name of the Province, situate on the banks of the River Barania, or some branch thereof, in a sweet aire and a most rich and pleasing soile; where founded by Nonnez de Guzman, An. 1531. when he had perfected his Conquest: better ad∣vised in the choise of the place, then in that of Compostella before mentioned. A City, of so good esteem, that it passeth for the Metropolis of all New-Gallicia; honoured with the Courts of Judica∣ture; the residence of the Kings Treasurers, & a Bishops See, removed hither from Compostella, A. 1570. Beautified on this last occasion with a fair Cathedral, a Convent of Franciscans, and another of Augustine Friers. 2 Del Spiritu Santo, built by the said Nonnez in that part of this Country which is called Tepique: but not else observable. 3 Sancta Maria de los Lagos, built by the same founder, 30 leagues on the East of Guadala••ara, and the best defence of all this Province against the Chichi∣mecas, a barbarous and untamed people on the North and East parts of this Country: who harbour∣ing themselves in the thickest of the woods, and some unknown Caves, do many times prey upon the Country, which they would utterly destroy, if not thus repressed.

5. ZACATECAS is bounded on the South with Guadalaiara, on the North with New Biscay, on the West with Culnacan and some part of Xalisco, on the East with Panuc•• one of the Provinces of New Spain.

The Country of a different nature. In the west parts, called properly Los Zacatecas, rich in Mines of Silver, (no one Province more) but destitute of Wheat, Maize, Water, and all other provisions; as if it were designed for some wealthy Miser, who could live upon the sight of treasure. The Eastern parts properly called Vxitipa, not so well furnished with Silver, but most abundantly provided with all sorts of fruits; their woods replenished with Deer, their fields with Corn, and every tree giving entertainment to some Bird or other; in a word, nothing wanting in it either for necessity or plea∣sure. Of the People I find nothing singular, but that they are affirmed to be more industrious then the most of their neighbours; whether by force or nature (the Spaniards compelling them to drudge in their Silver-mines) I determine not.

Chief Towns hereof, 1 Los Zacatecas, neighboured by most wealthy Mines, 40 Leagues on the North of Guadalaiara; inhabited by about 500 Spaniards, who have here a Convent of Franciscans. 2 S. Martins, 27 Leagues from Zacatccas, the Mines whereof were first opened by Francisco de Tharra before mentioned; who with many slaves, and all things necessary for a war, was sent upon that errand by Lewis de Velasco, then Vice-Roy of Mexico, An. 1554. The town inhabited by a Colonie of 400 Spaniards, besides women and children. 3 S. Lukes, & 4 De Avinno, built amongst Mines as wealthy as those before, by the same De Tharra: as also was 5 Erena, a small Town, but of the same estate for Silver; distant from Zacatecas 25 leagues towards the Northwest. 6 Nombre de Dios, in the most Northern parts of this Country, 68 leagues from Guadalaiara; the foundation of the same De Tharra. Who having conquered the Natives, and quieted them after some Rebellions by gentle usage, built this Town in a pleasant and fruitful soil: and having got the Government of the Countries which he had discovered, drew hither so many of the Spaniards and chief men of the Natives, by granting them the propriety of some Silver Mines, that it became the chief and best peopled Town of all this Province. 7 Durango, in the valley of Guadiana, about eight Leagues distant from Nombre di Dios, peopled by a Colonie of Spaniards conducted thither by Alfonso Pa∣checo, at the appointment of De Tharra, to whom the Spaniards are indebted for all this treasure. 8 Neres de Frontera, first built for the repressing of some of the Salvages, who used to infest the bor∣ders towards Guadalaiara, during the Regencie of the Marquess of Villa Maurique, who then com∣manded in New Spain.

As for VXITIPA. it belonged once unto the Province of Panuco▪ subdued by Lopez de Men∣doza, imployed therein by Nonnez de Guzman, An. 1529. at that time Governour of that Province. D••membred from it since the Conquest of Zacatecas, and made a Member of the Prafecture of New Gallicia. The chief Town of it called S.Lewis, built in a pleasant Valley by the said Pacheco, and by him peopled with a Colonie of Spaniards: the town not distant from Panuco above twenty Leagues.

6. NOVA BISCAIA, or New Biscay, hath on the South Los Zacatecas; on the West Cinalca; on the North Nova Mexicana; the Countries towards the East not discovered hitherto. So called by Francisco de Tharra, by whom first subdued; from the neer neighbourhood which it had unto Nova Gallicia, of which since reckoned for a part.

The Country subject in the VVinter to great Frosts and Snows; but notwithstanding well provided for of all things necessary; and wonderfully enriched with Mines of Silver. They have also some of Lead, which serve very fitly for the Melting and Purifying of the other; used to this purpose not alone in these Mines of New Biscay, but in those also of New Spain. The People resolute and stout, not Conquered at the first Attempt, nor won so much by force, as by fair perswasions.

Places of most observation in it, 1 S.Barbara, and 2. S.Johns, about three Leagues distant; built only for the benefit of the Mines adjoyning. 3 Ende, the furthest Town which the Spani∣ards have towards the North, of whom a Colonie was there planted (by reason of the adjoyn∣ing Mines) by Roderico del Rio, who did also Fortifie it, by the direction of de Tharra, under whom a Colonell. Distant from S. Barbara, and S. John about twenty Leagues, and an hundred and twenty Leagues from Los Zacatecas. More North by seventy Leagues at least, and within this Region, but not within the power of the Spaniard, are said to be those four great Towns which the Spaniards call Las Quatro Cienagas; but I have nothing of them certain.

This Country first subdued by Francisco de Tharra; who after he had built Durango in the North parts of Las Zacatecas, and assured that Province, advanced with a Troop of 130 horse, for the Discovery and Conquest of his Northern Neighbours. Encountred at the first more with hun∣ger and thirst then with any opposition of the Inhabitants; insomuch that they were sain to eat their Horses: and afterwards by the Rebellion of the Natives, who killed the greatest part of such Horses as were left uneaten. But not discouraged herewith, nor with the many difficul∣ties which he found in his way, being compelled to hew his passage thorow the VVoods by the swords of his Souldiers, he prevailed at last; and having setled it in peace, returned by the way of Cinoloa, which he also Conquered; and planted there a Colony in the Town of S. Johns, as was said before.

7. NOVA MEXICANA, is bounded on the South with New Biscay, on the West with Qui∣vira; the Countries on the North and East not discovered hitherto, though some extend it Eastwards as far as Florida. Extended 250 Leagues from the Town and Mines of S. Barbara, and how much beyond that none can tell; the Relations of this Country being so uncertain, and indeed incredu∣lous, that I dare say nothing positively of the soil or People, but much less of the Towns and Ci∣ties which are said to be in it so named by Antonio de Espeio, a Citizen of Mexico in New Spain, by whom discovered and subdued.

For first, they tell us of the People, that they are of great st••ature (and that like enough, but not so probable) that they have the Art of dressing Chamo••s and other Leather, as well as the best Leather-Dresser in all Flanders: or that they have Shoes and Boots so well sewed and soaled, that no Shoo Maker in all S. Martins could do it better. Then for their Towns, that they are very fair and goodly, the houses well built of Lime and Stone, some of them four Stories, and in most of them Stoves for the Winter Season. The Streets even, and ordered in an excellent Manner. Parti∣cularly they tell us of a Town called, 1 Chia, one of the five chief Towns of the Province of Cuames, which is said to contain eight Market-Places, and all the houses to be plaistered and painted in most curious Manner. 2. Of Acoma, that it is stuate on the top of a Rock, a great Town, yet no way unto it but by Ladders; and in one place a paire of stairs but exceeding nar∣row, hewn out of the Rock; exceedingly well fortified by Nature (they say true in that, if any thing were true which they tell us of it) and all their water kept in Cisterns (but no body can tell from whence they have it.) 3. Of Conibas, on a Lake so called, the City seven Leagues long, two broad; (a second Ninive) but the Houses scatteringly built amongst Hills and Gardens, which takes up a great deal of the room: Inhabited by a People of such strength and courage, that the Spaniards only faced it, and so went away. Much of this stuff I could afford you, but by this tast we may conjecture of the rest of the Feast.

The Country first discovered by Augustino Royaz, a Franciscan Frier, Anno 1580, who out of Zeal to plant the Gospel in the North, accompanied with two other Friers of that Order, and eight Souldiers, undertook the Adventure. But one of the Monks being killed by the Salvages, the Souldiers plaid the Poltrons, and gave over the Action. On their return, Beltram a Frier of the same Order (from whose mouth we must have the former Fictions) desirous to preserve the lives of his Fellows which staid behinde, encouraged one Antonio de Espeio, a Native of Cordula, but a Citizen of Mexico, to engage in such an holy Cause: who raising a Band of 150 horse, ac∣companied with many Slaves, and Beasts of Carriage, undertook the business. I omit the many Nations of the Conchi, Pasnugates, Tobosi, Patarabyes, Tarrahumares, Tepoanes, and many other as hard names, which he passed thorow in his way. But coming at the last to a great River which he called Del Nort there he made a stand; caused the Country on both sides of it to be cal∣led Nova Mexicana, and a City to be built which he called New Mexico, situate in the 37th degree of Northern Latitude, and distant from old Mexico five hundred Leagues: the name

since changed to that of S. Fogi, but still the Metrrpolis of that Province, the Residence of the Governour, and a pretty Garrison consisting of two hundred and fifty Spaniards. Some other Towns he found at his coming hither, viz. 2 Socorro, so called by the Spaniards because of that succour and relief they found there for their half starved Bodies. 3 Senecu, 4 Pilabo, and 5 Se∣viletta, old Towns, but now Christened by the Spaniards, when the Inhabitants thereof did em∣brace the Gospel; each of them beautified with a Church. 6 S. Johns, built afterwards in the year 1599 by John de Onnate, who with an Army of five thousand followed the same way which Espeio went; and having got a great deal of Treasure laid it up in this place, that it might be no incumbrance to him in his Advance. This is the most I dare relie on for this Country: And this hath no such VVonders in it, but what an easie Faith may give credit to: though I had rather believe the Friers whole Relations, then go thither to disprove any part thereof.

OF NOVA HISPANIA.

NOVA HISPANIA is bounded on the East with a fair and large Arm of the Sea called the Bay of New Spain, and the Golf of Mexico; on the West with parts of Nova Gallicia, and Mare del Zur; on the North with the rest of New Gallicia, some part of Florida, and the Golf; on the South with Mare del Zur, or the South-sea onely. So called with relation to Spain in Europe, as the chief Province of that Empire in this New World; with reference to which the Kings of Spain call themselves R••ges Hispa∣niarum in the Plural number.

It extendeth from the 15. Degree of Latitude to the 26. exclusively, i. measuring it on the East-side by the Bay of Mexico to the North of Panuco; but six degrees less, measuring it on the West-side to the Port of Natividad, where it joyneth with Gallicia Nova. Or making our accompt by miles, it is in breadth from Panuco unto Mare del Zur, 200 Spanish leagues, or 600 Italian miles; but hardly half as much on the other side. The length hereof from the East point of Jucutan to the borders of Gallicia Nova, 1200 Italian miles, or 400 Leagues, which is just double to the breadth.

The air exceeding temperate, though situate wholly under the Torrid Zone: the heats thereof much qualified by those cooling blasts, which fan it from the Sea on three sides of it; and by those frequent showres which fall continually in June, July, and August, the hottest seasons of the year. Abundantly enriched with inexhaustible Mines of Gold and Silver, some of Brass and Iron; plenty of Coco-nuts, of which we have spoke before; great store of Cassia; such a wonderfull increase of Coccineel, that 5670 Arrobas of it (each Arroba containing 25 Bushels of our English measure) have been shipped for Europe in one year. Where by the way, this Coccineel groweth on a small tree or shrub having very thick leaves, which they call a Tuna, planted and ordered by them as the French do their Vines: out of the seed whereof ariseth a small worm at first no bigger then a Flea, and the greatest not much bigger then our common Lady-cows, which they much resemble; which feeding on the leaves, and overspreading all the ground in which they are, are gathered by the Natives twice a year, stifled with ashes or with water (but this last the best) dried to a powder in the shade, and so transported into Europe. Here is also great plenty of Wheat, Barley, Pulse of all sorts, and of all such Plants and Roots as we set in Gardens for the kitchin; Pomgranats, Orenges, Limons, Cittons, Malcotoons, Figs and Cherries, even to superfluitie; Apples and Pears in less abundance, few Grapes, and those few they have not fit for wine; Plenty of Maize, and other Plants unknown in Europe; Birds and Beasts, wild and tame of all sorts, and of each no scarcity. Net thus in all places of it, nor in all alike; but some in one, some in another, according to the constitution of the soil and air: which is so different in this Country, that in such parts hereof as are hot and dry, their Seed-time is in April or May, their Harvest in October; but in such places of it as are low and moyst, they sow their Corn in October, and reap in May: thus having two Harvests in a year, and yet but one.

The People more ingenious then the rest of the Salvages, exquisite at some Mechanick Arts, espe∣cially in the making of their Feather pictures; and so industrious withall, so patient both of thirst and hunger, that they will set at it an whole day without meat or drink, turning every Feather to the light, upwards, and downwards, every way, to see in which posture it will best fit the place intended to it. No better Gold smiths in the world, nor men more expert anywhere in refining Metals. Curious in painting upon Cotton whatsoever was presented to the eye. But yet so barbarous with∣all, that they thought the Gods were pleased with the blood of men, which sometimes they sacrificed unto them. So ignorant, that when they first saw the Spaniards on Horse back, they thought the horse and man to have been one creature; and would ask what the Horses said, when they heard them neigh: So careless of the worth of Gold, that they would part with great quantities of it for Knives, Glass-beads, little Bels, and such pe••it trifles. But whatsoever they once were, is not now material: the Spaniards having made such havock of this wretched people, that in 17 years they de∣stroyed above 6 millions of them; roasting some, plucking out the eyes of others, consuming them in their Mines, and mercilesly casting them amongst wild beasts where they were devoured. And as for those who do remain, besides their own natural ingeniosities, they have since learned the Civilities and Arts of Europe. What else concerns this soil and people, we shall shew more particularly, if we find it necessary, in their proper places.

Amongst the Rarities of this Country (though there be many Plants in it of a singular nature) I reckon that which they call Magney, or Mete, said to be one of the principal: a Tree which they both plant and dress as we do our Vines. It hath on it 40 kind of Leaves fit for several uses: For when they be tender, they make of them Conserves, Paper, Flax, Mantles, Mats, Shooes, Girdles, and Cordage; upon them there grow certain Prickles, so strong and sharp, that the People use them in stead of Sawes. From the top of the Tree cometh a Juyce like Syrrup; which if you seeth it, will be∣come Honey; if purified, Sugar; they may make also wine and vinegar of it. The Bark of it roasted maketh a good Plaister for hurts and sores; and from the highest of the Boughs comes a kind of Gum••, a soveraign Antidote against Poisons.

Nor is it less a Rarity, though less usefull to the good of Mankind (except it be to keep them in continual mind of the Fires of Hell) that they have a Mountain in this Country called Propocampeche (situate in the Province of Mexico) which vomiteth Flames of Fire like Aetna: and another in the Province of Guaxaca, which sendeth forth two burning streams, the one of Red Pitch, and the other of Black; a fit resemblance of those Fountains of Fire and Brimstone. Though they have many other Mountains, yet these most memorable. And as for Rivers, though very well provided of that watrie commodity, yet here are none remarkable for length or greatness, but Panuco only, of which more presently. The want thereof supplied by some famous Lakes, and the neighbourhood of the Gulf of Mexico. Amongst the Lakes, the principal are those of Mexico (whereof more anon) and that of Chapala, bordering upon Gallicia Nova, which for its greatness hath the name of Mare Chapalicum, out of which there is made yearly great abundance of Salt. But that which is of greatest beauty is the Golf of Mexico, the greatest and goodliest of the World: in form completely Circular, in compass no less then 900 miles, environed with the main Land, the Peninsulas of Florida and Jucutan, and the Isle of Cuba: two onely Passages in and out, and both well fortified; the one betwixt the Point of Jucutan and the Isle of Cuba, where the Tide with a violent current entreth; the other betwixt the said Iland and the Cape of Florida, where it makes as violent an exit: the Sea so headie in the middest, and yet safe enough, that ships are not to sail in it directly forwards, but must bend either towards the North or South, as their journey lieth, Upon this Golf the King of Spain hath alwayes some ships in readiness; by which he more assureth his Estates in this part of America, then by all his Garrisons.

It comprehendeth the Provinces of 1 Panuco, 2 Mexicana, 3 Mechoacan, 4 Tlascala, 5 Gua∣x••••a, 6 Chiapa, 7 Jucutan. Some others of less note, but reduced to these.

1 PANUCO, the most Northern Province of all New Spain, by some called Guastecan, is bounded on the ••ast with the Golf of Mexico; on the West with Vxitipa, a member of the Province of Zacate∣••••••IN New Gallicia; on the North with Florida, and some Countries not yet discovered, from which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by the River of Palms; on the Southwest with Mechuacan, and on the South with Mexicana. So called from Panuco the chief River of it, which rising out of the hils of Tepecsuan, bordering upon Cinoloa and Couliacan; and dividing New Biseay from the Province of Zacatecas, passeth thorow the middle of this Country, and so at last into the Golf.

The length hereof is reckoned to be 50 leagues, and the breadth as much. Divided into three pro∣vinces: That towards Mexicana, called A••••tuxetlan, of a fruitful soil, and not without some Mines of Gold; once very populous, till in the year 1522. dispeopled in a manner by Ferdinando Cortez in his war against them. The other called Chila, less fruitful, but possibly for want of People to im∣prove the Land: for being formerly of a stout couragious nature, and trusting overmuch to their ••ens and Fastnesses, they put the Spaniards to such trouble when they warred upon them, that the Conquerours to secure themselves from all future dangers, endeavoured to root them out and de∣stroy them utterly. The third lieth towards the River of Palmes, inclined to barrenness, and un∣pleasant; but the name I find not.

Chief Towns hereof at the coming of the Spaniards hither, 1 Las Caxas, 2 Yxicuyan, 3 Nacha∣patan, 4. Taquinite, 5 Tuzeteco, desolate and laid waste by the cruel Spaniards. Of most note now, 6 Tan••hipa, and 7 Tameclipa, two small Burroughs in the Province of the River of Palmes (for so I call it) inhabited by the Natives only. 8 S. Kallap, another small Town, but in the Province of Chila, inhabited by a few Christians, with a Convent of Augustinian Friers; sacked by the Savages in the year 1571. 9 Tamp••••e, or S.Lewis de Tampice, a Colonie of the Spaniards, situate on the North banks or the River Panuco, and at the very mouth thereof, where it hath a very large Haven, but so barred with sands, that no ship of great burden can make use of it; the River otherwise so deep, that Vessels of 500 tun might sail 60 leagues at least in it against the stream. 10 S.Stevaen del Puerto, on the Southern side of that River, in the Latitude of 23. about 65 Leagues on the North of Mexico, from the Sea eight leagues; now the Metropolis, and town of greatest trade in all this Country. Built by Ferdinando Cortez in the place where formerly had stood Panuco, once the chief City of the Province, but by him destroyed. Opposite hereunto on the other side of the River, lie great store of Salt-pits, out of which the people of this town raise their greatest profit. 11 S. Jago de los Valles, or S. James in the Vallies, 25 leagues Westward (but inclining to the South withall) from S. Scevan del Puerto; situate in an open Country, and therefore fenced about with a Wall of Earth: to the In∣habitants whereof (all Spaniards, as in that before) the King of Spain hath granted many fair possessions, to defend those parts (then being the borders of his Estates) against the Salvages.

This Country first attempted by Francisco Garaio, but the conquest of it finished by Cortez, as be∣fore is said: each striving, as it seemeth, who should most deface it, and be enrolled for the greatest Man-slayer of the two. But having carried on the course of their Victories almost as far as to the River of Palms, they desisted there; either because already glutted with humane blood, or that the con∣quest of those parts would not quit the charge. Insomuch as in all that Country from the River of Palms to the Cape of Florida, though lying all along on the Golf of Mexico, the Spaniards have not one foot of Ground: secure enough, because it lieth all along that Golf, that no other Nation can possess it.

2. MECHV AC AN hath on the North-east Panuco, on the East Mexicana, on the South part of Tlascala, on the West the main Ocean, and on the North the Province of Xalisco in New Gallicia. So called from the abundance of Fish which their Lakes and Rivers did afford them; the word in their own language signifying Locum Piscosum, or a Country of Fish.

The breadth hereof on the Sea-coasts is 80 Leagues, in the borders towards Mexicana, but sixty only. The length I finde not yet agreed on. Blest with an Aire so sound and sweet that sick Folk come hither out of other Countries, to recover their health: Well stored with Rivers, some Lakes, innumerable Springs of running water, and here and there some hot Bathes issuing from the Rocks. The Soil so plentifully productive of all sorts of grain (even to admiration) that in some parts hereof four Measures of Seed have brought forth 600 Measures of the same grain, in the following Harvest. Well VVooded, and by reason of its Springs and Rivers, full of excellent Pastures; and yet not yielding unto any part of all America, for Medecinal Herbs and Plants of very Soveraign Na∣ture for the good of Mankinde. It affordeth also store of Amber, Mulberry Trees, Silk, Wax, Honey, and such other things, as chiefly serve for Pomp and pleasure.

The People tall of stature, but strong and Active: of a good wit, and skilled in many excellent Manufactures. They speak four Languages of their own; but that most generally used, is by the Spa∣niards called the Tarascuan Tongue; which though it be an elegant and copious Language, yet most of them speak the Spanish also. More pliant to the Manners and Apparell of that Nation, then the rest of New Spain (the Mexicans excepted only) and so inclinable to the Gospel; that they are almost all gained from their old Idolatries. Insomuch that the whole Country being divided into 50 Parishes; every Parish hath its several Priests and inferiour Ministers, who in the Language of the place do in∣struct the People, in which they Preach to them, and hear their Confessions: besides many Convents of Dominicans and Augustine Friers.

It containeth in it upwards of 150 Towns or Burroughs, besides scattering Villages; 90 of which have Free Schools in them, and almost every one a Spittle for relief of the Sick. The principal thereof, 1 Zinzoutza, the seat of the old Kings of Mechuachan; in the first times of Christianity in this Coun∣try, made a Bishops See, till removed to Pascuar. The first Bishop Vasquez de Quiroga. 2 Pascuar, of no great note at present, but that the Bishops See was removed thither, because neerer to Mex∣ico, from which distant 47 Leagues. 3 Valladolit, now the chief City of this Province, and the Bishops See, removed hither from Pascuar, and here finally setled in a fair Cathedral, Anno 1544. situate neer, a large Lake (said to be bigger then that of Mexico) which doth not only afford the City great store of Fish, but yeildeth them the opportunity of severall pleasures which they take in Boats upon the Water. The Lake and Citie by the Natives called Gnayangareo. 4 S.Michaels, in the way from Mexico (from which distant about 40 Leagues) to the silver Mines of Zacatecas. First built by Lewis de Velasco, then Vice-Roy of Mexico, to defend the People of this Province, from the Chichamechas, a barbarous and hitherto an unconquered People who terribly molest the Nations upon whom they border. 5 S. Philips, built at the same time by the said Velasco 6 Conception de Salaya, seventeen Leagues from Valladolit, 35 from Mexico; of the foun∣dation of Martin Enriquez the Vice-Roy, An. 1570. to be a Stage for Travellers, in their journeys Northwards. 7 Guaxanato, bordering on Panuco, and not far from S. Jago de Los Valles, rich in Mines of Silver. Then on the Sea, we have 8 Acatlan, on the borders of New Gallicia, two miles from the Ocean; A Town of not above 30 houses, with a little Church; but neighboured by a large and safe Road for shipping (by the Spaniards called Malacca) which makes it seldom without the company of Saylers 9 Natividad, (or Portus Nativitatis) a noted and convenient Haven, from whence they commonly set sail to the Philippine Ilands; pillaged and burnt by Captain Cavendish in his Cir∣cumnavigation of the VVorld. 10 S. Jago (or S. Jago de Buena Speranza) a little on the South of Natividad; the shores whereof are said to be full of Pearls. 11 Colima ten Leagues from the Sea, but more South then the other, built in the year 1522 by Gonsalvo de Sandovall. 12 Zacatula, by the Spani∣ards called Conception, situate on the Banks of a large (but nameless) River, which rising about the City of Tlascala, passeth by this Town, and thence with two open mouths runneth into the Sea.

This Province, at the coming of the Spaniards hither, was a distinct Kingdom of it self, not subject nor subordinate to the Kings of Mexico, as were most of the Princes of these parts: the Frontires of the Kingdom fenced with stakes of wood, like a Palizado, to hinder any sudden incuision of the Mexi∣can Forces. The last King called Tangayvan Bimbicha, submitted of his own accord to Cortez, An. 1522. and willingly offred himself to Baptism. But the Spaniards were not pleased with either, because deprived thereby of the spoil of the Country. But at last Nonnez de Guzman, then President of the Courts of Justice in Mexico, picked a quarrell with him, accused him falsly (as is said by the very Spa∣niards) of some practises against his King; burnt him alive with most barbarous and unheard of cruelty, and so confiscated his estate.

3. Mexicana, is bounded on the East with the Golf of New Spain, on the VVest with Mechu∣achan: on the North with Panuco and some part of Nova Gallicia; on the South with Tlascala, and part of the Southern Sea; so called from Mexico, the chief City not of this Province only but of all America.

It is in breadth from North to South, measuring by the Bay of Mexico, 130 Leagues; thence grow∣ing narrower in the midland parts hardly above sixty; and on the shores of Mare del Zur, not above seventeen. The length hereof extendeth from one Sea to the other, that is to say, from the point of Lobos in the Province of Papantla, on the Golf of Mexico, to the Haven of Acapulco; on the Sou∣thern Ocean: but the determinate number of miles I do nowhere finde. But measuring it from 17 de∣grees

and an half of Latitude, unto the 22. and allowing something for the slope; we may conclude it to be much of the length, as it is breadth, that is to say about 130 Leagues.

The Country is inferiour to Peru in the plenty and purity of Gold and Silver, but far exceeding it both in the Mechanical and ingenious Arts which are here professed, and in the abundance of fruits and cattel▪ of which last here is such store, that many a private man hath 40000 Kine and Oxen to him∣self. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is here also in great plenty; that only, which is drawn out of the Lake whereon Mexico standeth, being reported worth 20000 Crowns yeerly, to the Kings Exchequer. The People for the most part wittie and industrious, full of valour and courage; good Handicrafts-men, if they stoop so low as to Trades and Manufactures; rich Merchants if they give themselves to more gainfull traffick; And hardy Souldiers, if trained up and employed in service. Their ancient Arms were Slings, and Ar∣rows, since the coming of the Spaniards practised on the Harcubuize. In a word, what was said before of New Spain in general, as to the soil and People of it, is most appliable to this.

Chief Rivers hereof, 1 Los Yopes, which parteth this Province from that of Tlascala. 2 Citala, and 3 Mitla, both running Eastward towards the Gulf. 4 Papagaio, in the way from Mexico to Acapulco; with a fair bridge over it. 5 Las Balsas of a violent course, and in bigness equal unto Tagus in Spain; passable only by a bridge made of Ra••ts and Reeds, not very strongly joyned together. 6. The River of S. Francis, both large and swift, but in some parts fordable. Mountains of note I finde not any which require a more particular consideration; and so pass them over.

Towns of most note in it, 1 Mexico, the seat of an Archbishop, and of the Spanish Vice-Roy, who hath the power to make Laws and Ordinances, to give directions and determine controversies; unless it be in such great causes which are thought fit to be referred to the Councel of Spain. This City was first situate in the Lakes and Ilands, like Venice, everywhere interlaced with the pleasant currents of fresh, and sea-waters; and carrying a face of more civil government then any of America; though nothing, if compared with Europe. But the Town being destroyed by Cortez, it was built afterwards on the firm Land, on the Edge of the Lake, and bordering on a large and spacious Plain. The Plain on which it bordereth, is said to be 70 Leagues in compass, environed with high hills, on the tops whereof the snow lyeth continually. In the middle of which ••lain are two great Lakes, the least of them fourty miles in circuit, the one Salt and the other fresh, each of them alternately ebbing and flowing up into the other. On the Banks, of the Salt Lake standeth the City of Mexico with many other goodly Towns, and stately houses: on which Lake also, 50000 Wherries are continually plying. The Town in compass six miles, and containeth 6000 houses of Spaniards, and 60000 of Indians. It is a by-word, that at Mexico there are four fair things, viz. The Women, the Apparell, the Horses, and the Streets. Here is also a ••rinting-house, an Vniversity and a Mint; the Cathedral Church, ten Convents of Nuns, several houses of Jesuits, Dominicans, Franciscans, Augustinians, and other Religious Orders some Colledges, many Spitles and Hospitals, and other publick buildings of great State and beauty. By the Natives it was anciently called Temistatan, the name of Mexico being given on a new occasion, of which more hereafter: most miserably endammaged by the breaking in of the waters, Anno 1629. which swelled so high that they not only overwhelmed the meaner houses, but the Vice-Roys Palace; drowned many thousands of the People, and destroyed the houshold 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the rest. Occasioned by the avarice of the Kings Ministers, who had inverted the money to their private use which should have fortified the Banks. 2 Tezcuco, situate on the same Lake, but six Leagues from Mexico; heretofore twice as big as Sevil; and for the beauty of the streets, and elegancie of the houses not inferiour to any. Served with fresh water from the hills, brought in Pipes and Conduits, though seated on the brink of a Salt Lake. 3 Quit∣lavaca, built wholly in the Lake like Venice, and therefore by the Spaniards called Venezuela: a City of 2000 housholds: the way unto it over a Cawsey made of fl••nts; half a League long, and about twenty spans in breadth. 4. Vztacpalapa, half in the Lake, and half without, with many Ponds of fresh wa∣ter, and a beautifull Fountain; A City of 10000 Housholds, six Leagues from Tezcuco, and two from Mexico. 5 Mexicaltzingo▪ a ••urrough of 4000, and 6 Cuyccan, one of 6000 Families, both upon the Lake: beautified in the times of their Paganism with many Temples, so gorgeously set out to the eye, that afar off they seemed of silver, most of them now converted into Monasteries and Religious hou∣ses. 7 Chulula, the fairest of all the Lake, scarce excepting Mexico, with which it anciently contend∣ed both for state and bigness: said to contain 20000 Families, and to be beautified with so many Temples▪ that their Turrets equalled the number of the days of the yeer. The People so addicted un∣to their Idolatries, and so barbarous in their bloody and beastly Sacrifices, that no sewer then 6000 In∣fants of both Sexes were yeerly murdered on their Altars. 8 Mestitlan, seated on an high hill, begirt about with most pleasant Groves and shady VVoods: A Town of about 30000 Inhabitants, the Vil∣lages about the hill being reckoned in;situate 14 Leagues, or two days journey from Mexico, in the way to the Province of Panuco; the high way on both sides set with fruitfull Trees, to the great comfort and refreshment of the way-faring man. 9 Clantinolleper, twenty Leagues from Mestitlan, a Manour to which 40000 of the Natives do owe suit, and service. 10 Autepeque, on the South of the City of Mexico, at the foot of the Mountain Propopampeche; a Town belonging to the Marquis of Valla, and seated in the most delicious place of all New Spain. 11 Acachicha, on the North-east of Mexico, be∣twixt it and the Golf, bordering on the Province of Pepantla. 12 Acapulco, an Haven Town of the South-sea, situate on a safe and capacious Bay; at the entrance of it a League broad, and in the body of it full of convenient Stations and Docks for shipping: so that it is accompted the safest Haven of all those Seas. At the bottom of it towards the vvest, stands the Town and Castle, the Castle oppor∣tunely seated on a little fore-land both to command the Town, and secure the Port; well walled and

fortified with four very strong Bulwarks, on which are planted good store of Ordinance; the Garrison consisting ordinarily of 400 Souldiers: strengthened the rather in regard of the usual entercourse which is betwixt this Port and the Philippine Ilands.

The Original Inhabitants of this Country (as far at least as their Records are able to reach) were the Chichimecas, now the most rude and barbarous Savages of all these parts; together with the Ottomies, somewhat more civil then the rest, but yet rude enough. By these possessed till about the year 902. as it is conjectured from their Annals, when vanquished and disseized by some new come••s, whom they called by one name Navatlacos; issuing as it is conceived from those parts of Gallicia Nova, which are now called Nova Mexicana, An. 720. or thereabouts, but lingring in their march and wasting al the Countries as they lay before them. Of these there were seven Tribes in all, i.e. the Sachimilci, the Chalcae, the Tepanecae, the Culvae, the Tlafluici, the Tlascaltecae, all of them setled in these parts▪ and the five first about the Lake, before the coming in of the 7 Tribe, which was that of the Mexicans, so called from Mexi their chief Captain; who much delighted with the situation and conveniences of Temistitan then a ruined town, caused it to be rebuilt, and beautified by the name of Mexico. This town from that time forwards was reputed the head-City of their Common-wealth; the six Tribes governing in common, or the Chiefs rather of those Tribes in the names of the whole, after an Aristocratical manner. But weary at the last of this equal power, which the prevalencie of some Tribes had made very unequal, the Mexicans, one of the weakest of the Tribes, oppressed by the rest, resolved to separate themselves, and to commit the ordering of their affairs to a King of their own: at first elected by themselves; but afterwards when they had conquered most of the other Tribes, the choice intrusted unto six, one for every Tribe, (the Tlascalt••cae which was the seventh of their Tribes, and the Founders of Tlascala, go∣verning themselves long before, as a State apart) who in their choice had an especial eye on those which were strong and active, and fit for military employments; the people holding it a commendable meri∣torious act to kill their Kings, if once they were reputed Cowards. The Politie and Institutes of this Mexican Kingdom, I forbear to write of, further then as they lie before me in the way of their Story, digested by the government and succession of their several Kings, whose names and actions do occurre in the following Catalogue, of

The Kings of Mexico.

• ...A. Ch.
• 1322. 1 Acamapitzli, Nephew to the King of Couliacan, but of the Mexican blood by the Fathers side, elected for the first King; who joyned Con∣liacan and Tonganeam unto his E∣state, and setled that kingdom at his death in the way of Election.
• 1373. 2 Vitzovitzli, son of Acamapitzli, sub∣dued the Tribe of the Suchimilchi, and others of the neighbouring Na∣tions.
• 1394. 3 Huizilihuiel son of Vitzilovitli, con∣quered the Tribes of the Chalcae and Culvae, with many other Nations of the old Inhabitants.
• 1415. 4 Chimal Pupuca, son of Huizilihuiel, won the Town of Tequixsuiac, and reduced the rebellious Chalcae under his command.
• 1425. 5 Iscoalt brother of Huizilihuiel, by the valour of his Cousin Tlacaellec, freed himself from the yoke of the Tepa∣necae, to whom the Mexicans had before been Tributaries; and added their dominions unto his estate, con∣quering all the Nations round about him. After whose death the Electors by a joynt consent chose Tlacaellec for their King, as a man of whose vertue they had formerly made trial. But he very nobly refused it, saying, that it was more convenient for the Commonwealth, that another should be King, and that he should execute that which was for the necessity of the State, than to lay the whole bur∣den upon his back: and that without being King, he would not leave to labour for the publick, as well as if he were. Upon this generous refusal they made choice of Motecumo the first.
• 1438. 6 Motecumo, one of the Brothers of Chimalpupuca, brought in the custom of using no other Sacrifices at their Coronations, but of such Prisoners as the new King should first take in the wars. By the valour and good fortune of Tlacaellec, he subdued so many of the Nations (whose names I hold unnecessary to be here re∣peated) that he extended his estate from one Sea to the other.
• 1467. 7 Axayacaci, the Nephew of Ischoalt by his son Tecozomoeliqueto, enlar∣ged his Empire by the conquest of Tetentepeque, 200 miles from Mexi∣co, to fit himself with Sacrifices for his Coronation; and brought the Lord of Tlatelulco who rebelled a∣gainst him, to so hard a streit, that he was forced to break his neck from the top of a Temple.
• 1479. 8 Ticoicatzi, the son of Azayacaci, added twelve Cities, with their Territories, to the Mexican Em∣pire.
• 1484. 9 Abuczozin, brother of Ticoicatzi, extended his borders to Guatimala, repaired or rebuilt a great part of

• ... Mexico, and brought thither a chan∣nel of fresh water.
• 1502. 10 Motecuma II. Son of Axaacaci, before his Coronation conquered 44 Cities. He ordained that no Ple∣beian should bear any Office in his Court, and in the 18. year of his Reign was subdued by Cortez.

As for this Cortez, to whom the Spaniards stand indebted for the Kingdom of Mexico, he was born in M••deline▪ a Town of Estremaduram, 1485. and in the nineteenth yeer of his Age, employed him∣self in the Trade and business of America, for the improvement of his Fortunes, Anno 1511. he went as Clark unto the Treasurer for the Isle of Cuba, where he husbanded his Affairs so well, by carrying 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Sheep and Mares, and bringing Gold for them in Exchange, that in short time he was able to put in 2000 Castellins for his stock as Partner with Andrew de Duero, a wealthy Merchant. Grown richer, he was taken to be Partner with James Velasques in the Discovery of Tabasco, and the parts neer Jucutan, An. 1518. And now resolved to venture all his stock both of friends and money, he fur∣nished himself of eleven Ships, and with 550 men set sa••l from Spain, and arrived at the Iland of Acu∣samill (now called Santa Crux) and failing up the River of Tabasco, sacked the Town of Potonchon, the Inhabitants refusing to ••ell him victual. After this by the help of his Horse and Ordinance he dis∣comfi••ed 40000 of the naked Savages, gathered together to revenge themselves for the sack of that Town; and received the King thereof in vassallage to the Crown of Spain. Being told that Westward he should meet with some Mines of Gold, he turned his course for the Haven of S. John de Vlloa, where landing he was entertained by Tendilli, Governour of the Town and Country for the King of Mexico, who understanding of his coming, and that he was the Servant of so great an Emperour (of which Tendilla had informed him by especial Messengers) he sent him many rich Presents both of Gold and Silver. Inflamed at the sight hereof, he resolved to go unto the place where such Treasures were; took possession of the Country in the name of Charles the fift King of Spain and Emperour; and build∣ing there the Town de la vera Crux, left in it 150 of his men. Attended by no more then 400 Foot, 15 Horse, and six pieces of Ordnance, he pursued his Enterprize, by practise gained unto him those of Z••mpoallan, and Tlascalla, whom he understood to be ill-affected to Motecuma: assisted with whose Forces he passed on for Mexico, sacked the Town of Chololla (a Town of 40000 housholds) in his ma••ch, he was kindly received into Mexico by the frighted King▪ whom he caused to acknowledge him∣self a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to Spain, and to present him in the name of a Tribute with so much Treasure as amounted to 160000 Castellins of Gold. A quarrell growing not long after, Motecuma the unhappy King was by one of his own Subjects killed in the Tumult, and the Spaniards driven out of the Town. But aided with the whole Forces of the Tlascalans, and a recruit of more Spaniards (sent thither on a Design against him) he made up an Army of 100000 Savages, 900 Spanish Foot, 80 Horse, 17 pieces of Ord∣nance: and having with great diligence made ready a Navie of 13 Galliots, and 6000 Canons or Boats; la••d siege unto the City both by Sea and Land. After a Siege of three moneths, the City is taken, sacked and burnt, August 13. 1521. But afterwards rebuilt more beautifully then it was before. Thus fell this mighty Kingdom into the hands of the Spaniards by the valour and good fortune of Cortez, a private Adventurer, endowed for that good Service by Charles the fift with the Town and Territory of Te∣coan••peque, in the Province of Guaxaca, and many other fair estates in the Province of Mexico, and dignified with the title of Marquels of Valla.

As for the Kings of Mexico, they are said to have worn a Crown resembling that which is now used by the Dukes of Venice. His Co••••nation held with great pomp, but most bloody Sacrifices. His Revenues thought to be almost infinite, raised out of all Commodities and paid in kinde, whether Na∣tural or Artificial only, the King participating of the fruits of all mens Labour, and sharing with them in their wealth; some paying in Cups full of powder of Gold of two handfuls a piece; some Diadems, and Beads of Gold; ••••ates of Gold of three quarters of a yard long, and four fingers broad; Tur∣••••sse•• stones, Golden Targets, rich Feather-Pictures, &c. Not to say any thing of matters of inferior value: all which in such a wealthy and large estate, must needs afford him a Revenue equall to the grea∣test Monarch. And for the incouragement of his Souldiers and Men of VVar, here were ordained three Orders of Knighthood, (or at least such distinctions of personall merit, as had resem∣blance to such Orders) the first distinguished by a Red Ribband, the second called the Lyon or Tiger Knight, and the third the Gray Knight: all priviledged amongst other things to be clothed in Cotton, wear Breeches, to adorn themselves with gold and silver, and to have Vessell gilt or painted: high points, and not permitted unto any else. But it is time that I proceed to the rest of the Provinces.

4. TLASCALA lieth betwixt Mexicana and Guaxaca, extended from one Sea to the other. The length here of from Sea to Sea an hundred Leagues; the breadth along the shores of the Gulf reckoned 80 Leagues, on the South Sea not above eighteen. So called from the abundance of Maize which they make their bread of; the word in that Language signifying Lecum panis, or the place of Bread, the same with Bethlehem in the Hebrew.

The Country very plentifull both of Corn and Cattell, full of rich Pastures, and wonderfully stored with Maize: Level and plain except towards the Sea, where occurreth a large chain of craggie Moun∣tains; The richer in the fruits of Nature for those fair and pleasant Rivers wherewith it is watered; the principal of which 1. Rio de Grijalva, so called from John de Grijalva, who first discovered it; em∣ployed herein by James Velasques, the advancer of Cortez. 2 Rio de Zempoall so called from the Town of Zempoalian about which it riseth. 3 Zahuate, which makes its way thorow the chain of Mountains be∣fore mentioned, and falleth with the former into the Golf. 4 Rio de Zacatula, a River of the longest

course in all this Province; rising neer Tlascala, and falling many Leagues off into Mare del Zur. The People much of the same nature with those of Mexico, though upon jealousies of State their most bit∣ter enemies; of which the Spaniards made good use to advance their Conquests on that Kingdom.

Places of most importance in it, 1 Tlascala it self, which gives name to the Province: in former times governed after the form of a Commonwealth, according to the Democratical Models. Situate on a little Hill betwixt two Rivers; and in the middle of a large, but pleasant Plain, 60 miles in compass. So populous at the coming of the Spaniards hither, that it contained 300000 Inhabitants, now scarce 50000. It had four Streets (or rather Quarters) each of them governed by a Captain in time of war: and in the middest a Market•• place so fair and spacious, that 30000 persons might assemble in it, to buy and sell, or for any other business. 2 Puebba de los Angelos, (the City of Angels) but most commonly Angelos: built by Sebastian Ramir••z, An. 1531. in the way from Vera Crux to the City of Mexico, from which last 22 leagues distant. A Bishops See, and thought to contain in it 1500 families. 3 Zempoallan, on the River so named, the Inhabitants whereof did great service to Ferdinando Cortez in his conquest of Mexico. 4 Napuluca; of great resort for a Fair of Cattel; and such a kind of Court for ordering the trade thereof, as we call the Pie powders. 5 Guaxocingo, a pleasant and well•• peopled town, situate at the foot of the burning Mountain before mentioned, by the ashes and embers whereof the fields are many times annoied. 6 Segura, or Segura de la Frontera in the Region of Tepeac, built by Cortez the next year after the conquest of Mexico, with fair streets and handsome houses, by whom peopled with Spaniards. 7 Vera Crux, the first town built in this Country by the said Cortez, now a Bishops See: situate neer unto the Gulf, and a great thorow-fare from thence to the City of Mexico, from which distant about 60 leagues. 8 S. John de Vllua, the most noted Port of all this Province; fenced with a Peer against the fury both of winds and sea, defended naturally by Rocks and Quicksands lying before it, and by two Bulwarks well fortified and manned on both sides of the entrance. 9 Medellin, built by Cortez An. 1525. and planted with Spaniards: so called in memory of a town of the same name in Estremadara, in which he was born: situate on the banks of the River Almeria.

The Tlalscallans were originally one of the seven Tribes which drave the Chichimecas out of their possessions: and either finding no room left for them on the Banks of the Lake, or else willing to subsist alone, withdrew themselves from the rest, founded the City of Tlascala, and there erected a Democratical Estate. Stomacked for this by the other Tribes, and many times invaded by those of Me∣xico, after they had subdued the rest: they still maintained themselves against all attempts; and in the end assisted Cortez in the destruction of that Kingdom they so deadly hated. Privileged for that reason by the Spaniards, and exempted from all kind of tribute (except it be an handfull of Wheat for every person) and suffered to live under his protection in the former Government. The Province given us by this name, said to contain 200 good Towns and Burroughs, 1000 Villages and upwards, and in them 150000 of the Natives, besides Spanish Colonies. Distributed into 36 Classes or Rural D••anries for Ecclesiastical Government, in which are thought to be 30 Convents and Religious Houses.

5 GVAXATA is bounded on the West with Tlascala, on the East with Jucutan and Chiap•• one of the Provinces of Guatimala, on the North with the Bay of Mexico, and on the South with Mare del Zur. Extended on the South-sea to the length of an hundred miles, but on the Bay to fifty only: in breadth from sea to sea where it bordereth on Tlascala, 120 leagues; not above 60 where it confineth on Chiapa. So called from Guaxata once the chief town of these parts, now named Antequera.

The Air heteof very ••ound and sweet, and the Soil as fruitfull: plentifull not only of those commo∣dities which are common with the other Provinces of this Country; but of such quantities of Silks, and store of Mulberries, that if the Natives paid their Tithes as the Spaniards do, that very Revenue would suffice to endow five Bishopricks, as good as that which is there already: scarce any River of this Country, but hath Sands of Gold: such plenty of Coccinele (a rich grain used in dying Scarlets, of which before) as also of Cassia, Gold, Silver, and other metals, that if the people did but adde some industry to the wealth of the Country, they might be the richest men in all America. But being naturally sl••••h∣full, and impatient of labour, they lose all opportunities of gathering riches, and live but from hand to mouth, as we use to say. Docile enough, and so indulgent unto those who take pains to teach them, that here are reckoned 120 Convents of Dominican Friers, besides other Schools; these last conceived the greater number

It is subdivided into many particular Provinces (we may call them Wapentakes or Hundreds) as 1 Mi∣steca, 2 Tutopeque, 3 Zapoteca, 4 Guazacoalco, 5 Gueztaxatla, and 6 the Vale of Guaxata; this last most memorable, in that it gave the title of Marquesso del Valle to the famous Cortez. Towns of most observation. 1 Teozopotlan, once the chief town of Zapoteca, and the seat of their King. 2 Cuert∣lavaca, of great note for a Labyrinth not far off, hewn out of the Rock, but by whom none knoweth. 3 Antequera, in the Vallie of Guaxata, a stately City, and beautified with a fair Cathedral, as that with Marble-pillars of great height and thickness. 4 S. Illifonso in the Province of Zapoteca. 5 S. Jago in the Valley of Nexapa, seated upon a lofty hill. 6 Del Spiritu Santo, distant about three leagues from the shores of the Golf, in the Province of Guazacoalco; the foundation of Gonsalvo de Sandoval, A. 15••6. 7 Aguatulco, or Guatulco, a noted and convenient Port on the South-sea; much used by those which trade from Peru to Mexico, and from Mexico to any Port of the Southern seas. By consequence rich, and therefore plundered to the purpose both by Drake, and Cavendish, in their voyages about the world. 8 Tacoantepeque a Port of the same Sea also, but of far less note. Burroughs and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in all 650.

inhabited by 150000 of the Natives liable to tribute, besides women and persons under age, not reckon∣ing the Spaniards in the number.

6 JVCVTAN, environed on three parts by the Sea like a Demi-Iland, is fastened to the Continent only where it meets with Guaxaca; the furthest point of it opposite to the Isle of Cuba. Discovered first by Fernandes de Cordova, employed therein by Don Christopher Morante, An 1517▪ and called Jucutan, not as some conceit it, from Joctan the son of Heber, who they think came out of the East, where the ••cripture placeth him (Gen. 10. 30.) to inhabit here; but from Jucutan, which in the language of the Country signifieth, What say you? For when the Spaniards at their first coming hither asked the name of the place, the Savages not understanding what they meant, replied Jucutan, that is, what say you? whereupon the Spaniards always after called it by this name.

The compass of it, taking the Province of Tabasco into the accompt, is said to be 900 miles, or 300 leagues. The Air hot, and the Country destitute of Rivers; not otherwise provided of water but by pits and trenches, which abundantly supply that want. Sufficiently barren, the soile not bearing Wheat, or any Europaean fruits, nor many of the growth of America in other places. Nor have they Mines of Gold or Silver, or any other Metal, to enrich the people: who must either live by trades and labour, or else beg their bread. Nothing remarkable in the Country, but that here seemed to be some remnants of Christianity, at the Spaniards first coming hither: the people constantly observing a kind of Baptism, which they call in their own language a second birth, expressing by that word a Regeneration; not suffering any one to marry untill so initiated. And possible enough it is, that this may be the Country upon which Madoc ap Owen fell; who though he might by some good fortune be brought back to Wales, yet that he should make any such second voyage hither, as is said in their Chronicles, I by no means grant.

Towns of most observation in it, 1 Merida, almost in the n••vel of it, situate in the 20 degree of Lati∣tude, the ordinary seat of the Governour▪ and the ••ee of a Bishop: distant from the Sea on each side about twelve leagues; and called snap Town of that name in Spain, with which it is thought to have some resemblance 2 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ 30 leagues from Merida, beautified with a most sumptuous Mo∣nastery of Franciscan ••riers. 3 Campeche (or S. Francisco, as the Spaniards call it) situate on the shore of the Golf; A town when first known to the Spaniards of 3000 houses, and beautified with such mo∣numents of art and industrie, as shewed that there was some what in this people which was not barbarous. since that not more observable, then for being suddenly surprized by Parker an English Captain, A 1596. who carried away with him the Governour, the wealth of the town, and many prisoners, besides a great ship full of gold, silver, and other the like precious commodities, designed for the King of Spains own use. 4 Tabasco, situate in the best part of this Country, so different from all the rest, that it is made by some a distinct province from it. By the Spaniards called Valla de Nuestra Sennora de la Victoria, most com∣monly Victoria only; and that in memory of the first fortunate victory which Cortez had upon this people, arming themselves against him for the sacking of Pontonchan. 5 Pontonchan, sacked by Cortez for denying to supply him with victual. 6 Salamanca, so called with reference to a town of that name in Spain.

Along the Coast of this Country lie many Ilands, viz. 1 La Zarza, 2 Desconoscida, 3 Triangulus, 4 Vermeia, 5 Los Negrillos, 6 Los Alacranes, all within the Golf. Without it. 7 Zaratan, 8 Pant••ia, 9 Lamanay, 10 De Mucheres, or the Isle of Women; 11 Cozamul, by some called Acusamil. This last the biggest, as 15 leagues long, 5 broad; and the most remarkable, as being the usual way which the Spaniards travelled in their discoveries of this Country from the Isle of Cuba. For here first landed Fer∣nando de Corduba, An. 1517. who passing over to Jucutan (but four leagues distant) brought back no∣thing but stripes. Here the next year arrived John de Grijalva, in the same pursuit; who passing by Jucutan to the Province of Guaxata, left his name behind him to a River. And finally here landed the most fortunate Cortez, who coasting about the Demi Iland, landed neer Tabasco, and there first han∣selled his good fortune with a notable victory. Yet neither the Iland nor Peninsula discovered per∣fectly, till the year 1527. when both subdued by Francisco de Monteio, to the Crown of Spain. The Iland now called Santa Crux.

OF GVATIMALA.

GVATIMALA is bounded on the North by Jucutan, and the Golf of Honduras; on the South with Mare del Zur; on the East (or South-east rather) with Castella Aurea; on the West with New Spain. Extended 300 leagues in length upon the Coasts of Mare del Zur; but measuring by a strait line, not above 240: the breadth thereof 180 leagues, where broadest; in most places narrower. So called from Guatimala the chief Province; as that from the prime City of it, honoured with the seat of the Governour, and the Courts of Justice.

The nature of the soil and people (if differing in any material thing from those before) we will con∣sider in the View of those several parts into which this Country is divided. The principal whereof, 1 Chiapa, 2 Verapaz, 3 Guatimala specially so called, 4 Honduras, 5 Niceragua, 6 Veragua. The rest of less note, easily reduced to these.

1 CHIAPA hath on the West New Spain, on the East Verapaz; on the North, part of Jucutan; and Mare del Zur, upon the South. Extended 40 leagues in length, not much less in breadth; and antiently inhabited by four Nations, all of severall Languages.

The soil not very natural for Corn or Fruits: though Pot herbs brought from Spain thrive well, as do Beans and Lentils; yet Vines and other richer fruits seldom come to good. Wood-vines they have, which yield a very pleasant pulp; and if well ordered, might be brought to afford more profit. Their trees, most of them, greater then in other places, as Pines, Oaks, Cedars, and the Cypress, whole Woods of Walnuts, but the Nut not so big as those of Europe. Some of their Trees yield Rosin, some such preci∣ous gums, as in other places are not usual; and some there are whose Leaves being dried into a powder, afford a soveraign plaster for exulcerate sores: And they have need too often to make use of these Plasters, the Country being full of Snakes and other venemous Creatures (some of the Snakes no less then 20 foot in length) whose poison being strong and deadly, doth require such helps. Of the People nothing singular, that I have met with; but that they are more musical and exact in painting then the rest of the Natives.

Towns of most note in it, 1 Cividad Real, built by the Spaniards in the Country of the Chiapenses, at the foot of an hill, situate in a round Plain, encompassed about with Mountains like an Amphitheatre: afterwards made a Bishops See, and privileged by the Kings of Spain to be governed by such City-Magistrates as they call Alcaides. 2 Chiapa, in a vale adjoyning; before the building of the other, of most note in this Province: yet still before it in regard of its situation, this Valley being better fraught with Pears, Apples, Wheat and Maize, then all the rest of the Country. 3 Tecpatlan, once the chief of the Zoaques, possessed of 25 Villages in this Province; now beautified with a Monastery of Dominican ••riers. 4 Capanavatzla, the principal Town of twenty five which the Quelenes held in this tract: remarkable for nothing but a Convent of the same Dominicans. 5 S. Bartholmews, another town in the territory of the same Quelenes: neer which is said to be a great Pit, or opening of the earth, into which if any man casts a stone, though never so little, there presently followeth a loud and fearfull noise like a clap of thunder. 6 Guevetlan, built by Pedro de Alvaridi, when he was Governour of these parts; the chief Town of a little Province called Soconusco. 7. Casapualca, a small Burrough, but memorable for a Well in the fields adjoyning; the waters whereof are noted to rise and fall, as the Ocean doth flow or ebbe, and at equal distances of time. Of thirteen Townships which the Zeltales were possessed of, I find no one named; though painted all of them, and set forth to the eye of the Traveller, with Coccinele, of which their Territory hath good plenty.

And now I am fallen upon these Rarities of Nature, I cannot but take notice (though somewhat out of my Method) of a River by the Spaniards called Rio Blanco, which turns wood to stones: of a Spring in the Cantred of Tafixa, which in the Summer is full of water, in the Winter dry; of another in the same Cantred, which for one three years, though it rain never so little, is full of water, and the next three years hath none at all; and so successively by turns: and finally, that the chief River of the Province, having received into it many lesser streams, is swallowed up neer a Village of the Chiapenses, called Otztutan, never after seen. None of them samed for Golden Sands, as are those of Guaxata; though it be thought there be some Veins of gold and silver, but hitherto neglected for want of Slaves to work the Mines.

2 VERAPAZ is bounded on the West with Chiapa, on the East with Guatimala and Hondura, on the North with Jucutan, and on the South with the Territory of Soconusco. In Latine called Provincia Verae Pacis; by the Spaniards Verapaz, because not conquered by the sword, but won to the obedience of the King of Spain by the preaching of the Dominican ••riers.

The Country 30 Leagues in length, and as much in breadth, full of high Hills and deep Valleys, but no fruitful•• plains; generally overgrown with Woods, very large and thick, which so hinder the free passage of the winds, that the Aire hereof is very shewery: Insomuch that for nine moneths in the year they have always rain, not altogether free from it in the other three. By reason of this moysture much annoyed with Mosquits a kinde of Gnats, very injurious to their Fruits, with which otherwise (as with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 other necessaries) they were well provided. No Mines of Gold or Silver discovered hither∣to, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Spaniards have many times in vain attempted it. Instead whereof some of their Trees drop a kinde of Amber, which they call Liquid amber; some Mastick, and some other Gums; they have also many Medicinal woods, as Sarzaparilla, that called China-wood, and many others.

The People tractable and conform to the Spanish Government, except the Lecandones, and Pachu∣•••••• some Remainders of the ancient Salvages, who keeping in the Mountains and craggie Rocks of this Country, have hitherto retained both their Native Freedom, and their old Idolatries. No Towns here••n possessed by the Spaniard, and but fourteen Villages in all, in which they live mingled with the old Inhabitants. The principall of these S. Augustin••s, not so much memorable in it self, as for the neighbourhood of a Cave betwixt two Mountains, from which the Rain descending turns into Ala∣baster, naturally fashioned into Pillars and other Pourtraitures. Into which al••o many Springs do con∣vey their waters, which there being joyned into a body, make an handsom River, able almost at the first appearance to bear a Boat. A Port they also have at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea called G••l••o Dulce •• but of so little use and Trading that I finde no 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for it, unless it should be that Yztapa which Herrera speaks of, by whom placed in Guatimala.

3 GVATIMALA specially so called, is bounded on the West with Verapaz, from which parted by the River ••••alapa; on the East with Nicaragua; on the North with Honduras, and on the South with Mare del Zur or the Pacificque Ocean. Extended 30 Leagues from the North to the South, and on the Sho••es of Mare del Zur, not above seventeen. But reckoning in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Chalu••eca, and S.Sa∣viours, three adjoyning Regions, by some made Provinces distinct, the dimensions of it must be much greater both for length and breadth.

The Country Mountainous, but withall very full of Rivers; by consequence commodious both for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and hunting▪ Fruitfull of Wheat, Maize, and other Provisions, but those fruits not lasting. Not so much subject unto rain as they are in Verapaz, but more troubled with winds. Full of rich Pastures, and those Pastures of great Heards of Cattell. Good store of Cotton-wool, some Balsamum, and other Medicinal 〈◊〉〈◊〉; as also of the best Sulphur, and many Apothecaries Drugs which I have no skill of. The People Pusillanimous and fearfull▪ greater proficients in Christianity and Civility then most of the Savages. but so that it is thought they would relapse again to their ancient Paganism, and revive again the•••• old barbarous 〈◊〉〈◊〉. if not held in by the bridle of fear, and the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of power. The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to be good 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and the Women good Spinners.

Chief Rivers hereof, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, a River of a course but of 13 Leagues, yet of great depth, and navigable half the way, which falleth into Mare del Zur. 2 Lempas▪ watering the Burrough of S. Sa∣•••••• which hath 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from a great Lake, and his fall in the same Sea also. Here is also said to be a Lake ••eet the Village of Ystepeque, of the waters whereof are made both Sulphur and Allom. And here is said to be a Volcana or burning Mountain, which though it hath vomited no ••ire of late, the mat∣ter of it being spent; yet the said Monuments of his Furies do remain among them; another not far off which still casts out smoak.

Towns of most note, 1 Guatimala, or S. Jago de Guatimale, the chief Town of the Province, si∣tuate on a little River betwixt both 〈◊〉〈◊〉, by one of which most terribly wasted. An 1541. But be∣ing 〈◊〉〈◊〉, it hath since exceedingly flourished▪ by reason of the Bishops See, the residence of the Governour, and the Courts of Justice. 2 S Salvador, 40 Leagues Eastwards from Guatimala, by the Natives called 〈◊〉〈◊〉: situate on the River Guacapa, seven Leagues from the Sea and neighboured by a great Lake of five Leagues compass. 3 Acaxutla, at the mouth of the same River, the Port Town to 〈◊〉〈◊〉. 4•••• Trinidad, by the Natives called Samsonate, the most noted Empory of this Coun∣try; the 〈◊〉〈◊〉at Bartery betwixt the Inhabitants of New Spain, and those of Peru. 5 S. Michaels, two Leagues from the Bay of Fonseca, which serves unto it for an Haven. 6 Xe••es de la Fontera, the chief Town of the Cantrea of Chulut••can, by which name it was formerly known situate on the Frontires to∣wards Nicaragua, and to the South east of the Bay of Fonseca; that Bay so named in honour of Ro∣derick Fonseca Bishop of Burges, and President of the Councel for the Indies, An. 1532. by Giles 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ who first discovered it; About and in this Bay are ten little Ilands, four of which in∣habited, and plentifully furnished with wood, water, and salt.

4. HONDVRA hath on the South Guatimala, specially so called; on the VVest, the Bay or Arm of 〈…〉〈…〉 Dulce▪ by which parted from Verapaz: on the North and East the Sea called Mare del Nort; on the South east Nicaragua; on the South Guatimala specially ••o called. In length 〈…〉〈…〉 of that Sea 150 Leagues, and about 80 Leagues in breadth from North to 〈…〉〈…〉 of Honduras, or Fonduras imposed upon it from the depth of the Sea about the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Head land of it, called the Cape of Honduras.

The whole Country either Hills, or Vallies, little Champagne in it: fruitfull of Maize and wheat, and of very 〈…〉〈…〉 age; made so by the constant overflowings of their Rivers about Michaelmass; which do not only soil their grounds, but water their Gardens. The principal of them, 1 Haguara,

2 Chamalucon, 3 Vlna, all neighboured by fertile fields, and pleasant meadows. Some Mines of Gold and Silver are conceived to be here, but not yet discovered; the people being so slothful and given to idleness, that they had rather live on Roots, then take pains in tilling of their land; and therefore not easily intreated to toyl for others, but where necessity and strong hand do compell them to it.

Towns of most note, 1 Valladolit, by the Natives called Commyagna. 40 leagues distant from the Sea, situate in a pleasant and fruitful Valley, on the banks of the River Chamalucon; and honoured with a Bishops See, fixed here about the year 1558. built neer the place where once Francisco de Mont••io Governour of this Provin••e had planted a Colonie of Spaniards, An. 1530. by the name of S. Maria de Commyagna. 2 Gracias di Dios, 30 leagues Westward of Valladolit, bu••••t by Gabriel de Royas, An. 1530. to be a place of defence for those who worked in the Mines, against the Savages. But finding himself unable to make it good, he defaced and left it: Reedified again by Gonsalvo de Alvarado and since well inhabited. 3 S. Peters, eleven ••eagues distant from the Port of ••avallos, but seated in a most healthy air, and therefore made the dwelling place of the Farmers of the Kings Customs who have their houses in this town, and follow their business in the other, as occasion is •• Porto de Cavallos, so called from some horses thrown overboard in a violent tempest: the most noted Heaven of these parts, and strong by natural situation; but so ill guarded and defended, that in the year 1591. it was pillaged by Captain Christopher Newport; and An 1596. by Sir Anthony Sherley. Deserted on those spoils and not since inhabited. 5 S. Thomas de Castile, 18 leagues from Cavallos, naturally strong, and forrified accord∣ing to the Rules of Art: to which as to a place of more strength and safety, Alfonso Briado de Castilla President of the Sessions of Guatimala, removed both the Inhabitants and Trade o•• Cavalios. 6 Tra∣xillo, seated on the rising of a little hill betwixt two Rivers (one of them that which is called Haguara) distant from Cavallos 40 leagues to the East, and 60 leagues to the North of Valadolit: surprized and pillaged by the English, An. 1576. Not far hence towards the North-east lieth the Cape of Honduras, from whence the shore drawing inwards till it joyn with Jucutan, makes up a large and goodly Bay called the Golf of Honduras. 7 S. George de Olancho, so named of the Vallie Olancho, in which it is seated; a Vallie noted heretofore for some golden Sands, which Guaejape, a River of it, was then said to yield.

5 NICARAGVA is bounded on the North with Honduras, on the East with Mare del Nort and the Province of Veragua, on the South with Mare del Zur, on the West with Guatimala. By Di∣daco Lopez de Salsedo who first subdued it, it was called the New kingdom of Leon; but the old name by which they found it called at their coming thither, would not so be lost.

The Country destitute of Rivers, except that part hereof towards Veregua, called Costa Rica, reckon∣ed a Province of it self. The want hereof supplied by a great Lake or a little Sea, called the Lake of Nicaragua, 120 leagues in compass, ••bbing and flowing like the Sea: upon the banks of which stand many pleasant villages and single houses. A Lake well stored with Fish, but as full of Crocediles: and having made its way by a mighty Cataract, emptieth it self into the Sea about four leagues off. Not very rich in Corn, (most of which is brought them from Peru) but well stored with Cattel; level and plain, and shadowed with frequent trees; one amongst others of that nature, that a man cannot touch any part of it, but it withereth presently. Affirmed to be as full of Parrets, as England of Crows; stored with great plenty of Cotton wooll, and abundance of Sugar canes. In a word so pleasing generally to the eye, that the Spaniards call it by the name of Mahomets Paradise.

The People for the most part speak the Spanish tongue, and willingly conform themselves to the Spanish garb both of behaviour and apparel: well weaned from their old barbarous customes, re∣tained only by some Mountainers, whom they call Chontales. All of good stature, and of colour in∣different white. They had before they received Christianity, a setled and politick form of government: only as Solon appointed ••o law for a mans killing of his father, so had this people none for the killer of a King; both of them conceiting that men were not so unnatural as to commit such crimes. A Thief they judged not to death, but adjudged him to be slave to that man whom he had robbed, till by his service he had made satisfaction: A course more merciful, and not less just, then the loss of life.

Chief towns hereof, 1 Leon, or Leon de Nicaragua, situate on the Lake aforesaid; the Residence of the Governour, and the Bishops See; built in a sandy soil, and begirt with woods. 2 Granada, on the same Lake, sixteen leagues from Leon, beautified with a fair Church and a strong Castle, both founded by Ferdinando de Cordova: the City seated in a liberal and wealthy soyl, well furnished with Sugar-canes; for the refining of which here are many Work houses, which they call Ingenios. 3 Segovia, distant from the former about 30 leagues; rich in veins of Silver. 4 Jaen, (all called according to the names of some Towns in Spain) situate at the end of the Lake aforesaid, from whence by a long and narrow channel it d••••••mbogu••th into the Sea neer the Port of S. John. 5 Realeio, about a league distant from the Port of Possession, in the Latitude of 12 degrees & 40 minutes, inhabited for the most part by Shipwrights and Mariners. 6 Nicoia, giving name to a little territory, within the bounds whereof standeth 7 A∣varines also. 8 Cartago, 40 leagues from Nicoia, equally distant from both Seas, on each of which it hath a convenient Port: this Town the principal of that part which is called Costa Rica.

6 VERAGVA hath on the West Costa Rica, on the East bounded with the District of Panama; washed on both other sides by the sea: extended 50 leagues in length from West to East; not above 25 where narrowest, from one sea to the other. The name given to it from the River Veragua, of greatest note in it at the first Discovery.

The ••oil hereof Mountainous and exceeding barren, not fit for tillage, and less usefull in feeding Cat∣tel; sufficiently provided of Maize and Pot-herbs, but else of little necessary for the life of man, un∣less the People could eat Silver, or drink Aurum Potabile. Of both which Mettals, but especially of Gold, here are such never-perishing Mines, that the Spaniards think them able to supply all wants, and cure all Diseases. Once being asked what made them so greedy of that Mettall: it was answered, That they were much troubled with grief of heart, for which Gold was a most Soveraign Medicine. And as the Country, such the People, hardy, couragious, and warlike, and such as bear the Spanish yoke with great impatience: the stoutest and most untameable People, being bred most commonly in Mountain∣ous and woody Countries.

Chief Rivers of this little Province, 1 Veragua, which gives name unto it. 2 Belen, by the old In∣habitants called Yebra, at the mouth of which Columbus purposed to have setled a Spanish Colony, for the better transporting of his Gold. But finding that the Channel, on the ceasing of some rain which had fallen before, was become so shallow, that no ship could go in or out, he gave over that purpose. 3 La Trinidad. 4 La Conception: all falling into Mare del Nort. Their chief Towns, 1 Conception, on the Mouth of that River, the seat of the Governour. 2 La Trinidad, on the banks of that River, neer the Port of Belen, and six Leagues Eastwards of La Conception. 3 S. Foy (oppidum S. Fidis) twelve Leagues from Conception on the South, where the Spaniards melt, and cast their Gold into Bars and In∣gots. 4 Carlos, not far from the shores of Mare del Zur. 5 Philippina, on the West of Carlos. Each seated on a large and capacious Bay. Before which Bays lie a Frie of Islands, which the Spaniards call Zebaco, from the chief amongst them. Thirty in all; the principall Zebaco, Cabaio, S. Marie, S. Martha, inhabited in former times, now not much frequented; the People being dragged into the Continent to work in the Mines.

This Countrey oweth its first Discovery unto divers men, according to the several Members and di∣visions of it: The last in order, being the first that was discovered, but the last that was conquered, had the honour to be visited by Columbus himself. VVho driving up and down these coasts in the year 1502 hit on the entrances of the River, which afterwards he caused to be called Belen; where hearing that there was plenty of Gold in the Mines of Hurira not far off, he intended to fortifie. But the River falling him as was said before; and finding nothing fit to sustain his men, he bent himself though un∣willing to a further search. He had before touched upon Honduras also; but I finde not that he landed on it: the setling of these Countries being destinated to another hand. Twenty yeers after this the most fortunate Cortez having fully quieted and composed the affairs of Mexico, resolved to make his Master Lord of the rest of America. And to that end sent out his Officers and Commanders into seve∣rall parts; by Pedro de Alvarado. he subdued Guatimala▪ Hondura, by Christopher de Olid: Veragua, and Nicaragua, by Consalvo de Corduba. But fearing lest the conquered Provinces might revolt again, he resolved to visit them in person. Attended by a choise Band of 150 horse, and as many foot, and 3000 Mexicans, he began his journey in October, 1524: and held on his progress as far as to Truxillo: where finding that Gonsales de Cordova had so plaid his game, as there was no neccssity of going fur∣ther, he made a stand, having marched above 400 Leagues with his little Army. Returning back ano∣ther way, in April 1526. he came home to Mexico, with whose return we conclude also our survey of the Northern Peninsula, containing all America Septentrionalis, or Mexicana.

And so much for Mexicana.

OF PERVANA.

PERVANA the other of the two great Peninsulas into which the vast Continent of the NEW WORLD doth now stand divided, hath the form of a Pyramis rever∣sed: more answerably thereunto then Africk, though that so resembled. Joyned to the other by a strait and narrow Isthmus, called the Straits of Darien, whereof we shall have opportunity to speak more anon: which looks but like a stone mis-laid in so great a building; or the first step by which we are to climb the top, as in other Pyramids.

The name derived from Peru, the chief Province of it; the Circumnavigation said to be 1700 miles. Nothing else to be said in the general, but what will serve more fitly for particular places; except it be the description of some prime Mountains and principall Rivers: which being of too long a course to be reckoned unto any one particular Province, may more properly deserve place here. Of these the chief 1 Orellana, or the River of Amazons, called by the first name from Francisco de Orellana, a Spa∣niard, who first discovered it; by the second from the Amazons a kinde of stout and warlike VVomen, who are said to have inhabited on the banks thereof. The Fountain of it in Peru, the fall in the North Sea, or Mare del Nort. A River of so long a course, that the said Orellana is reported to have sailed in it 5000 miles, the several windings and turnings of it being reckoned in: and of so violent a current, that it is said to keep its natural tast and colour above 30 miles after it falleth into the Sea; the channel of it of that breadth, where it leaveth the Land, that it is accompted 60 Leagues from one point to the other. 2 Orenoque, navigable 1000 miles by ships of burden, and 2000 miles by Boats and Pinna∣ces, having received into it an hundred Rivers; openeth into the same Sea with 16 mouths, which part the Earth into many Ilands (some equal to the Isle of Wight) the most remote of those Channels 300 miles distant from one another. By some it is called Raliana, from Sir Walter Raleigh, who took great pains in the discovery and description of it; or rather in discovering it so far, as to be able to describe it. 3 Maragnon, of a longer course then any of the other, affirmed to measure at the least 6000 miles, from his first ••ising to his fall; and at his fall into the Sea, to be no less then 70 Leagues from one side to the other▪ More properly to be called a Sea, then many of those great Lakes, or largest Bays, which usually enjoy that name. 4 Rio de la Placa, a River of a less course then the other, but equall unto most in the world besides; in length from its first Fountain 2000 mile; in breadth at his fall into the Sea, about 60 Leagues; and of so violent a stream, that the sea for many Leagues together, altereth not the taste of it. All these as they do end their Race in the Atlantick▪ so they begin it from the main body of the Andes, or at the least some Spur or branch of that great body.

But before we venture further on more particulars, we are to tell you of these Andes, that they are the greatest and most noted Mountains of all America; beginning at Timama a Town of Popayan, in the New Realm of Granada, and thence extended Southwards to the straits of Magellan, for the space of 1000 Leagues and upwards. In breadth about 20 Leagues where they are at the narrowest; and of so vast an height withall, that they are said to be higher then the Alpes, or the head of Caucasus, or any of the most noted Mountains in other parts of the VVorld. Not easie of ascent, but in certain Paths, by reason of the thick and unpassable VVoods, with which covered in all parts thereof which lie towards Peru (for how it is on the other side, or by what People it is neighboured, is not yet dis∣covered) barren, and craggie too withall, but so full of venemous Beasts, and poysonous Serpents, that they are said to have destroyed a whole Army of one of the Kings of Peru, in his match that way. Inhabited by a People as rude and savage as the place, and as little hospitable. The most noted Moun∣tains of America, as before was said, and indeed the greatest of the World. Of ••ame sufficient of themselves not to be greatned by the addition of impossible Figments, or improbable Fictions. Among which last I reckon that of Abraham Ortelius a right learned man, who will have these Mountains to be that which the Scripture calleth by the name of Sephar, Gen. 10. 30. and there affirmed to be the utmost Eastern limit of the sons of Joktan: the vanity and inconsequences of which strange conceit, we have already noted when we were in India.

Proceed we now unto the particular descriptions of this great Peninsula comprehending those large and wealthy Countries, which are known to us by the names of 1 Castella Aurea, 2 The New Realm of Granada. 3 Peru, 4 Chile, 5 Paragnay, 6 Brasil, 7 Guyana, and 8 Paria, with their severall Ilands. Such other Isles as fall not properly and naturally under some of these, must be referred unto the gene∣rall head of the American Ilands in the close of all.

OF CASTELLA DEL ORO.

CASTELLA del ORO, Golden Castile. (Aurea Castella, as the Latines) is bounded on the East and North with Mare del Noort, on the West with Mare del Zur and some part of Veragua, on the South with the New Realm of Granada. Called by the name of Castile, with reference to Castile in Spain, under the favour and good fortune of the Kings whereof it was first discovered: Aurea was added to it, partly for distinctions sake, and partly in regard of that plenty of Gold which the first Discoverers found in it. It is also called Terra Firma, because one of the first parts of Firm land which the Spaniards touched at, having before discovered nothing but some Ilands only.

The So••l and People being of such several tempers, as not to be included in one common Character, we w••ll consider both apart in the several Provinces, of 1 Panama, 2 Darien, 3 Nova Andaluzia, 4 〈◊〉〈◊〉, & 5 the little Province De la Hacha.

1 PANAMA, or the District of Panama, is bounded on the East with the Golf of Vraba, by which parted from the main land of this large Peninsula; on the VVest with Veragua one of the Pro∣vi••ces of Guatimala in Mexicana; washed on both the other sides with the Sea. So called of Panama the town of most esteem herein, and the Juridical Resort of Castella Aurea.

It taketh up the narrowest part of the Streit or Isthmus, which joyns both Peninsulas together: not above 7 or 8 leagues over in the narrowest place betwixt Panama and Porto Bello, if measured by a stra••t line from one town to the other; though 18 leagues according to the course of the Road betwixt them, which by reason of the hils and rivers is full of turnings. Of some attempts to dig a Channel through this Isthmus to let the one Sea into the other, and of the memorable expedition of John 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ver it by land, we have spoke already.

The Air hereof ••oggie, but exceeding hot, and consequently very unhealthy, chiefly from May unto November: the Soil either mountainous and barren, or low and miery; naturally so unfit for grain, that 〈…〉〈…〉 nothing but Maize, and that but sparingly; better for pasturage, in regard of its plenty of grass and the goodness of it: so full of Swine at the Spaniards first coming hither, that they thought they never should destroy them; now they complain as much of their want or paucitie. As for the Inhabitants, whatsoever they were formerly is not now material: most of the old stock rooted out by the Spaniards, and no new ones planted in their room; so that the Country in all parts except towards the Sea, is almost desolated or forsaken.

The Country, as before was said, of little breadth, and yet full of Rivers: the principal whereof, 1 〈◊〉〈◊〉, by the Spaniards called Rio de Lagartos, or the River of Crocodiles, (many of which are har∣be••••ed in it) which falleth into Mare del Noort betwixt Nombre de Dios, and Porto Beleno. 2 Sardi∣ni••••a▪ 3 S••nd••na, 4 Rio de Colubros▪ or the River of Snakes; & 5 Rio de Comagre, all falling into the same Sea. Then on the other side, 6 Chepo, whose sands in former times yielded plenty of gold. 7 Rio de las 〈◊〉〈◊〉, on the banks whereof groweth great store of timber for the building of ships. 8 De Congos, emp••ying it self into the Bay of S. Michaels.

••owns of most note, 1 S. Philip, seated on a safe and strong Haven called Porto Belo, built in this place by the appointment of King Philip the second, but by the counsel of John Baptista Anton••lli, to be the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or the trade betwixt Spain and Panama; partly in regard of the unhealthiness of Nom∣bre d•• Dios, where it was before, but chiefly because that Town was found to have l••en too open to the invasio••s of the English. Fortified with two strong Castles (on each side of the Haven one) but for all that surprized and pillaged by the English under Captain Parker, in the year 1601. 2 Nombre de Dios, conventently seated in the Upper-sea, for a Town of trade; and for that reason made the Staple of such commodities as were trucked betwixt Peru and Spain; which brought from Spain, and landed here, were from hence conveyed over the Land to Panama, and there shipped for Peru; or brought so from Peru and landed at Panama, were by land brought unto this place, and here shipped for Spain▪ It to••k this name from Didaco Niquesa a Spanish Adventurer, who having been distressed by tempests was driven in here, and bid his men go on shore en nombre de Dios, in the name of God. In reference 〈…〉〈…〉 by the Latines, borrowing a Greek word, it is called Theonyma. Of great trade once, on the occasion before mentioned: but in the year 1584 the trade was removed unto Porto Belo, by the counsel of Ant••nelli before named; and some years after that, the Inhabitants also. To hasten which, the taking of this town by Sir Francis Drake, served exceeding fitly. 3 Acla, on the Coast of the same Sea also, but on the South east of Nombre de Dios. 4 Nata, or S▪ Jago de Nata, situate on the Lower sea on the bo••ders of Verag••a, about 30 leagues on the west of Panama. 5 Panama, the chief City of Ca∣stella Aurea▪ the Residence of the Governour of the Courts of Justice, honoured with a Bishops See, a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to the Atchbishop of Lima; and beautified with three fair Monasteries, and a College of 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Seated in the 9▪ degree or Northern Latitude; and so near the Sea, that the waves come close unto the wall. A town through which the wealth of Spain and Peru posseth every year: yet not con∣taining

above 350 houses; the number of the Soldiers greater then that of the Citizens. 6 S. Crux la Real, a League from Panama, inhabited totally by Negroes brought out of Guinea.

This Province was the first of those on the Firm land which were discovered by Columbus. But I find not that he left any name unto it, or to any River or Promontory of it, but only to a little Iland lying on the shore neer Porto Belo, which he caused to be called Los Bastimentos; because being cast hereon by chance, he found good store of Maize and other provisions, called Bastimentos by the Spani∣ard. But the chief Ilands of this Province, are those which Columbus never saw, called the Ilands of Pearls, situate in the Southern sea, opposite to Panama, from which distant 17 leagues or thereabouts. In number above twenty, but two only inhabited, the one called Tarorequi, the other Del Rio; the rest of them rather Rocks then Ilands. Much famed not onely for the abundance, but the excellencie of the Pearls there found, fairer then those of Margarita and Cubagna so much commended. Once very profitable to the Spaniards, till by their cruelty and covetousness they unpeopled the Ilands, and destroyed the Pearls. Inhabited now only by a few Negroes, and some Slaves of Nicaragua, who live here to attend the grazing of their Masters Cattel in the fields and pastures.

2 DARIEN hath on the North the District of Panoma, on the South New Granada, on the East the River of Darien whence it hath its name, and the Golf of Vraba, and on the West the main Southern Ocean.

The Country of a temperate Air, and a fruitful Soil: so happy in the production of Melons and such other fruits, that within twenty dayes after they are sown, they are fully ripe. With like felicity it bringeth forth Grapes and other fruits, either natural hereunto, or brought hither from Europe. A tree here is called Hovo, not elswhere known; the shade of which is conceived to be so wholsom, that the Spaniards seek them out to sleep under them. Out of the Blossoms of it they distill a perfumed Water; of the Bark a Bath or Lavatorie, good for the opening of the pores, and redress of weariness; and from the Roots they draw a Liquour which they use to drink of. Of Beasts and Fowl great plenty, whether wild or ••ame; and some of them not heard of in other places.

Principal Rivers hereof, 1 Darien, whence it hath the name; A clear water, and much drank of, but of a slow course and a narrow channel, able to bear no bigger Vessels then those of one peece of wood used among the Savages: we may call them Troughs. But with this slow course it falleth at last into the Golf of Vraba, a large Arm of the Sea, which p••e••ceth far into the Land, and at the mouth is said to be eight leagues over. 2 Rio de las Redas, & 3 De la Trepadera, both emptying themselves into the Golf of Vraba. 4 Corobaci, on the same side of the Country also. 5 Beru, a River of the South-Sea, not much observable, but that some have laboured to derive the Etymologie of Peru from thence.

Towns of most note, though few of any, 1 Dariene, on the Bank of the Golf of Vraba; oftentimes so unhealthy by the Mists which do thence arise, that the Inhabitants use to send their sick people to the fresh Air of Corobarie to revive their spirits. By the Spaniards it was called S. Maria Antiqua, after∣wards the Antique of Darien, being new built by one Eucisus a Spanish Adventurer, An. 1510. and grew so suddenly into wealth and reputation, that within four years it was made an Episcopal See: But being built too neer the Banks of the Dariene, in a moorish and unhealthy place, both the Episcopal See, and the chief Inhabitants were removed to Panama. Some other Colonies of the Spaniards have been planted here; but either forsaken by themselves, or destroyed by the Savages: so that now from Acla to the bottom of the Golf of Vraba, the Spaniards have not in their own hands either Town or Village. Nothing but some few scattered houses in all that tract, for the use of the Natives, who formerly made their Nest, like Birds, on the tops of trees. 2 Bizu, 3 Los Angadesos, two small villages on the other side of the Country, possessed by the Savages. Besides these, and some sorry sheds here and there dispersed, all the rest a Desart. So that not being able to maintain the reputation of a distinct Province, the government here of hath of late been devolved on the Prefect of Panama.

3 NOVA AND ALVSIA hath on the West the River Darien, and the Golf of Vraba; on the East the Province of S. Martha, on the North the main Ocean, and on the South the new Realm of Granada. So called with reference to Andalusia a Province of Spain. Called also by some Writers Carthagena, from Carthagena now the chief City of it.

It is in length from the Golf of Vraba to the River of Magdalen 80 Leagues, and neer upon as much in breadth. Mountainous, and very full of woods, but in those woods great store of Rosin, Gums, and some kinds of Balsams. Here is also said to be a Tree, which whosoever toucheth, is in danger of poi∣soning. The Soil, by reason of the abundance of rain which fals upon it, very moyst and spewie; inso∣much that few of our Europaean fruits have prospered in it. Few veins of Gold in all the Country, ex∣cept only in that part hereof which is called Zena, where the Spaniards at their first coming found great store of treasure: But it was taken out of the graves and Monuments of the dead, not found in Mines, or digged for as in other places: such being the reputation of that Territory in former times, that the Nations far and neer did carry the bodies of their Dead to be buried in it, with great quantity of Gold, Jewels, and other Riches. The Natives very fierce and stout, whiles they were a People: But giving the Spaniards many overthrows before fully conquered, they have been so consumed and wasted by little and little, that there are not many of them left.

Chief Rivers hereof, 1 Rio de los Redos, & 2 Rio de los▪ Anades, both falling into the Bay of Vraba. 3 Zenu, which passing thorow the Province above-mentioned, to which it gives name, falleth into the

Ocean over against the Iland Fuerte. 4 S. Martha, of long course, and much estimation: For rising in the most Southern parts of the New Realm of Granada, neer the Aequinoctial, it passeth thorow the whole length of that Kingdom, and at the last mingleth its streams with that of the River Magdalen, not far from Mopox. By the Natives it is called Cauca. And as for Mountains, those of most note are a continual Ridge of hils by the Spaniards called Cordillera, by the Natives Abibe; craggie, and difficult of ascent; in breadth affirmed to be 20 leagues, but the length uncertain, the furthest ends of them towards the South not discovered hitherto.

Places of most importance in it, 1 Carthagena, situate in a sandie Peninsula, ten degrees distant from the Aequator: well built, and for the bigness of it of great wealth and state; consisting of 500 houses or thereabouts, but those neat and handsom. Beautified with a Cathedral Church, three Monasteries, and one of the best Havens of all America. Well fortified on both sides since the taking of it by Sir Francis Drake, who in the year 1585. took it by assault, and carried thence besides inestimable sums of money, 240 Brass pecces of Ordinance. 2 Tolu, by the Spaniards called S. Jago, twelve miles from Carthagena; memorable for the most soveraign Balsam of all these parts, called the Balsam of Tolu; little interior, if at all, to the Balsam of Egypt. 3 Mopox, or Santa Crux de Mopox, neer the Conflu∣ences of the Rivers of Martha and Magdalens. 4 Baranca de Malambo, on the Banks of the River Magdalen, six leagues from the Ocean; where such Commodities as are brought by sea for the New Realm of Granada, use to be unshipped, and carried by Lighters or small Boats up the River. 5 Seba∣stian de Buena vista, built by Alfonso de Oieda, An. 1508. in his first attempt upon this Country, situate on a rising ground neer the mouth of the Bay of Vraba, a league and an half from the sea. 6 Villa de Maria, 30 leagues South of Carthagena, but of no great note.

4 S. MARTHA hath on the West Nova Andalusia, on the East Rio de la Hacha, on the North the main Ocean, on the South the New Realm of Granada: about 70 leagues in length, and as much in breadth. So called from S.Martha the chief City of it.

The Country mountainous and barren, not fit for pasturage or tillage; productive notwithstanding of Limons, Orenges, Pomgranats, and such other fruits as are brought hither out of Spain. The Air on the Sea-coasts very hot and scalding, and in the midland parts as cold, because of the neighbourhood of some Mountains alwayes covered with snow. The principal of those Mountains, a long Ridge of Hils by the Spaniards called Las Sierras Nievadas, or the Snowy mountains; discernable by the Mariners 30 leagues at sea, by whom called the Mountains of Tairona, from a Vallie of that name beneath them; the Inhabitants whereof by the advantage of those hils have hitherto preserved their liberty against the Spaniards. The rest though subject to the Spaniards, have their several ••••ings, affirmed to be an arrogant and ill-natured people; made worse perhap•• then indeed they are, by reason of their hate to the Spani∣ards, whose government they live under with great unwillingness.

Chief Rivers of this Province, 1 Rio Grando de la Magdalena; which hath its fountain in the hils of the new Realm of Granada, not far from the Aequat••r, but its fall into the Ocean betwixt Carthagena and S.Martha, in the Latitude of 12 Degrees; where dividing it self, it maketh an Iland of 5 leagues long, and after openeth into the Sea with two wide mouths; discernible for ten leagues space from the rest of the Main, by the taste and colour of the water. 2 Rio de Cazaze, which falleth into the Mag∣dalen, as doth also 3 Caesar, by the Natives called Pompatao; which having its fountain neer the City of Kings in the Vale of Vpar, passeth directly towards the South, till it meet with 4 Ayumas▪ another River of this Tract; accompanied with whom he runneth westward for the space of 70 leagues, and endeth in the great River of Magdalens, as before is said, neer the Forrest of Alpuerte. 5 Bubia, 6 Piras, 7 Don Diego 8 Palamini, 9 Gayza, falling into the Ocean.

Towns of most observation, 1 S. Martha, situate on the shores of the Ocean, in the Latitude of ten Degrees & 30 Minutes; neighboured by a safe and convenient Haven, defended from the winds by an high Mountain neer unto it, and honoured with an Episcopal See. Small, and ill built when it was at the best; nor well recovered of the spoil it suffered by Sir Francis Drake, An▪ 1595. and by Sir Anthony Sherley the next year after. 2 Tenariffe on the Banks of the Magdalen, 40 leagues from S. Martha. 3 Tanalameque, by the Spaniards called Villa de las Palmas, twenty leagues to the South of Tenariffe▪ 4 Cividad de los Reges, or the City of the Kings, situate in the Vale of Vpar, on the banks of a deep and violent River called Guatapori, which not far off falleth into the Caesar: ••••ll neighboured by the Inhabi∣tants of the Vale of Toirona, not hitherto reduced under the command of the Kings of Spani. 5 Ra∣mada, by the Spaniards called New Salamanca, in the same Valley of Vpar; as liberally furnished with veins of Brass, as it is with stones. 6 Ocanna, on the western Reach of the River Caesar, equally distant from its confluence with Ayumas, and its fall into Magdalen.

5 RIO DE LA HACHA is the name of a little Province lying on the North-east of S.Martha: environed on two sides with the main Ocean, and on the third (which is that of the East) with a large and spacious Arm of the Sea called Golfo de Venezuela: the Extremities hereof North west called Cabo la Vela; on the North-east, Cabo di Coqui boccoa.

It took this name from the Town and River of La Hatha, a small Town, consisting of no more then an hundred houses, but big enough to give name to so small a Province. Built on a little hill about a mile from the Sea; the Haven inconvenient and exposed to the Northern winds, but the Soil about it very rich, fruitfull of all such Plants as are brought from Spain; well stored with veins of Gold, ex∣cellent Salt-wiches, and some Gems of great worth and vertue. Distant 8 leagues from New Sala∣manca,

and 18 leagues from the Cape la Vela: surprized and sacked by Sir Francis Drake, An. 1595. 2 Rancheria, six leagues on the East of De la Hacha, inhabited for the most part by such as get their living by Pearl-fishing. 3 Topia, five leagues from La Hach, and almost as much from the Sea: the Fields whereof lying betwixt the Town and New Salamanca, were terribly wasted by the English; in the year aforesaid; because the Governour of New Salamanca, with whom they had contracted for 4000 Ducats not to burn that Town, would not stand to his bargain.

These Countries discovered by Columbus, and by him called Terra Firma, as before was said; were afterwards brought under the power of Spain, by two several men, imployed in the subduing of their several parts, An. 1508. To Didaco Niquesa was allotted the government and conquest of those parts hereof which lie on the West of the Bay of the Vraba, containing the Praefectures of Darien and Panama, by the name of Castella del Oro: And to Alfonso Oreda, all that lay on the East of that Gulf, by the name of Nova Andalusia. But these two finished not the work, though they first begun it: Encisus discovering further on the River of Dariene, then Niquesa had done before him; and Balbon finding out the way to the South sea, where Panama and the best of their trading lieth, which neither of the other had thought upon. Both afterwards joyned into one Province, the Praefectures of S. Martha and Rio de la Hacha (when conquered and subdued by the Spaniard) being added to it. One of their last Kings which held out against the Spaniards, was called Abibeia, who had his Palace on the top of a tree, (as most of his subjects had their houses) from which when Francisco de Vasques a Spanish Cap∣tain could by no other Rhetorick win him to descend; he laid his Axe to the Root, and began to fell it: which seen, the poor Prince was fain to come down, and compound both for his life and Palace at the will of his Enemies.

OF NOVA GRANADA.

NOVA GRANADA, or the new Realm of Granada, is bounded on the North with Castella Aurea; on the West with Mare del Zur; on the East with Veneznela. The Countries lying on the South, are not yet discovered, shut up with vast Hils, and impassa∣ble Mountains; except only in those parts which lie near the Sea, where the Wa•• ••yeth open to Peru. Thus called by Gonsalvo Ximenez, the first Discoverer, who being a Native of Granada in Spain, gave this name unto it.

It is in length 130 Leagues, and as much in breadth; reckoning Popayan for a part of it, though by some made a distinct government. So that we may divide the whole into these two parts, Granada spe∣cially so called, lying on the West: and 2 Popayana, lying toward; Mare del Zur.

1. GRANADA specially so called, hath an Ayr for the most part well tempered betwixt heat and cold; with little difference (if any) betwixt Summer and Winter, and not much in the length and shortness of dayes. The Country full of Woods, but of great fertility; well stored with Corn and Pa∣sturage, many Herds of Cattel; some veins of Gold and other Metals, and in that part hereof which is called Tunia, great plenty of Emeralds▪ and amongst their woods, that called Guajacan, Medicinable for the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 disease, grows in great abundance. The People tall and strong of body▪ not very industrious, the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 part of their time being spent in songs and dances. The Women of a white and more clear com∣pl••xion then any of their neighbours, and more handsomly habited; apparelled in black, or party-co∣loured Mantles, girt about their middles; their hair tyed up, and covered most an end with Chaplets intermixt with flowers, and artificially composed.

Rivers of note I find not any, but those of S. Martha, and •• Magdalen, described before: nor any di∣stinction of it into several Provinces, but that the names of Tunia, Bagota, Panches, Colymae, and Mus••, by which the Savages were distinguished, when first known to the Spaniards; with reference to which the principall of their Towns are by some described.

Towns then of greatest note, 1 S. Foy de Bagota. but commonly S. Foy, the Metropolis of this new Realm the See of an Archbishop, and the 〈…〉〈…〉 the Governour. Built by Gonsalvo Ximinez de Quesada, at the foot of the Mountains, not far from the Lake of Guatavita, on the banks of which they used to sa∣crifice to their Idols. The Town inhabited by 600 Families of Spaniards, besides those of the Natives; and situate in the fourth Degree of Northern Latitude. 2 S. Michael twelve Leagues on the North of S. Foy, a well-traded market. 3 Tocayma in the territorie of the Panches, a barbarous and man••eating People, till reclaimed by the Spaniards, and masters of the richest part of all the Country. The Town about 15 Leagues from S. Foy, towards the North east; and seated on the banks of Pati, a little River, which not f•••• off is swallowed up in the body of Magdalen. 4 Tudela is the Country of the Musi and Colymae, two warlike Nations; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 on the banks of the River Zarbi, and made a Colonie of the Spa∣niards at their first coming hither; but deserted by them not long after, for fear of Savages, though the want of Provisions was pretended. 5 Trimdado, on the same River, but somewhat lower, and more re∣mote from the Savages; by whom notwithstanding much annoyed: the fields thereof full of veins of Christal, Emeralds, Adamants, and Chalcedonians. 6 La Palma, built by the Spaniards in the same territorie of the Musi and Colymae, Anno 1572. 7 Tunia, so called according to the name of the Tribe or Province in which it is situate; built on the top of an high Hill that it might serve for a ••etreat and Fortress against the Savages; now a well-traded Emporie, and very wealthy, the Inhabitants being able to impress 200 horse for present service. 8 Pampelona, 60 Leagues from S. Foy, towards the North east, rich in Mines of Gold, and Herds of Cattel. 9 Merida, on the North of Pampiona, the furthest Town of all this Province on the North east towards Veneznela; As 10 S. John de Los Lianos, or S. John up∣on the Plaines is in the South-east, 50 Leagues from S. Foy, and seated in a corner full of veins of Gold.

2. POPAYANA lyeth on the West of new Granada, strictly and specially so called; from which parted by the River Martha, which hath its original in this Country; on the North bounded with No∣va Andaluzia, or Carthagena; and with Mare del Zur upon the West. Extended in length from North to South 130 Leagues at the least; and from the River to the Sea betwixt 30 and 40.

The Country, over-clovd with rain, breeds but little Maize, less Wheat, and almost no Cattel; though in some places richer then it is in others. The People anciently Man-eaters, and as rude as any; now more industrious and affable then the other Americans; especially about Popayan, where the soyl is also better tempered then in other places. The Rivers of most note beside that of S. Martha, which we have spoken of already: and some lesser streams which fall into it; are 1 Rio di S. Juan, 2 Rio de Ce∣dros▪ 3 Rio de S. Jago; all falling into Mare del Zur.

Cities and Towns of greatest note, 1 Popayan, called by the name of the King hereof, when first known to the Spaniards; situate on a nameless but pleasant River, in the midst of a Plain, of great wealth, and a healthy Ayr; in two Degrees and 30 Minutes of Northern Latitude; the ordinary resi∣dence

of the Governour, and See of a Bishop. The building fair unto the eye, but slight; excepting the Cathedral, and a Monastery of the Fryars called De mercede, which are strong and lasting. 2 Antiochia, (or Sancta Fides de Antiochia) on the borders of Nova Andaluzia, 100 Leagues distant from Popayan. Seated upon a little River which fals into the Martha, from which twelve Leagues distant. 3 Cara∣manta on the Martha it self. 4 Patia in a pleasant Valley, on the banks of a small River, but of excellent water. 5 S▪ Anne in the Cantred of Anzerman, by which name it is sometimes called: Built on a little Hill betwixt two sweet Rivers, and compassed round about with a Grove of most pleasant Fruits. 6 S. Jago de Arma, the chief Town of the Cantred of Arma; situate in a territorie very rich in Gold, but o∣therwise unprovided of all manner of necessaries: Fifty Leagues to the North-east of Popayan. 7 Carthage in the Province of Quimbaia, 22 Leagues from S. Jago de Arma, seated in a Plain betwixt two torrents, seven Leagues from the River of S. Martha. 8 Cali, a League from that River, but on the banks of another, in the Latitude of four Degrees: neighboured by a vast and mighty Mountain, at whose foot it standeth; where built by Sebastian de Betalcuzar, the first discoverer of this Country. 9 Bonaventure on a Bay so called in the Southern Ocean; a smal Town, but of great use for the convey∣ance of the Commodities of new Spain unto Popayan, and other Towns of this Province. 10 Timana, 80 Leagues from Popayan towards the East, at the foot of that vast ridge of Mountains called the Andes; which hereabouts taking their beginning, extend as far Southwards as the Streits of Magellan. 11 S. Juan de Pasto, situate in a pleasant Valley, but one Degree from the Aequator. 12 Sebastian de la Plata, so called of its Silver Mines, in the South-east confines of the Province. 13 Almaguer, on the sides of a plain but barren Mountain. 14 Madrigal, by the Natives called Chapan Chicu; in a barren soyl, were not Gold a supplement of all wants, which is there found in some abundance.

To this Province belong also some Ilands in the Southern Ocean, that is to say, 1 The Isle of Palmes, South of the Cape of Corrientes, so called from the abundance of Palms which are growing in it. 2 Gor∣gona, opposite to the mouth or outlet of Rio de S. Juan, an Iland of three Leagues in compass, the Hils so high, the Vallies so extreamly low, the Sun so little seen amongst them, and the Woods so dark, that some have likened it to Hell. Not much observable, but that it did afford a lurking place unto Francis Pizarro, in his attempts upon Peru, when repulsed from landing on that Coast. 3 Del Gallo, a small Iland, not a League in circuit, on the South of Gorgona.

This whole Country thus divided into two Praefectures, but both subordinate to the Juridical Resort in the City of S. Foy de Bagota; is indebted for its first Discovery to two several persons. Grana∣da specially so called, was first discovered by Gonsalvo Ximinez de Quesada, employed therein by Ferdi∣nand de Lugo, Admiral of the Canarie Ilands, Anno 1536. who passing up the River of Magdalen with∣out molestation (more then the difficulties of the wayes thorow Fens and Forrests) as far as the Cantred of Bagota, was there encountred by that King, whom he easily vanquished: and wasting all his territo∣ries, carryed with him thence great quantity of Gold, Emeralds, and other treasure. The residue of those Petit Princes which then governed in their several Tribes, either submitted to him without opposition, or else were vanquished at the first rising. Having discovered and subdued every several Province, and miserably murdered Sangipa the last King of Bagota, of whom he had made use in subduing the Panches; he caused it to be called The new Realm of Granada▪ for the reason formerly laid down: and summing up the spoyles he had gotten in this easie war, he found them to amount to 1800 Emeralds, 191294 Pe∣zoes of the finest Gold, 35000 of a courser and inferiour alloy. In his return he heard the news of Seba∣stian de Betalcazars marching on the other side of the River of S. Martha; who having at the same time discovered and subdued the Province of Popayana, was beating out his way towards the North Sea, and from thence to Spain. This Betalcazar, being by Francisco Pezarro the Conqueror of Peru, made Go∣vernour of the Town and Province of Quito▪ and having s••••ured all the Country to the very Sea, re∣solved to open a way homewards thorow those Regions, which lay betwixt his own Province, and Mare del Noort: And this he did resolve the rather, in regard that he had been informed, that a rich Coun∣try, full of Gold, was in that Tract possessed by Popayan and Columbaz, two Petit Princes, but yet the greatest in those parts. Encountred in his march by the Roytelets of Patia and Pasto, he soon made them weary, and retire themselves into the Woods and impassable Mountains; and passing slowly on, came at last to Popayan. Where though the Savages entertained him with some frequent skirmishes, yet they grew quieter by degrees; giving the Spaniards leave to possess themselves of their best Towns, and to build others in such places as they thought convenient. But this was after the first Conquest, according to the coming over of succeeding Colonies: The first Conquest being finished Anno 1536. when the New Realm of Granada was subdued by Ximinez.

OF PERV.

PERV is bounded on the East with that vast ridge of Mountains which they call the Andes; on the West with Mare del Zur, on the North with Popayan, an Appendix of the New Realm of Granada, on the South with Chile. So called from the River Peru, which being one of the first of note which the Spaniards met with in this Country, occasioned them to give that name to the whole.

It is in length from North to South 700 Leagues, but the breadth not equal. In some places 100 Leagues broad, in others 60. in the rest but 40. more or less accord∣ing to the windings of the Seas and Mountains. Divided commonly into three parts, all of so different a nature from one another, as if they were far distant both in site and soyl. These parts the Plains, the Hill Countries, and the Andes the Plains, extended on the Sea shore, in all places level without Hils; the Andes a continuall ridge of Mountains without any Vallies; the Sierra, or Hill-Countries composed of both. Each part stretched out from North to South, the whole length of the Country: the Plains from the Sea shore to the Hill-Countries, for the most part ten Leagues broad, in some places more; the Hill-Countries 20 Leagues in breadth where narrowest, and as much the Andes. In the Plains it never raineth, on the Andes continually in a manner; in the Hill-Countries Rain from September to April, after that fair weather. In the Hill Countries the Summer beginneth in April, and endeth in September; in the Plains their Summer beginneth in October, and endeth in April. So that a man may travel from Summer to Winter in one day; be frozen in the morning at his setting forth, and scorched with heat before he come to his journies end. Some other differences there are, as that the Andes are covered with VVoods and Forrests, whereas the Hill Countries are bare and naked; the Plains, where there are store of Ri∣vers, and the benefit of the Sea besides, sandy and dry, and in most places destitute both of Fruits and Corn; ••n some parts of the Hill Countries where there are no Rivers, and a Rain but seldom, plenty of Roots, Maize, Fruits, and all other necessaries. In the Plains there never bloweth any but the Souther∣ly wind, though it bring no rain with it; and in the Hils, winds from every Coast, and of every nature, some bringing Rain, some Snow, some claps of Thunder, and others fair weather at the heels of them. Insomuch that it is observed, that such of the Inhabitants of the Plains as go up to the Sierra, or Moun∣tains, do find such pains in the head and stomack, as fresh water souldiers when first Sea-sick.

Not to pursue these differences any further in the several parts, we will look upon the whole in gross▪ which we shall find but meanly furnished for the bigness, with those Commodities which so large a Coun∣try might afford: insomuch as many of the People live most on Roots, here being little VVheat, and not such quantities of Maize (the ordinary bread grain of the Americans) as to serve their multitudes. Nor find I that the Cattel of Europe have been either brought hither in any great numbers, or are grown to any great increase. Instead of which they have in their woods and pastures infinite numbers of beasts somewhat like wild Goats, (which they call Vicagues) and great store of a kind of sheep by them called Pacos, profitable both for fleece and burden; as big as a small breed of Horses, but in tast as pleasing as our Mutton, and no less nourishing. A Creature so well acquainted with its own abilities, that when he findeth himself over-loaded, no blows or violence shall make him move a foot forwards till his load be lessened; and of so cheap a dyet, that he is content with very little, and sometimes passeth three whole dayes without any water. The Camels of these parts, and not much unlike them.

This as it is by some accompted for a Creature proper to this Country only (though in that mistaken) so may it pass amongst the Rarities hereof: many of which it hath both in Beasts, and Plants, and in in∣animate bodies also. Amongst their Plants they have a Fig tree, the North part whereof looking towards the Mountains, bringeth forth its Fruits in the Summer only; the Southern part looking to the Sea, fruitful only in Winter. Some as deservedly do count the Coca for a wonder, the Leaves whereof being dryed, and formed into Lozenges, (or little Pellets) are exceeding useful in a journey. For melting in the mouth, they satisfie both hunger and thirst, and preserve a man in strength, and his spirits in vigour: and generally are esteemed of such soveraign use, that it is thought that 100000 Baskets full of the Leaves of this Tree are sold yearly at the Mines of Potosia only, each of which at the Markets of Cusco would yield 12. d. or 18. d a piece. Another Plant they tell us of, but I find no name for it, which if put into the hands of a sick person, will instantly discover whether he be like to live or die. For if on the pressing it in his hand he look merry and chearfull, it is an assured sign of his Recovery: as on the other side, of death, if sad and troubled. Amongst their Beasts, besides those spoken of before, they reckon that which they call the Huanacu: of which it is observed that the Males stand Centinel on the Mountains, while the Fe∣males are feeding in the Vallies: and if they see any men coming towards them, they set out their throws, to give their Females notice of some danger near: whom when they come up to them, they put in the front of the Retreat, interposing their own bodies betwixt them and their enemy. Nor want they Rarities of nature even in things inanimate: here being said to be a round Lake near the Mines of Po∣••••••i, whose water is so hot, though the Country be exceeding cold, that they who bathe themselves are

not able to endure the heats thereof if they go but a little from the Banks: there being in the midst thereof a boyling of above 20 foot square. A Lake which never doth decrease, though they have drawn a great stream from it to serve their Mettal-Mills.

More profitable though less rare, those Metals, which those Mills are made for; and not less profi∣table, one of those Vulgar Plants, I mean Tobacco, growing more abundantly here then in other Coun∣tries of America: for which cause, and the resemblance which it hath to Henbane, in form and quali∣ty, it is called the Henbane of Peru by Gerrad and some others of our Modern Herbalists. A Plant, which though in some respect being moderatly taken, it may be serviceable for Physick: yet besides the consumption of the purse, and impairing of our inward parts; the immodetate, vain, and phantastical abuse of this stinking weed, corrupteth the naturall sweetness of the breath, stupifieth the brain, and indeed is so prejudicial to the general esteem of our Country-men, that one faith of them, Anglorum corpora qui huic plantae tantopere indulgent, in Barbarorum naturam degenerasse videntur. The two chief Vertues ascribed unto it (pardon me I beseech you this short digression) are that it voideth Rheume, and is found to be a soveraign Antidote against Lues Venerea. that loathsom Disease of the French Pox: For this last, like enough it is, that so unclean a Disease may be helped with such an unsavory Medicine. But fot the second it may perhaps consist more in opinion, then truth or reality; the Rheume which it is said to void, being no more then what it breedeth at the present. We may as well conclude that Botled-Ale is good for the breaking of winde (which effect we finde commonly to follow on the drink∣ing of it) though indeed it be only the same winde which it self conveyed into the Stomack. But Tobacco is by few now taken as Medicinal; it is of late times grown a Good-fellow, and fallen from a Physitian to a Complement. An humour which had never spred so far amongst us, if the same means of preven∣tion had been used by the Christian Magistrates, as was by Morat Bassa among the Turks: who com∣manded a Pipe to be thrust thorow the Nose of a Turk whom he found taking Tobacco, and so to be carried in derision all about Constantinople. It is observed that the taking of Tobacco was first brought into England by the Marriners of Sir Francis Drake, An. 1585. And that it hapned not unfitly in the way of an Antidote to that immoderate use of drinking, which our Low Country Souldiers had brought out of the Netherlands much about that time, An. 1582. Before which time, the English of all Nor∣thern People were deemed to be most free from that Swinish Vice, wherein it is to be feared that they have much out-gone their Teachers, the Dutch. Certain it is, that it is taken so excessively by both these Nations, that I may justly say with a learned Fleming, Herbaeejus non dicam usus sed abusus, non modo in Anglia, sed in Belgio, & alibi, insanum in modum jam adolevit.

But the greatest riches of this Country is most out of sight hid in the Bowels of the earth, but found in those never decaying Mines of Gold and Silver; more eminently abounding in this one Province then in all America. For instance whereof we may take the Silver Mines of Potozi, discovered in the yeer 1545. the fift of which, payable into the Kings Exchequer, amounted in forty yeers to a 111 mil∣lions of Pezoes, every Pezo being valued at six shillings and six pence; and yet a third part of the whole was discharged of that payment. By this one we may guesse somewhat of the rest; as by the propor∣tion of one member the dimensions of the whole body may be probably a••med a••••; unless the riches of these Mines be beyond conjecture; of which it is affirmed by some knowing men, that they yield in many places more Gold then Earth. Upon which ground it is conceived by Arias Montanus, and some other very learned men, that this Peru is that land of Ophir to which Solomons Nav•• went for Gold, in∣duced thereunto by that Text of the Chron. lib. 2. cap, 3. ver. 6. That the Gold was the Gold of Paruaim. A fancy not of so sandy a foun••ation, as many others of that kinde, if Peru had been the old name of this Country, and not newly given it by the Spaniards. By means whereof not only Spain, but all Eu∣rope also is better furnished with gold and silver, then ever formerly. For in the first Ages of the VVorld our Ancestors the Britains (I must digress here once again) had no other money then Iron-rings, and Brass-rings, which they used for instruments of Exchange; and in the Roman Provinces, we read that the most usual Materials of their coyn, was most times Brass, and sometimes Leather. Corium forma publica percussum, as it is in Seneca Of which last sort we finde that Frederick the Emperour made use at the siege of Millain; and the English, in the time of the Barons VVars. And why not so? consider∣ing that no longer since in the year 1574▪ the Hollanders being then reduced to some extremities, made money of Past boord. But this hapneth only in Cases of necessity, the two Mettals of gold and silver having for many hundred years (though not in such abundance as in latter times) been the chief instru∣ments of Exchange and Bartery betwixt man and man, & questionless will so continue to the end of the VVorld. I know Sit Thomas More in the second ••ook of his Vtopia, preferreth Iron before Gold, because more necessary for all uses; Vt sine quo non magis quam sine igne atque aqua vivere Mortales queant: and that he giveth us there a Plot to bring gold and silver into contempt, telling us how the Vtopians use to employ those Metals, in making Chamber pots, and Vessels of more unclean necessi∣ties; eating and drinking for the most part in glass or earth. He telleth us also how they make chains and fetters of Gold, to hold in their rebellious slaves, and Malefactors; how they punish infamous per∣sons by putting Gold Rings upon their Fingers, Jewels of Gold in their ears, and chains of gold about their necks: how they adorn their little children with precious Jewels, which gayeties when they come to Age, and see them worn by none but such little children, they use to cast away of their own accord; as with us our elder Boys leave off without constraint their Babies, Cobnuts, and other Crepundia. He further telleth us how the Ambassadors of the Anemolii (a confederate State of the Vtopians) coming amongst them richly and gorgiously attired, were took for slaves, by reason of their Golden Chains, and the meanest of their Followers thought to be the Ambassadors: how the elder Boys derided the

Strangers for wearing jewels, as if they had been children still; and how the People laught at their chains of Gold, as being too weak to shackle such sturdy Fellows. Now though it pleased that wise State to have any Gold or Silver at all amongst them, it was not (as he telleth us) out of any esteem which themselves had of it, but therewith to provide themselves of Forreign aids, and pay their Armies, when the nec••ss••••es of their affairs, or other reason of State did require the same. How this device would sort with the humours of those People whom Lucian antiently did Fable, and some of later times more 〈◊〉〈◊〉 do fancy to have their dwelling in the Moon: I am not able to say, as having hitherto had no comm••••ce nor correspondence with the Inhabitants thereof: though possibly I may endeavour it in the end of this Book, and finde it to sort well enough with their condition. Certain I am this sublu∣nary World of ours will never brook it. And so I leave it▪ and look back again on the Mines of Peru: the extraordinary plenty of gold and silver which those and the rest of the New world, have furnished the old World withall, being conceived by many knowing and judicious men, to be the cause of the dearness of all commodities at the present times, compared unto the cheapness of the times foregoing: for where much is, there greater prices will be given, then in other places. And yet there want not some that add also other causes, of the high prizes of our days: viz. Monopolies, Combinations of Mer∣chan••s and Craf••••men; transportation of Grain, pleasure of great personages, the excess of private 〈…〉〈…〉 the like: but these last I rather ta••e to be con-causes, the first being indeed the principal. For, (a•• that excellent Sir Henry Savil, hath it in the end of his notes on Tacitus) the excessive abundance 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, things which consist meerly on the constitution of men, draweth necessarily 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, those things which nature requireth, to an higher rate in the Market. Captá ab Augusto Alexandra faith Orosius) Roma in tantum opibus ejus crevit, ut dupla majora quam antehac rerum ve∣nalium p••••tia statuerentur. As for that question, whether of the two Kingdoms be happier, that which suppl••••th it self with money, by Traffick and the works of Art; or that which is supplied by M••nes growing, as the gift of nature, I finde it by this tale in part resolved. Two Merchants depart∣ing from Spain to get gold, touched upon part of Barbary, where the one buyeth Moors to dig and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with; the other fraughteth his vessell with sheep: and being come to the Indies, the one finding Mines, set his slaves to work, and the other hapning in grassie ground, put his sheep to grazing. The Maves grown cold and hungry, call for food and cloathing; which the sheep-master by the increase of his stock had in great abundance•• so that what the one got in gold with ••oil, charges and hazard both of 〈…〉〈…〉 and health, he gladly gave unto the other in exchange or Bartery, for the continual supply of 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ Clothes, and other necessaries for himself and his servants. In the end the Mines being ex∣haust••d, and all the money thence arising exchanged with the Shepherd for such necessaries as his wants 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ home comes the Shepherd in great triumph, with abundance of wealth, his Companion b••••nging nothing with him but the Tale of his travels. But I dare not take upon me to determine this po••••t. Only I add, that the English and the Hollanders by the benefit of their Manufactures and conti∣nual Traffick, did in conclusion weary the late King of Spain, King Philip the second, and out-vied him as it were) in wealth and treasure; notwithstanding his many Mines of Gold and silver in Bar∣bary, India, Mexicana, Guinea, some in Spain and Italy, and these of Peruana which now we handle, and which have given occasion unto this Discourse or Digression rather.

It is now time to take a view of the People also, affirmed to be (for the most part) of great simpli∣city; yet some of them (those specially which lie neer the Aequator) to be great dissemblers, and never to discover their conceptions freely. Ignorant of Letters, but of good courage in the Wars, well s••illed in managing such weapons as they had been used to, and fearless of death; the rather prompted to this last by an old opinion held amongst them, that in the other world they shall eat, and drink, and make love to Women. And therefore commonly at the Funeral of any great person who was attended •••• in his life, they use to kill and bury with him one or more of his servants to wait upon him after death. in the manner or their living much like the Jews; but not in habit: conform therein to the other Sa∣••••ges, but that those cover their upper parts with some decent garment, and leave the other Members 〈◊〉〈◊〉. But this is only neer the Aequator; both Sexes elswhere wearing Mantles to their very Heels. habited in one fashion over all the Country, except the dressing of their heads, wherein scarce any one doth agree with another, but hath his fashion to himself. The Women less esteemed here then in other places, treated as Slaves, and sometimes cruelly beaten upon slight occasions: the men (as S. Paul saith of the ancient Gentiles) leaving the natural use of the woman, and burning in their lusts towards one another. For which it God delivered them into the hands of the Spaniards, they received that re∣compen••e which was meet.

Rivers of most note 1 S. Jago, on the borders towards Popayana; a River of a violent course, and so great a depth, that it is 180 Fathoms deep at the influx of it. 2. Tombez, opening into a fair and capa∣cious Bav, over against the Isle of Puna, on the further side of the Aequator; an Iland of twelve Leagues in compals, and exceeding fruitfull. 3 Guagaquil, of a longer course then any of the other two, and falling into Mare del Zur on the South of Tombez; over against the Isle of Lobos. No Iland after this of note upon all this Coast. If any come in our way which runneth towards the East, we shall meet with them in the view of the several Provinces; and so we shall of the Hills or Mountains which are most considerable; the Andes having been already touched on. Take we now notice of the great Lake of Titicaca, in which twelve Rivers are reported to lose themselves; in compass 80 Leagues, and usually Navigable with ships and barks. The waters of it not so salt as those of the sea, but so thick that no body can drink them; yet on the banks of it many habitations, as good as any in Peru. By a fair water course or River it passeth into a less Lake, which they call Aulaga, and thence most pro∣bably

findeth a way into the Sea, or else is swallowed in the Bowels of that thirsty earth; but the first more likely.

It is divided commonly into three Juridical Resorts, viz. of 1 Quito, 2 Lima, and 3 Charcos; each having under it many several and subordinate Provinces; too many and of too small note to be here considered. We will therefore look upon the chief, and of greatest reckoning, 1 Quito, 2 Los Quixos, 3 Lima, 4 Cusco, 5 Charcos, and 6 Collao; three on the Sea, and the other three in the midlands; to which the Ilands of it shall be joyned in the close of all.

1. QVITO is bounded on the North with Popayan, on the West with Mare del Zur; on the South with the Province of Lima, and on the East with that of Los Quixos. So named from Quito the chief Town and Province of the first division.

The soil as fertile and as fit for the fruits of Europe, as any other in Peru: well stored with Cattell, especially the Pacos or Peruvian sheep; and plentifully furnished both with Fish and Fowl. In many parts great store of Nitre, of which they make most approved good Gunpowder: and in some Rivers, especially that of S. Barbara, many veins of Gold. The people generally industrious, especially in the making of Cloth of Cotton, equal almost to silks for fineness; of constitution strong and healthy; but given to lying, drinking and such other vices: with which they are so much in love that though they are conceived to be apt of Learning, yet not without great difficulty brought to the Christian Faith, nor willingly reclaimed from their ancient Barbarism. Extreamly punished with the Pox, an hereditary disease amongst them; the very Girls and untouched Virgins so infected with it, that neither Tobacco, Guajacan, nor Sarsa parilla, all which this Country doth afford in a great abundance, is able to pre∣serve them from it.

Towns of most observation in it, 1 Carangues, a large and sumptuous Palace of the ancient Kings, so named because situate in the Territory of the Carangues, a barbarous, bloody, and man-eating peo∣ple; subdued by Guayanacapa, one of the mightiest of the Kings of Peru; from whom revolting, and withall killing many of his Ministers and Garrison-Souldiers, they were upon a second conquest brought to the banks of a great Lake into which 20000 of them being killed, were thrown. The Lake from thenceforth called Yaguarcoch•• or the Lake of blood. 2 Otavallu, another Palace of the Kings, but far inferiour to the other; yet giving name unto the Cantred in which it standeth. 3 Quito, the chief of this Resort, and once the Regal seat of its proper Kings (till made subject by Guayanacapa before mentioned) the ruines of whose Palace are now remaining. By the Spaniards it is called S. Francisco, built on the declivity of an Hill, not above 30 minutes from the Equinoctial, well fortified, and as well furnished with Ammunition: inhabited by about 500 Spaniards besides the Natives. The streets whereof strait and broad: the buildings decent: the principal of which, the Cathedral Church, the Courts of Justice, and two Convents of Dominican and Franciscan Friers. The Town and Territory much annoyed by a Flaming Mountain, or Vulcano; which in the year 1560 cast out such abundance of cinders, that if a rain had not hapned beyond expectation, had made great spoil upon the place. 4 Ta∣cunga fifteen Leagues from Quito; and 5 Rhiobamba in the Territory of the Purvasii 40 Leagues from that; each of them honoured with another of those ancient Palaces. 6 Thomebamba neighboured by another of the Kings Palaces, but more magnificent then the former; situate in the Country of the Canares: amongst whom anciently the Women tilled the Land, and did all without doors; whiles the Men staid at home and spun, and attended housewifry. 7 Cuenca 64 Leagues from Quito, on ano∣ther Road, situate in a Country full of Gold, Silver, Brass, Iron, and veins of Sulphur. 8 Loxa, sixteen Leagues southwards of Cuenca, situate in the fift Degree of Southern Latitude, and in a sweet and pleasant Valley called Guxibamba, between two fine Riverets. The Citizens well furnished with Horse and Armour, but not otherwise wealthy. 9 Zamora, twenty Leagues on the East of Loxa; and 10 Jaen, 35 from that: both situate in the Province of Quachimayo, and both so called in reference to two Ci∣ties of those names in Spain: Then on the Sea coasts, there are, 11 Portus Votus (Pucrto Veio as the Spaniards call it) not far from the Sea-side, but in so ill an Air that it is not very much frequented. Said to be one of the first Towns of this Country possessed by the Spaniards, who digged up hereabouts the bones of a monstrous Giant; whose Cheek-teeth were four fingers broad. 12 Mantu the Port Town to Porto Ve••o, from whence the trade is driven betwixt Panuma and Peru; the town it self situ∣ate in a rich vein of Emeralds. 13 Guayaquill, or S. Jago de Guayaquil, called also Gulata; seated at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea, neer the influx of the River Guayaquil; a noted and much frequent∣ed Empory. 14 Castro, a Colonie of Spaniards planted, An. 1568 in that part of this Country which they call Provincia de los Esmeraldos, bordering on Popayan. 15 S. Michael, by the old Natives called Piura, the first Colony which the Spaniards planted in Peru, but otherwise of no estimation. 16 Payta, a small Town, but neighboured by the safest and most frequented Haven of all this Country; as guarded from the winde by the Cape of S. Helens on the North, and Punta Piurina on the South; two eminent Promontories. The Town burnt An. 1587. by Capt. Cavendish; Who at the same time also pillaged the Isle of Puna, the most noted Iland of this Tract, situate in the Bay of Tombez, as was said before. Fruitfull of all things necessary to the life of man; Parats for pleasure, Sarzaparilla for his health. The people in preceding times so stout and Warlike that they maintained a long War with those of Tombez, till in the end composed by the mediation of the King of Peru (to whom the King here∣of (for a King it had) became an Homager; as since their embracing of the Gospel, to the Kings of Spain.

2 LOS QVIXOS, lieth on the East of Quito, and the west of El Dorada, (one of the Cantreds of Guiana, so called from its abundance of Gold) but little different in the nature of the soil and people from the Province of Quito, but that this is somewhat the more barren, and less stored with those rich metals which the Spaniards come for. The People have also a distinct tongue of their own, though they both understand and speak the Peruvian language.

Chief Towns hereof, 1 Baeza, built in the year 1559. (which was within two years of the first discovery of this Region) by Giles Ramirez de Avila; 18 leagues from Quito towards the East: now the seat of the Governour. 2 Archidona, 20 leagues on the South-east of Baeza. 3 Avila, on the North of Archidona; so called with reference to Ramirez de Avila before mentioned, or to a Town of that name in Spain. 4 Sevilla del Oro, a Colonie of the Spaniards, as the others are.

On the East of this Province lieth the Cantred of Canelam, inhabited by a blockish and ignorant People, and destitute of all things necessary for the comforts of life. Most mercilesly tormented, and cast to dogs to be devoured, by Pizarro, because they could not shew him the readiest way to some richer Country then their own; this being the most barren Region of that part of Peru which they call La Sierra, or the Hill-Countries. More Eastwards yet in that part which they call the Andes, he the Cantreds of the Bracomori, commonly called Juan de Salinas, by the name of the first Discoverer of it: A Country not inferior unto many for the quantity of Gold, superior to any for the pureness of it. Chief Towns of which, 1 Valladolit, 2 Loiola, by the Natives called Cumbinama; 3 S. Jago de las Montannas (or S. James of the Mountains) all Spanish Colonies; and all of the foundation of John de Salinis a Loiola, once the Pro-Praefect of the Province, by whom first thorowly subdued to the Crown of Spain.

3 LIMA, called also LOSREYES, is bounded on the North with Quito▪ on the South with Charcas, on the West with Mare del Zur, on the East with Collao and the Province of Cusco. So named from Lima or Los Reyes, the chief City of it. Extended from the 6. to the 16. Degree of Southern Latitude: or measuring it from the Promontorie del Aguja North, to Arequipa on the South, it reacheth to 250 leagues. The soil of the same nature with that of Quito, but more distributed into Vallies, and better peopled.

Ilaces of most observation, 1 Miraslores in the valley of Zanu, 110 leagues on the North of Lima, and about five leagues distant from the Sea, on which it hath an Haven belonging to it, called Chencepen. The Town well seated, and inhabited by a wealthy people, made such by the abundance of Sugar canes in the neighbouring Valley. 2 Truxillo, in the rich and flourishing Valley of Chimo, on the banks of a small, but pleasant River, and about two leagues from the sea; where it hath a large, but unsafe Haven, which they call El Azzecife de Trugillo. The Town it self situate in the 7. Degree and 30 minutes of Southern Latitude: well built and rich, one of the principal of Peru; inhabited by 1500 Spaniards besides the Natives and beautified with four Convents of several Orders. 3 La Parilla, in the valley of the Santa, in which it standeth, and by which it is furnished with a safe and convenient Road for ship∣ing 20 leagues Southwards of Truxillo, and neighboured by rich Mines of silver not long since dis∣covered. 4 Arnedo, seated amongst Vineyards in the Valley of Chancay, ten leagues North of ••ima. 5 Lima, by the Spaniards called Cividad de los Reyes, or the City of Kings, situate in the Valley of Lima, the most fruitful part of all Peru, in the Latitude of twelve Degrees and an half. Built with much art, for all the chief streets answer to the Market-place; scarce any private house which hath not water conveyed into it from the River; environed round about with sweet fields, and most pleasant gardens. The founder of it Francisco Pizarro, who laid the first stone on Twelf day (which the Spaniards call the Feas•• of Kings) whence it had the name, An. 1553. A Town of greater wealth then bigness, the Riches of Peru passing yearly thorow it: well housed, whether we respect the private or publike edifices: the Cat••edral Church, made after the the model of that of Sevil; the Convents of Religious Orders, the Courts of Justice•• and the Palaces of the Archbishop and Vice-Roy, being all fair and goodly buildings; the Ca••hedral Church so well endowed, that the Revenues of the Archbishop do amount yearly to 30000 Ducats, besides what belongeth to the Canons and other Ministers. 6 Collao, the Haven town to Lima, from which two leagues distant: a Town of 600 families, for the most part Sea men; every house having some Cellar in it for the stowage of Wine, Tobacco, Cables, Pitch, &c. for the use of Mariners; besides those, publike ware-houses for the several commodities which pass from Lima ••ither, or from hence to Lima. Unfortified till the year 1579. when sacked and spoiled of infinite treasures by Sir Francis Drake; since that time strengthened by two Bulwarks, and a wall of earth, with 30 peace of Brass Ordnance planted on the works. 7 Pachacama in the Valley so called, but ••oar leagues on the South of Lima: memorable for a Temple, in which Pizarro found above 900000 Duca••s of gold and silver, not reckoning in those infinite treasures which the souldiers had laid hands on before his coming. 8 Guarco, a Colonie of 300 Spaniards, sixteen leagues on the South of Pacha∣cama; environed with the best fields for Wheat in all Peru. 9 Valverde, in a Valley of the same name, so called from the perpetual greenness of it; best furnished with Vines, and those affording the best wines of all this Country. A large Town, consisting of 500 Spaniards, besides women and children, and other inhabitants of the Country: well traded, considering its distance from the Sea, Puerto Que∣mado the Haven to it being six leagues off; and beautified with a fair Church, an Hospital, three Frieries, and the handsomest women of these parts. Distant from Lima 35 leagues. 10 Castro Verreyna, in the Valley of Chocol••cocha, 60 leagues from Lima, enriched with Mines of the purest Silver, digged out of a dry and ••ar••en hill, alwayes covered with snow, and standing in so sharp an air, that the Spanish

women will not be delivered in it, but are carried further off to be brought to bed. From hence, as I conjecture, comes that vein of Tobacco, which our Good-fellows celebrate by the name of the right Ver∣reinas. 11 Arequipa in the Valley of Quilca, 120 leagues from Lima, a pleasing and delightfull town; which situate at the foot of a flaming mountain, (from which in the year 1600 it received much harm) enjoyeth a fresh and temperate Air, and a soil alwayes flourishing. The silver of Plata and Potosi passeth thorow this town, and is shipped for Panama, at an Haven belonging to it, situate on the mouth of the River. Chile (upon which Arequipa standeth) but d••stant from the town about 14 leagues. 12 Caxa∣malca, more within the land, but more towards the North; heretofore beautified with a Royal Palace of the Kings of Peru; memorable for the imprisonment and murder of Atabilaba, or Athnalpa, the last King of this Country, vanquished not far off by Francisco Pizarro. 13 Cachapoyaro, in the Cantred so called the best inhabited of any one Cantred of those parts, supposed to contain in it 20000 of the Na∣tural Inhabitants which pay duties to the Kings of Spain; and so esteemed for beautiful women, that from hence the Kings were antiently furnished with their Concubines. 14 Leon de Gua••uco, (the ad∣dition given it from the Province in which it standeth) a Colonie of Spaniards, rich, sweet, and very Pleasantly seated: beautified heretofore with a most magnificent Palace of the Kings; as now with some Religious houses, a College of Jesuites, and the dwellings of many of the Nobility. Many other midland Towns there are, but of no great note, and therefore purposely passed over.

4 CVSCO comprehendeth, as the chief, all those several Provinces of the Hill Countries, and the Andes, which lie Southwards of the Province or Cantred of Guanaco. Blest with a sweet and tem∣perate Air, not over scalded with the Sun, nor dulled with the distempers of the Evening mists: the Country full of fresh Rivers, notable good pasturage and great herds of Cattel; well stored with Coca which is gathered here in some abundance, and most excellent Venison.

Places of most repute in it, 1 Bombon, in the same Latitude with Lima; neighboured by a Lake called Laguna de Chinca cocha, ten leagues in compass, begirt about with pleasant hils, and built upon with many rich and as pleasant villages; out of which runneth the River Marannon, one of the greatest of these parts, supposed by the Inhabitants to end his course in the Mare del Noort. 2 Parcos, once beauti∣fied with a Regal Palace, seated on the top of a little hill, and begirt about with craggie mountains. 3 Guamanga, by the Spaniards called S. Juan de la Vittoria, situate under the 13 Degree of Southern Latitude, on the banks of a fresh and pleasing stream: well built, the houses being all of stone, and tiled or slatted; three Churches, one of them a Cathedral, besides divers Convents. 4 Bilcar, sup∣posed to be built in the very Center of Peru; where still remain the ruines of a sumptuous Palace. 5 Guancabelica, a new Town, or but newly raised into esteem, supposed to contain at the present 2000 Spaniards, and double that number of the Natives. Increased since the year 1566. from a beggerly Village to this greatness, by the Mines of Quick-silver then discovered: Mines of such Riches, that the Kings part out of them amounteth yearly to above 40000 Pezoes, which is about 130000▪ l. of our English money. And yet this is not all the benefit he receives from them neither; that Mineral being found so necessary for the purifying and speedy extraction of their Gold, that it is not said without cause by the Chymists, that Quick-silver gives the matter to Gold, and Sulphur the form. 6 CVSCO, in the Latitude of 13 Degrees and 30 minutes, about 130 leagues on the East of Lima; and situate in a rugged and unequal soil, begirt with Mountains; but on both sides of a pleasant and commodi••us River. Once the seat-royal of the Ingas or Peruvian Kings; who the more to beautifie this City, commanded every one of his Nobility to build here a Palace for their continual abode: still of most credit in this Country, both for beauty and bigness, and the multitudes of Inhabitants; here being thought to dwell 3000 Spaniards, and 10000 of the Natives, besides women and children. The Palace of the Kings advanced on a losty mountain, was held to be a work of so great magnificence, built of such huge and massie stones, that the Spaniards thought it to have been the work rather of devils then of men. Now miserably defaced, most of the stones being tumbled down to build private houses in the City; some of the Churches raised also by the ruines of it, and amongst them perhaps both the Bishops Palace and Cathedral, whose annual Rents are estimated at 20000 Ducats. Yet did not this vast Building yield more lustre to the City or Cusco, then a spacious Market-place; the Center in which those high∣wayes did meet together, which the Ingas had caused to be made cross the Kingdom, both for length and breadth, with most incredible charge and pains, for the use of their Subjects. Of which more here∣after. 7 S. Francisco de la Vittoria, at the foot of the Andes, a Spanish Colonie, and about 20 leagues from Cusco. 8 S. Juan del Oro, in the Valley of Caravayan, neighboured with rich Mines of the purest Gold, whence it had the name; a Colonie of Spaniards also. Beyond the Andes lie some Countries much samed for wealth; the discovery whereof hath often been attempted by the Spaniards, sometimes with loss, not seldom with some hopes of a better fortune, but hitherto without success.

5 COLLAO lieth on the South of those Provinces which we have comprehended under the name of Cusco; having on the West the rest of Lima, on the South Los Charchos, on the East those un∣known Countries beyond the Andes. Shut up on the East and West by two mountainous Ridges; which keeping in one main body till they come beyond the City of Cusco, do there divide them∣selves, and grow wider and wider, not to meet again.

The Country plain and full of Rivers; well stored with rich pastures, and those pastures with great herds of Cattel: barren of Corn, and not well furnished with Maize; instead whereof they make their bread of a Root called Popa, dried in the sun and bruised to powder; of which the Spaniards make

great gain at the Mines of Potosi. Yet notwithstanding this great want, it is thought to be the most populous part of all Peru; the soundness and temperature of the Air (which is here very much com∣mended) as much conducing to the populositie of a Country as the richness and plenties of the Soyl. The people also of a clearer and more solid judgement then the rest of Peru: and so well skilled in the ob∣servations of the course of the Moon, that the Spaniards at their coming hither, found the year distin∣guished into Moneths, weeks, dayes; for each of which they had a proper and significant name. The famous Lake of Titicaca is within this Province.

Places of greatest note in it, 1 Chuquinga, naturally strong and almost inaccessible, invironed either with unfordable waters, or impassable Mountains: one Causey only leading to it, which for the space of three Leagues, is said to be capable but of one at once. 2 Ayavire, enobled with many fair and cost∣ly buildings; specially with Monuments of the dead which exceed the rest both in cost and number: for that cause by the Spaniards called Las Sepulturas. The Inhabitants of this Tract much wasted by the Civil Wars which the Spaniards had amongst themselves. 3 Hatuncolla the Metropolis or chief Town of this Province, as the name doth signifie: not far from which the famous River Caravaya, famous for the abundance of Gold in the sands thereof, hath its first original. 4 Chiquita, a Colony of the Spaniards, on the banks of the Lake of Titicaca; a Town of so great trade and riches, that the Governour hereof is named immediatly by the King; his place being estimated at the worth of 50000 Ducats yeerly. 5 Tiaguanaco, at the mouth or out-let of that Lake; supposed to be the most ancient Burrough of Peru: now most remarkable for the ruines of certain great and stupendious buildings, some of the stones whereof are said to be 30 foot long, fifteen foot in breadth, and six in thickness: not to be brought thither without the help of Iron Engines (which this People had not till of late) but by some strange Arts. 5 Dela Paz, or Nuestra Sennora de la Paz, by the Spaniards called also Pueblo Neuvo, and by the Natives Chiquiabo, according to the name of the Cantred in which it stand∣eth, is situate at the ••oot of a little Mountain, by which defended from the injuries of winde and wea∣ther; but over-looking a large plain of great fertility, well watered, and well wooded both for fruits and fewell. 7 Chilane, 8 Acos, 9 Pomata, 10 Cepita; and others of as little note.

6. LOS CHARCAS on the North is bounded with Lima, and Collao; on the South with Chile; on the West with Mare del Zur; on the East with some Countries not yet well discovered, interposed betwixt it and the Province of Rio de la Plata. This also called by the name of Plata, according to the name of the chief City of it.

The Country extended in length from North to South, but 300 Leagues; but measuring by the Sea∣shores, above 400. Not very rich in corn or cattel, though in many places furnished with good Pasture∣grounds; but for the inexhaustible Mines of Gold and Silver, not to be equalled in Peru. Of these the principal those of Porco and Potosi, but these last the chief: out of which comes that mass of Silver, which yieldeth the King so much profit yeerly, as before was mentioned. The Mine 200 Fathoms deep, to which they do descend by Ladders made of raw Hides, 800 steps: some of the workmen not see∣ing the Sun many moneths together; many fall down with their loads of silver on their backs, pulling others after them; and many dying in the Works for want of Air. For the refining of this Silver there are 52 Engines or Silver Mills upon a River neer unto it; 22 more in the Valley of Tarapia not far off, besides many which they turn with horses. The Poets words never more literally verified then in these deep Mines; where speaking of the Iron-Age, he describes it thus;

Nectantum segetes, alimentaque debita dives Poscebatur humus; sed itum est in viscera terra; Quasque recondiderat, Stygiisque admoverat umbris, Fffodiuntur opes, irritamenta malorum.

Which I finde thus rendred by George Sundys.

Nor with rich Earths just nourishments content, For treasure they her secret entrails rent. That powerfull evil, which all power invades, By her well hid, and wrapt in Stygian shades.

Places of most importance in it, 1 Plata, so called from the rich Mines of Silver, found in Mount Porco neer adjoyning, well emptied by the ancient Ingas, but searched into again by Francisco Pizarro, who (it is thought) might have raised hence 200000 Ducats of yeerly income, if hopes of greater at Potosi had not took him off. The town commodiously seated in a fruitfull soil, in the 19th. Degreee of Latitude, and 180 Leagues distant from the City of Cusco; honoured with the seat of the Gover∣nour, and the Courts of Justice; and beautified (besides many Religious houses) with a fair Cathedral; the See of the best endowed Bishoprick of all Peru; his Revenues being estimated at 80000 Ducats of yeerly Rents. By the Natives it is called Chuquisacay. 2 Oropesa, twenty Leagues from Plata, built by Don Francis de Toledo, when Vice-Roy here, in the rich and pleasant Valley called Cochabamba, An, 1565. 3 Potosi, neighboured by those wealthy Mines already mentioned. Discovered first in the year 1545▪ before which time this Town was but a sorry Village; now the best peopled and frequented in all the Province; said to be constantly inhabited by four or five thousand Spaniards, many more of the

Natives; not so few as 30000 Workmen appertaining to it, but lodged in the Villages adjoyning: besides the infinite resort of Merchants in pursuit of profit, and idle Gallants who come hither for their Lusts and Pleasures. Situate in the 21 degree and 40 Minutes of Southern Latitude, in a cold and very barren soil; yet plentifully furnished with all commodities, both for necessity and delight. For as the money is, so the Market always. 4 Misque, a small Town, but one which furnisheth Potosia, with good plenty of wine, as 5 Lagunilla, and 6 Tarixa, do with VVheat, Maize, Sugar, and choice of fruits. 7 Arica, the most noted Haven of this Country, in the Latitude of 19 Degrees, and 80 Leagues or thereabouts from the Mines of Potosia; the wealth whereof brought hither on the backs of their sheep, is here shipped for Lima; the truth hereof experienced by Sir Francis Drake, who seized here on three Spanish Ships, in one of which was 57 Bars of silver, each of them twenty pound weight apiece. Few other Towns, if any, upon all this coast, which is altogether Rockie, barren, and unfit for habitation; accordingly but little peopled, or not at all.

Come we now to the Peruvian story, which we shall sum up with as much brevity as we can: The People generally governed by the Chief of their Tribes, as in all Countries else where neither the Arms of Forreiners, nor the ambition of some few of the Natives, had not diminished any thing of those Natural Rights. Not subject to any one Supream till these latter times; the Ingas, or Monarchs of Peru growing unto their greatness but a little before their Fall. Their Territory at the first so small that it was not above five or six Leagues in compass; situate in that part of the Country where the City of Cusco now standeth. Opposed at their first incroachments by the Cannares, a valiant Nation, and likely to have had the better, if the Ingas had not helped themselves by a piece of wit: giving it out, that their Family had not only been the Seminary from which mankinde came; but the Authors of that Religion also which was then in use; particularly that the whole world having been destroyed by a Flood, except only seven (so far they hit upon the truth) which seven had hid themselves in a Cave cal∣led Paticambo; where having lived in safety till the fury of the waters had been asswaged, they came a∣broad at last and re-peopled the Country; that Viracocha the Creator, and great God of Nature had appeared to one of them, and taught him how, and with what rites he would be worshipped; which rites were afterwards received over all Peru. And finally that the same Viracocha had appeared lately to the chief of their Family; assuring him that he would aid him with invisible forces against all their enemies. This tale soon gained belief amongst those Barbarians; and that belief drew many to take part with the Ingas, by that aid victorious. This is supposed to have hapned 400 years before the Spaniards put an end to this flourishing Kingdom, which was in the year 1533. VVithin which time they had brought all this Country which we now call Peru, and many of the adjoyning Provinces under their Dominion. Their Kings were called Ingas, as the Aegyptians Pharaoh, the Tartars Cham; the word Inga signifying an Em∣perour, as Capa Ingas (by which they also sometimes called them) the only Emperours. Much reverenced by their Subjects and so faithfully served, that never any of their Subjects were found guilty of Treason. Nor wanted they good arts whereby to indeer their Subjects, and keep them out of leisure to soment new factions. The way of indeerment, by the fair and satisfactory distribution of the spoils gotten in the wars, whether Lands or Goods: all which they divided into three parts: allotting the first unto the service of the Gods; the second for the maintenance of the King, his Court, and Nobles; the third to the re∣lief of the common people. A distribution far more equal then that of Lycurgus, or the Lex Agraria of the Romans. But when there was no cause of wars, they kept the people busted in their Works of Mag∣nificence as building Palaces in every one of the Conquered Provinces, which served not only as Forts to assure the Conquest, but were employed as Store-houses to lay up Provisions, distributed amongst the people in times of dearth. But that which was the work as of great trouble, so of chiefest use, was the cross-wayes they made over all the Country, the one upon the Mountains, and the other on the Plains, extending 500 Leagues in length: a work to be preferred before any both of Rome and Aegypt. For they were forced to raise the ground in many places to the heighth of the Mountai••••, and lay the Moun∣tains level with the flattest Plains; to cut thorow some Rocks, and underprop others that were ruinous; to make even such wayes as were uneasie, and support the Precipices: and in the Plains to vanquish so many difficulties, as the uncertain foundation of a sandy Country must needs carry with it. Kept to these tasks, the people had no leisure to think of practises: yet well content to undergo them, in regard they saw it tended to the Publike Benefit. And for the Caciques (so they call the Nobility) the Inga did not only command them to reside in Cusco, to be assured of their persons: but caused them to send their Children to be brought up there; that they might serve as Hostages for the Fathers Lovalty. They or∣dered also that all such as repaired to Cusco the Imperial City, should be attired according to his own Country fashion; so to prevent those Leagues and Associations, which otherwise without any note or observation might be made amongst them. Many such Politike Institutions were by them devised, which had little of the Barbarous in them, and clearly shewed that there were other Nations which had Eyes in their Heads besides those of China. What else concerns the storie of them, offereth it self in the fol∣lowing Catalogue of

The Kings of Peru.

1. Manga-Capac, descended of the chief of the first seven Families, the first who laid the foundation of this puissant Monarchie; subdued the Cannares, and built the City of Cusco.

2. Sinchi-Rocha, eldest son of Mango, subdued a great part of Collao, as far as Chancara.

3. Loque-Yupanqui; the son of Sinchi, conquered Chiquito, Ayavire, the Canus, and the Inhabitants about Titicaca, the first advancer of the service of Viracocha, from whom he did pretend to have many visits.

4. Mayta-Capac, the son of Yupanqui, subdued all the rest of Collao, the Province of Chuquiapa, and a great part of the Charcas.

5. Capac Yupanqui, or Yupanqui II. the son of Mayta, enlarged his Kingdom West∣ward unto Mare del Zur.

6. Rocha II. or Yncha Rocha, eldest son of Yupanqui the second, enlarged his King∣dome towards the North, by the conquest of the great Province of Antabuyallam, and many others.

7. Jahuar-Huacac, son of Rocha the second, added to his Estates (by the valour of his bro∣ther Mayta) all the Southern parts from Arequipa to Tacaman. Deposed by the practise of his son.

8. Viracocha, the son of Huacac, having setled and inlarged his Empire; raised many great and stately works, and amongst others many Aquaeducts, of great use but charge. For fear of him, Hancohualla, King of the Chuncas, with many thousands of his People forsook their Country.

9. Pachacutec-Ynca, son of Virachoca, improved his Kingdom by the conquest of many Provinces lying towards the Andes, and South-Sea; with that of Caxamalcu Northwards.

10. Yupanqui III. or Yncha Yupanchi, son of Pachacutec, subdued the Conches, and Moxes, with some part of Chile.

11. Yupanqui IV. or Tapac Ynca Yupanchi, son of Yupanqui the third, extended his Dominions as far as Quito.

12. Huayna Capac, or Guaynacapac, son of Yupanqui the fourth, the most mighty Mo∣narch of Peru, conquered the whole Province of Quito; and is supposed to be the founder of those two great Roads spoken of before.

13. Huascar, or Guascar Ynca, the eldest son of Guaynacapa, after a reign of five years deposed and slain by his Brother.

14. Athualpa, or Atubaliba, the third son Guaynacapa, by the daughter and heir of the King of Quito: into which Kingdom he succeeded by the will of his Father. Commanded by his Brother to do Homage for the Kingdom of Quito, he came upon him with such power, that he overcame him, and so gained the Kingdom. Vanquished afterwards by Pizarro at the battle of Caxamalca, he was taken Prisoner. And though he gave in ransome for his life and li∣berty, an house piled up on all sides with Gold and Silver, valued (as some say) at ten millions of Crowns; yet they per fidiously slew him.

15. Mango-Capac II. the second son of Guaynacapac, 1533 substituted by Pizarro in his ••rothers Throne; after many vicissitudes of Fortune, was at last slain in the City of Cusco; and so the Kingdom of the Ingas began and ended in a Prince of the same name; as it had hap∣ned formerly to some other Estates.

Let us next look ••pon the birth and fortune of that Pizarro, who subdued this most potent and slou∣rishing Kingdom, and made it a member of the Spanish Empire; and we shall find that he was born at Trusiglio, a village of Navarr; and by the poor whore his mother, laid in the Church-porch and so left to Gods providence: by whose direction (there being none found that would give him the breast) he was nourished for certain daies, by sucking a Sow. At last, one Gonsalles, a souldier, acknowledged him for his son, put him to nurse, and when he was somewhat grown, set him to keep his Swine: some of which being strayed, the boy durst not for fear return home, but betook himself to his heels, ran unto Sevil, and there shipped himself for America; where he attended Alfonso de Dioda in the discovery of the Countries beyond the Golf of Vraba; Balboa in his voyage to the South Sea; and Pedro de Avila in the conquest of Panama. Grown rich by these Adventures, he associated himself with Diego de Al∣magro, and Fernando Luques a rich Priest: who betwixt them raised 220 souldiers, and in the year 1525▪ went to seck their Fortunes on those Southern Seas, which Balboa had before discovered. After divers repulses at his landing, and some hardship which he had endured, Pizarro at the length took some of the Inhabitants of Peru of whom he learnt the wealth of the Country; and returning thereupon to Spain, obtained the Kings Commission for the conquest of it; excluding his Companions out of the Pa∣tent, but taking in Almagro of his own accord. Thus furnished he landeth in Peru again, at such time as the wars grew hot betwixt the two Brethren for the Kingdom; and taking part with the faction of Guas••ar, marched against Atubaliba; whom he met with in the Plains of Caxamalca, but rather pre∣pared for a parley, then to fight a Battel. Pizarro taking this advantage, picked a quarrel with him, and suddenly charged upon him with his Horse and Ordnance, shying his Guard without resistance; and coming near the Kings person (who was then carryed on mens shoulders) pulled him down by the

Clothes, and took him Prisoner. With him they took as much Gold as amounted to 80000 Castellans; and as much Silver as amounted to 7000 Marks (every Mark weighing eight ounces) of his houshold Pla••e; and in the spoil of Caxamalca, almost infinite riches. This, with the Kings ransom, came to so great a summe, that besides the fift part which Pizarro sent to the Emperour, and that which Pizarro and his Brethren kept unto themselves; every Footman had 7200 Ducats, and every Horseman twice as much, for their part of the spoyl; besides what they had gotten in the way of plunder. How they dealt after∣wards with the miserable King, their Prisoner, hath been shewn already. Upon which Act, though they put many fair pretences; yet God declared that he was not pleased with their proceedings; few of the greatest undertakers going to the Grave in peace. For though Pizarro in reward of so great a ser∣vice was made the first Viceroy of Peru, and created Marquess of Anatilla; yet having put to death Almagro, his chief companion, who had raised a strong faction in that State; he was after slain at Lima, by some of that faction, in revenge of the death of their Commander. The like unfortunate end befell all the rest; his brother John slain by the Peruvians, Martin, in Lima with himself; Ferdinando secret∣ly made away in prison; and finally Gonsales the fourth Brother (with the son of Almagro) severally executed for their ••reasons and Insurrections which they had acted in this Country against their King. So little joy doth wealth ill-gotten bring along with it, to the owners thereof. And here I am to leave Pizarro, whose strange both fortunes and misfortunes in the course of his life, are to be paralelled only with the like of Sinan, a great Bassa in the Court of Selimus the first; who being born of base paren∣tage, as he being a child was sleeping in the shade, had his genitals bitten off by a Sow. The Turkish Offi∣cers which usually provided yong boyes for the service of the Grand Signieur, being in Epyrus (for that was Sinans Country) and hearing of this so extraordinary an Eunuch; took him among others, along with them to the Court; where under Mahomet the great, Bajazet the second, and his son Selimus, he so exceedingly thrived, that he was made the chief Bassa of the Court; and so well deserved it, that he was accounted Selimus right hand, and was indeed the man, to whose valour especially, the Turks owe their Kingdom of Aegypt; in which Kingdom, then not fully setled, he was also slain.

But to return unto Peru, no question but the Forces and Revenues of it were exceeding great. For though we find no particular musters which they made of their men; or what great Armies they drew with them into the Field; yet by their great successes, and many victories, we may conclude them to be masters of great Bands of men, and skilful in the Arts of conduct. Nor can we otherwise conjecture at the greatness of their yearly income, but by the greatness of their treasure; so infinite and almost in∣credible, that all the Vessels of the Kings house, his Table, and kitchin were of Gold and Silver; Statues of Giants in his Wardrope, together with the resemblances in proportion and bigness, of all the Beasts, Birds, Trees, Plants, and Fishes, which were found in that Kingdom, of the purest Gold; Ropes, Budgets, Troughs, Chests, all of Gold or Silver; Billets of Gold piled up together, as if they had been Billets of Wood cut out for the fire, three houses full of pieces of Gold, and five full of Silver. All which, be∣sides infinite other treasures, fell into the hands of a few poor Spaniards: who grew so wanton hereup∣on, that they would give 1500 Crowns for an horse, 60 Crowns for a small Vessel of Wine, and forty for a pair of Shooes: Consuming all upon their Lusts, and sacrificing their Gods of Gold to their God the Belly.

OF CHILE.

HILE is bounded on the North with the Desart of Alacama 90 Leagues in length, in∣terposed betwixt it and Peru: on the West with Mare del Zur: on the South with the Streits of Magellan; and on the East as far as to Rio de la Plata, with the main At∣lantick; the Countries lying on the East betwixt it and Paragnay, not yet well disco∣vered.

This Country lyeth wholly beyond the Tropick of Capricorn, by consequence in the temperate Zone: extended in length from the borders of Peru, to the mouth of the Streits, 500 Leagues, but the breadth variable and uncertain. Called Chile from the word Chil (which in more tongues then ours doth signifie as much as cold) from the extream coldness of the Aire and Clime; so vehe∣ment here in our Summer Solstice, that many times both the Horses and the Riders are frozen to death, and hardned like a piece of Marble.

The soil hereof in the midland parts Mountainous and unfruitfull; towards the Sea-side, levell, fer∣tile, and watered with divers Rivers flowing from the Mountains: productive of Maize, Wheat, and most excellent pasturage; plenty of Gold and Silver, abundance of Honey, store of Cattel, and Wine enough for the use of the people; the Vines brought hither out of Spain prospering here exceedingly; as do also all the Fruits and Plants which are sent from hence into this Country. The people very tall and warlike, some of them of a Gigantine stature, affirmed (but I believe it not) to be eleven foot high; yet well conditioned with this greatness, where not much provoked. Their garments of the skins of Beasts, their Arms Bow and Arrows: white of complexion, but as hirsute and shaggie-haired, as the rest of the Salvages.

Rivers of note there are not any but what will fall within the view of its several Provinces: Divided commonly into 1 Chile, specially so called, and 2 Magellanica.

1. CHILE specially so called, is bounded on the North with the Desart of Alacama; on the South with Magellanica; on the West with Mare del Zur; and on the East with some unknown Countries, lying betwixt it and Paragnay, or the Province of Rio de la Plata, not above 20 Leagues in breadth, but in length 300. The reason of the name, together with the nature of the soyl and people, we have seen before.

Principal Rivers of this part, 1 Rio de Copayapo▪ giving name unto a Promontorie near the influx of it, in the Northern borders of this Province. 2 Rio de Coquimbo, 3 La Ligua, 4 Topocalma, 5 Cacapool, 6 Canten; all falling into Mare del Zur; and besides these, a nameless, but more famous River, which in the day time runneth with a violent current, and in the night hath no water at all. The reason of it is, because this River having no constant Fountain, is both begun and continued by the Snow falling from the Mountains; which in the heat of the day melted into water, is precipitately carryed into the Sea; but congealed in the coldness of the night, yields no water at all, whereby the Channel becometh empty.

Places of most observation in it, 1 Gopiapo, giving name to a fertile Valley, in the most Northern tract hereof; and neighboured by a small but commodious Haven. 2 Serena, a Colonie of the Spa∣niards, on the Sea-side, not far from the influx of Rio de Coquimbo, on whose banks it is seated; where built by Baldivia the Conquerour and first Governour of this Province, An. 1544. The territory round about it rich in Mines of Gold: the Town it self of 200 houses, but so well peopled, that at the landing of some of the English under Captain Drake, they presently sent out 300 Horse and 200 Foot to com∣pell them back unto their ships, which they did accordingly. 3 S. Jago, the chief of all this Province, (though not above 80 houses in it) because the Residence of the Governour, and the Courts of Justice; adorned with a Cathedral Church, and some Convents of Dominican and Franciscan Priers; situate in the 34 Degree of Southern Latitude, on the banks of the River Topacalma; at the mouth whereof is the Haven of Val paraiso, the best and most noted of this Country; out of which the English under Drake took a Spanish ship, and therein 25000 Pezos of the purest Gold, besides other Commodities. 4 Conception, 70 Leagues on the South of S. Jago, situate on the shores of a large and capacious Bay (by the Natives called Penco) by which and the mountains on all sides so strongly fenced, that the Gover∣nour when distressed by the Savages (as sometimes they are) retireth hither for his safety. Well forti∣fied in such places as are accessible, and garrisoned with 500 souldiers, besides the Townsmen. Opposite hereunto lyeth the Isle of S. Marie, so near the shore, that it seems to have been rent from it by the force of the Sea; fruitful, and very well provided of Swine and Poultrie, but the people so in fear of the Spa∣niards dwelling in Conception, that they dare not kill or eat either, but by leave from them. 5 Auracona (so I think they call it) a strong Fortress in the Country of the Auracans, the most potent Nation of these parts, who weary of the Spanish yoke, revolted against Baldivia, overcame him in a set fight, and at last killed him: this piece being thereupon forsaken, & of no more use. 6 De los Confines, built by Baldivia in the borders of the Country of those Auracans, to serve for a defence to the Mines of Ongol near ad∣joyning:

distant from the Sea shores about 18 Leagues, enlarged by Garsias de Mendoza, and by him called Villa Neuva de los infantes. 7 Imperiale, in the 38 Degree and 40 Minutes of Southern Latitude, situate on the banks of the River Cauten, an Episcopal See, and the best Fortress of the Spaniards in all this Province. Fortified and made a Colonie of Spaniards in the year 1551 and by Baldivia called Al Impertale, because they found an Eagle with two heads made in wood, on the doors of their houses; a monument perhaps of some Germans, who had here been shipwrackt. A Town of so great wealth and power before known to the Spaniards, that in a war betwixt them and the Araucans, spoken of before, they are said to have brought upto the field 300000 men. 8 Villa Rica, another Colonie of Spaniards, 16 Leagues on the South-east of Imperiale, and 25 Leagues from the shores of Mare del Zur. 9 Baldivia, the most noted Town of all these parts, situate in the Valley of Guadallanguen, in the Latitude of 40 Degrees or thereabouts: adorned with a safe and capacious Haven, and neighboured by Mines of Gold of such infinite riches, that Baldivia (by whom built for defence of those Mines) received thence daily by the labour of each single workman, 25000 Crowns a man, and sometimes more. Sacked by the Savages An. 1599. since repaired by the Spaniards. 10 Osorno, on the Banks of the Bay of Chilve, (or Ancud, as the Savages call it) situate in a barren soyl, but well stored with Gold, and thought to be more populous then Valdivia it self. 11 Castro, the most Southern Town of all this Province, in the La∣titude of 44. built in a large and fruitful Iland of the Bay of Ancud, said to be 50 Leagues in length, but the breadth unequal; in some parts nine, in others not above two Leagues. 12 S. Juan de la Frontera, on the further side of the Andes, towards Paraguay, or Rio de la Plata.

To this Province there belong also certain Ilands lying on the coasts and shores hereof. 1 S. Marie's, spoken of before. 2 Mocha, upon the South of that, five Leagues from the Continent, fruitful of grain, and very good pasturage; sufficient to maintain the Inhabitants of it, who being the descendants of those Americans who fled hither to avoid the tyranny of the Spaniards, hitherto have made good their liberty against that Nation: of which so jealous, that they would not suffer the English under Drake and Cavendish to land amongst them, for fear they had been Spaniards, or some friends of theirs 3 Castro, which we have spoken of already.

2. MAGELLANICA is bounded on the North with Chile, and the Province of Rio de la Plata; on the South with Fretum Magellanicum, or the Streits of Magelian; on the West with Mare del Zur; on the East with Mare del Noort, or the main Atlantick. So called from Magellanus, by whom first discovered; of whom we shall speak more hereafter.

It is in length from the borders of Chile to the mouth of the Streits, 300 Leagues: in breadth from one Sea to the other, where broadest, above 400 Leagues; in some but 90 only, and in others less, ac∣cording as it draweth towards the point of the Pyramis. The inland parts of the Country not yet dis∣covered: those on the Sea side observed to be rockie and unfruitful, exposed for the most part of the year to such bitter colds, that the Snow lyeth alwaies on the Mountains. The people said to be tall of stature, and some of them of a Gigantine bigness, reported to be ten or eleven foot high; and by the Spaniards for that reason are called Patagons. Both great and less, sufficiently rude and barbarous, quite naked, and unfurnished of any houses, notwithstanding the rigour of the cold.

No Houses doth imply no Towns, and therefore we must look for none, in so rude a Country, as hath not hitherto conversed with more civil Nations. So that the most that we can do, is to coast the shores, and see what names of Ports or Promontories we can find therein. And first upon the Sea coasts towards Mare del Zur, they place (beginning at the North, and so descending) 1 The Promontorie called Cabo de las Islas. 2 The Port or Haven of S. Stephen. 3 The Valley of Nuestra Sennora, or our Ladies Valley. 4 The Promontorie called Punta Delgado. 5 Porto de los Reyes. 6 Ancon Sinsalida, on the banks of a semi-circular Bay, the receptacle of many Rivers, and not a few Ilands. 7 Cabo de la Victoria, or the Cape of Victorie, situate betwixt that Bay and the mouth of the Streits, so called from the name of the Ship in which some of Magellanes souldiers did first compass the world. For Ferdinand Magellano a no∣ble Portugal, and well skilled in Navigation, at the perswasion or command of Charles the fifth, to whom (upon some discontents received in the Court of Emanuel King of Portugal) he had made offer of his service, undertook the finding out (if possible) a shorter cut to the Moluccos, then discovered formerly. In the year 1520 he began his voyage, and keeping on the coast to the South of Rio de la Plata, about the end of October, fel upon the Cape of Virgins, at the very entrance of this Streit, which on the doubling of this Cape he was fallen upon; and by the end of November (not before) was fully clear of these narrow Seas, since called Fretum Magellanicum, and entred into Mare del Zur. Afterwards passing the Moluccos, he was killed in a fight against the Ilanders of S. Matthew, a little Iland not far off, but more near the Pilippins; which notwithstanding the ship called Victoria, returned to Spain in safety, and brought the welcome news of their good success.

We use to say that Sir Francis Drake was the first that sayled round about the world, which may be true in a mitigated senses viz. that he was the first Captain, or man of note that atchieved this enter∣prise, Magellanus perishing in the midst of it; and therefore is reported to have given for his device, a Globe, with this motto, Tu primus circumdedisti me. This navigation was begun, An. 1577, and in two years and an half with great vicissitude of fortune, finished; concerning which his famous voyage, a Poet then living, directed to him this Epigram.

Drake pererrati novit quem terminus orbis, Quem{que}, simul mundi vidit uter{que} polus: Sitaceant homines, facient te sydera notum; Sol nescit comitis non memor esse sui.

Drake, whom th'encompass'd earth so fully knew, And whom at once both poles of heaven did view: Should men forget thee, Sol could not forbear To chronicle his fellow travailer.

This Fretum Magellanicum, these Magellan straits, are in the 52 degree; and are by M. John Davis, who professeth to know every Creek in them, thus described. “For 14 Leagues within the Cape of S. Marie, lyeth the first strait, where it ebbeth and floweth with a violent swiftness: the strait not be∣ing fully half a mile broad, and the first fall into it very dangerous and doubtful. Three leagues this strait continueth, when it openeth into a sea, eight miles long, and as much broad; beyond which, ly∣eth the second strait, right West, South-west from the first; a perilous and unpleasing passage, three leagues long, and a mile in breadth. This strait openeth it self into another sea, which is extended even to the Cape of victory; where is the strait properly called the strait of Magellane; a place of that na∣ture, that which way soever a man bend his course, he shall be sure to have the wind against him. The length hereof is 40 leagues; the breadth in some places two leagues over, in others not fully half a mile. The Channel in depth 200 Fathoms, so no hope of Anchorage; the course of the water full of turnings and changings; withal so violent, that when a ship is once entred, there is no returning. On both sides of it are high Mountains continually covered with snow; from which proceed those counter∣winds, which beat with equal fury on all parts thereof. A place assuredly not pleasing to view, and ve∣ry hazardous to pass. So far, and to this purpose M. Davis.

But to proceed, the way thus opened, was travelled not long after, An. 1525. by Garsias de Loyasa; next in the year 1534, by Simon de Alcazavo, and four years after by three ships of the Bishop of Pla∣cenza in Spain; but none of them had the hap or courage to adventure thorow; till undertaken and per∣formed by Sir Francis Drake, An. 1577▪ after which it grew more familiar amongst the seamen; How∣soever, we are so much debtors to the attempts of others, as that we owe to them the most part of the names of those Bayes and Promontories, which they discovered in the search: though many of them since new named by the English and Hollanders. Those of most note, proceeding from Cabo de la Victo∣ria, 1 Cabo de Quade. 2 Cape Gallant 3 Cordes Bay. 4 Cape Froward, being the very point or Conus of this great Pyramis. 5 Porto Famine. 6 •• little Isle called Elizabeths I••and; and at the exit of the strait into Mare del Noort, the Cape of Virgins. Then bending Northward toward the great River of Plata, we find upon the main Ocean 1 Rio de la Crux, neighboured by a Promontorie called Cabo de las Bareras; where Magellano staid all September, and the greatest part of October, in expectation of an opportunity to discover further. 2 The Bay of S. Julian, out of which he set sayl for this adventure, about the later end of August, leaving there two of his companions condemned of mutinie. 3 The Port of Desire. 4 A large Promontorie called the Cape of S. George. 5 The outlets of a fair River, named Rio de los Camerones. 6 A goodly Haven entituled Puerto de los Leones. 7 The Cape called Punta de ter∣ra plana. 8 The Bay of Amegada. 9 The Promontorie called the Cape of S. Andrews. And 10 the Ri∣ver of S. Anne, beyond which lyeth the Province of the River. This is the most that I can say touching Magellanica, as to the Havens, Rivers, Points and Promontories; and this is nothing (as we see) but a Nomenclator. It must be better peopled and more discovered, before it can afford discourse of more variety. All we can adde, is that the passage back again from Mare del Zur to the Atlantick, hath not been found so safe and easie, as from the main Atlantick unto Mare del Zur. Attempted first by Ladril∣liro a Spaniard, at the command of Garcia de Mendoza, Governour of Chile; and attempted only: performed not long after the voyage of Sir Francis Drake, by D. Pedro Sarmiento, imployed therein by Francis de Toledo, Viceroy of Peru, with much difficulty, and no less danger; so much, that few have since endeavoured to return that way.

As for the fortunes & affairs of the Province of Chile, to which we have made this an Appendix, we are to understand that it was first discovered by Almagro de Alvarado, one of Pizarro's chief friends and as∣sociates. But he having other designs in his head about Peru, which he intended for himself, and to out Pi∣zarro, did discover it only: the conquest of it being reserved for Baldivia, whom Pizarro on the setling of his affairs by the death of Almagro, had imployed in that action. He going souldierlike to work, not on∣ly did subdue the people; but as he gained ground, built some Fortress, or planted Colonies of Spani∣ards in convenient places. This done about the year 1544. his ill luck was to meet with a more stubborn and untractable people, then either Cortez or Pizarro had done before him; who quickly weary of the yoke, besieged one of his Forts, encountred Baldivia himself coming with too small a power to relieve his people, vanquished and slew him in the field. Some adde that they poured Gold into his throat (as the Parthians are reported to have done to Crassus) bidding him satiate himself with that which he so much thirsted. After this blow given in the year 1551▪ the Savages recovered the rich vallies of Au∣ranco, Tucapel, and Purene; which they keep from them till this day: The Towns of Los Confines, and Villa Rica, both on the borders of those Vallies, then deserted also. Nor staid they there, though they took time to breathe a little. For in the year 1599 (having provided themselves of 200 Corslets, and

seventy Muskets) they brake out again; surprised and sacked the Town of Baldivia; forced Imperiale, after a whole years siege to surrender without any conditions; and in the year 1604. took Osorno by famine. Of thirteen Cities which the Spaniards had possessed amongst them; they had taken nine; some of them since recovered, but the most demolished. As ill it thrived with them in Magellanica, where Pedro de Starmiento undertook the planting of two Colonies to command those Streits, An. 1584. The one he setled near the mouth of the Streit, which he called by the name of Nombre de Jesus, and left therein 150 of his men; the other he intended on the narrowest place of the Streit, to be called Cividad del Roy Philip, which he resolved to fortifie, and plant with Ordnance. But winter coming on, he left there others of his men, promising to relieve them shortly with all things necessary. But such was his un∣happy face, that after many shipwracks and disappointments which befell unto him in the pursuit of his design; he was at last taken by the English, under the command of Sir Walter Rawleigh, who was there in person: and his two Colonies for want of timely succours, either starved at home, or eaten by the Savages as they ranged the Country.

OF PARAGVAY.

PARAGVAY is bounded on the South with Magellanica; on the East with the main Atlantick; on the North with Brasil; on the West with some unknown Countries betwixt it and Chile. So called from the River Paraguay (one of the greatest of the world) which runneth thorow it: the River and the Province both by the Spa∣niards called Rio de la Plata, from the great store of Silver they expected from it.

The Country (for so much as hath been discovered) is said to be of a fruitfull soil; capable of Wheat and other fruits of the Fruits of Europe, which thrive here exceedingly; nor do the Cattell increase less which were brought from Spain, both Kine and Horses multiplying in a won∣derfull manner. Well stored with Sugar Canes; and not unfurnished with Mines both of Brass and Iron; some veins of Gold and Silver, and great plenty of Amethystis. Of Stags great plenty▪ and of Monkeys almost infinite numbers; not to say any thing of Lyons, Tigers, and such hurtfull Creatures, which a few would be thought too many. Of the People there is nothing said, but what hath been before observed of the other Savages.

Chief Rivers of it, 1 De la Plata, whose course we have described already. 2 Rio de Buenos Ayres so called from the chief Town by which it runneth. 3 Zarcaranna, which riseth in the Country of the Diaguitas, and falling into a Lake at the end of his course, doth from thence pass into the body of De la Plata. 4 Estero, which rising in the Valley of Chalcaqui, and passing thorow two great Lakes, meets with 5 the Bermeio, and both together fall into De la Plata neer the Town of S. Foy. 6 Pilcomayo, which hath its Fountain neer the Mines of Potosi, in the Province of Charcos; but his fall in the same River with those before. Then on the North side of that River, there is 7 that of S. Saviour, or S. Sal∣vador, as the Spaniards call it; 8 Rio Nigro, or the Black River, of a longer course; but buried in the end, as the other is in the Deep•• of La Plata. 9 Yquaan, and 10 several others, whose united streams make the great River Parana, the second River of esteem in all this Country: But swallowed in that of Plata. Besides these 11 Rio de S Martin, and 12 Rio Grande falling into the Ocean.

It comprehendeth the three Provinces of 1 Rio de la Plata, 2 Tucaman, and 3 La Crux de Sierra. The rest not conquered by the Spaniard, of not well discovered, cannot be properly reduced under any Method.

1. RIO DE LA PLATA, or the Province of De la Plata, lieth upon both sides of that River; ascending many Leagues up the water, but not extended much upon either side. The reason of the name, the quality of the soil and people, we have seen before.

Chief Towns hereof 1 Buenos Ayres, or Neustra Sennora de Buenos Ayres, by others called Cividad de La Trinidad, seated on the Southern bank of the River of Plata, where built by Pedro de Mendoza, An. 1535. Deserted by the Inhabitants, and again new-Peopled by Cabesa de Vacca, An. 1542. It was afterwards again abandoned: and finally in the year 1582 re-edified and planted with a new Colony. Si∣tuate on the rising of a little hill, in the 34 Degree and 45 Minutes of Southern Latitude, and about 64 Leagues from the Mouth of the River; fortified with a mud Wall, and a little Castle, with some pieces of Ordnance; yet neither large, nor much frequented, containing but 200 Inhabitants. 2 S. Fe, or S Fidei, 50 Leagues up the River from Buenos Ayres, on the same side of the water neer the confluence of it with the River Estero: of the same bigness as the other, but somewhat richer: the People here being given to clo∣thing, which Manufacture they exchange with the Brasilians for Sugar, Rice & other necessary Commo∣dities. 3 Neustra Sennora del Assumption, but commonly Assumption only, higher up the River, from the mouth whereof 300 Leagues distant: situate in the Latitude of 25. and almost in the midst betwixt Peru, and Brasil; well built and very well frequented, as the chief of the whole Country. Inhabited by three sorts of men, first natural Spaniards, of which here are accomp••ed 400 Families; 2. The Mestizos, begotten by the Spaniard upon the Natives; and 3 Mulatos born of the Spaniards and the Negroes; of which two last here are thought to be many thousands. Not far off is a great Lake called Ytupuam, in the midst whereof an huge Rock, above 100 Fathom high above the water. 5 Ci∣vidad Real. by the Spaniards called also Ontiveros, by the Natives Guayra, 80 Leagues North from the Town of Assumption; situate on the banks of the River Parana, in a fruitfull soyl, but a sickly Air: for which cause, and the frequent insurrections of the Savages, but meanly peopled. 6 S. Anne, on the banks of the same River Parana; 7 S. Salvador, on a River of the same name. Besides these, there are up the River above Assumption, three noted Ports. 8 Puerto de Guaybiamo, 9 Puerto de la Cande∣laria, and 10 Puerto de Los Reyes, but whether Towns, or only Havens on that River for dispersing and bartering their Commodities, I am not able to say. The last save one memorable for the defeat of John de Ayolas and the death of 80 of his men by the hands of the Savages.

2. TVCVMAN lieth on the West of Rio de la Plata, extending towards the confines of Chile, thorow which they make their way unto Mare del Zur, as thorow the Province of Rio de la Plata unto Mare del Nort: the exact bounds hereof to the North and South not yet resolved on.

The Country, for so 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hereof as lieth towards Chile, well manured and fruitfull; that towards Magellanica, barren, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and not well discovered; no veins of Gold or Silver in it, though situate in a temperate and agreeable Air. Watered by the two Rivers of 1. Salado, so called from the brackish∣ness and ••altness of its and 2 Del Estero, spoken of before, so named because sometimes it breaketh out of his banks. The Inhabitants now civilized both in manners and habit, in both which they conform to the garb of the Spaniards.

Chief Towns hereof 1 S. Jago del Estero, on the banks of that River, by the natural Inhabitants called Varco: the principal of this small Province, honoured with a Bishops See, and the seat of the Governour; and distant about 180 Leagues from Buenos Airez. 2 S. Michael de Tucuman, seated at the foot of a rockie mountain, but near a very fruitful soyl both for Corn and Pasturage, distant 28 Leagues from S. Jago. 3 Talavera or Nuestra Sennora de Talavera, but by the Natives called Esteco; situate on the Ri∣ver Salado before mentioned, in a fruitful soyl, and inhabited by an industrious People, grown wealthy by their Manufactures of Cotton-woolls, which grow hereabouts in great abundance: with which they drive a great trade at the Mines of Potosi, from hence distant but 140 Leagues. 4 Corduba, in a conve∣nient pi••ce for trade, as being equally distant from S. Juan ae la Frontera, in the Praefecture of Chile; and S. Foy, in Rio de la Plata: 50 Leagues from each; and seated in a Rode from Peru unto Buenos Aires; much travelled consequently by those who go from Peru to Brasil or Spain. 5 New London, and 6 New Cordura, built at such time as Garsius de Mendoza, son of the Marquess of Cannete. and Vice Roy of Peru, was Governour of this Province: but both abandoned not long after. Besides these, 7 Morata, 8 Chocinoca, 9 Sococha, & 10 Calabinda; Townships belonging to the Natives.

3. SCRVX DE SIERRA, is the name of a little Territory lying towards Peru, on the North of the River Guapay, and in the Country of the Chiquitos and Cheriguanaes, two Tribes of the Savages: by some accounted to Peru, because under the Juridical Resort of Char••os, but so far distant from the neerest bounds of that Province (100 Spanish leagues at least) that I think fitter to accompt it to the Province of Paraguay, betwixt the banks of which River and that of Guapay it is wholly seated.

The soil abundantly productive of Maize and Wines; plenty of most sorts of American fruits, which I can give no English name to; a kind of Palm, of whose trunk they make great store of meal, of good taste and nourishment. But neither soil nor Air agreeable to the fruits of Europe, which ripen slowly, and soon die. So destitute of Rivers, that the Inhabitants were fain to make use of Rain water, pre∣served in pits: the cause of no small wants, and of many great murders, the people either dying for thirst, or killing one another for some water to quench it.

Chief Towns hereof, 1 Sancta Crux, situate at the foot of a great Mountain, whence the name of the Province; but situate in open field, inlarging it self into many Plains, and thirsty Vallies: neighbour∣ed by a Brook or Torrent breaking from the Rocks; which four leagues from the town is become a Pond, and plentifully doth supply the town with Fish. 2 Baranca, 60 leagues from the Mines of Po∣tosi. 3 Tomina, 4. Lagunilla, and 5 Tarixa; three Forts erected for defence of this Province against the incursions and Alarms of the Cherignanaes. 6 Neyva Ri••ja, once a Colonie of the Spaniards, but sacked and di••peopled by the Cherignanaes, when the Count of Neyva was Vice-Roy of Peru: at what time Nuflo de Chaves, who in the year 1548. first discovered those parts, was treacherously slain by one of the Savages.

The principal Nations of this Country, when first known to the Spaniards, were the Quirandies, Tim∣bues, and Carcares, the Chanes, Chiminei, Guaranyes, the Guayacurves, Cacoves, Guaxarapi, &c. on both sides of the River of Plata: the Tucumanes, Juries, and Diagnitas, in the Cantred of Tucuman; more Northward, where the Spaniards have as yet no hold, the Chunesses, Xaquesses, Xacoaes, and the Xarayes, great and powerfull Nations, hitherto unconquered. The first discovery of this Country ascri∣bed to John Dias de Solis, a Spanish Adventurer; who in the year 1515. passing up the River to the Latitude of 34 Degrees, and 40 minutes; and unadvisedly landing with too small a power, was there unfortunately slain. The design after prosecuted by Sebastian Cabot, An 1526. who sailed against the stream as high as the River Parana: at the reception of which, the great River called till then by the name of Paraguay, begins to be called De la Plata. Here built he the Fortress called Fort Cabot; and 30 leagues more up the River, that called S. Anne, (both long since ruined) where Diego Garcias a Portugal found him, in the year next following. In the year 1535. the business was resumed by Pedro de Mendoza, who built the Town of Buenos Ayres; and sent John de Aiolas to discover North∣wards; of whose unhappy end we have heard before: Not fully setled till the year 1540. when Alvares Nonnez, commonly called Cabesa de Vacca, made a more full discovery of it, and planted Colonies of Spaniards in convenient places. Nothing since done for the further planting of the Country, though some places have been marked out for new Plantations; here being little Gold and Silver, and consequently not much temptation to draw on the Spaniards to the work.

OF BRASIL.

BRASIL is bounded on the East with Mare del Noort, or the main Atlantick; on the West with some undiscovered Countries, lying betwixt it and the Andes; on the North with Guiana from which parted by the great River Maragnon; and on the South with Paraguay, or the Province of Rio de la Plata. The reason of the name I find not, except it came from the abundance of that wood called Brasil wood, which was found amongst them; as the famous Isle of Cyprus from its plenty of Cypresses.

It reacheth from the 29. to the 39. Degree of Southern Latitude; or measuring it by miles, it is said to be 1500 miles from North to South, and 500 miles in breadth from the Sea to the Andes: which must be understood with reference to the whole extent of it; for otherwise all that which is possessed by the Portugals under the name of Brasil is so short of taking up all the breadth hereof, that they possess nothing but the Sea coasts, and some few Leagues (comparatively) within the land, the greatest part of it being so far from being conquered, that it hath not hitherto been discovered.

The Country full of Mountains, Rivers, and Forrests, diversified into Hils and Plains always pleasant and green. The Air for the most part sound and wholsom, by rea on of the fresh winds which do reign amongst them; there being all along the Coasts certain quick winds rising from the South, about two houres before Noon, which do much benefit the Inhabitants: yet in regard it is somewhat movst, it is hold to be more agreeable to old men then to young. The soil in most parts very fruitful, were it not clo••ed with too much rain; but howsoever liberally provided of Sugar c••nes (no one Country more) 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of which they have their Ingenios (as they call them) or Sugar houses in most parts of the Country▪ in which they entertain many thousand slaves, brought hither yearly from Guinea and Congo, and other maritime parts of Africk. A trade in which the Portugals are much delighted, and I cannot blame them; there being few years in each of which they bring not out of Brasil to Portugal 150000 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Sugar, every Arrobe containing 25 Bushels of our English measure. Here is also infinite quantities of that red wood used in dying Cloth, which we commonly call Brasil wood; (but whether the wood took that name from the Country, or the Country rather from the wood, I determine not) the trees whereof are of that incredible greatness, that whole families live on an Arm of one of them, every tree being as populous as the most of our villages. In other Commodities common to them with the other Americans, we need not give particular ••••stance.

Amongst the Rarities hereof, are reckoned 1 the Plant called Copiba, the bark of which being cut doth send out a Balm. the soveraign verue whereof is to well known to the very Beasts▪ that being but by venemous serpents, they re••ort unto it for their cure. 2 The Herb called Sentida or Viva, which toughly touched well close the leaves and not open them again till the man that had offended 〈◊〉〈◊〉 be gone out of sight. 3. A kind of Wheat in the Valley neer unto S. Sebastian, which is continually 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and alwayes ripe; or never wholly ••pe, because alwayes growing: for when one Ear doth g••an, another doth bloom; when one is ripe and yellow, another is green. 4 The Oxesish, with eye•• and eye-lids, two arms a cubit long, and at each an hand with five fingers and nails, as in a man; under the arms two tears, inwards, like a Cow, in every female. 5 A Creature found of late about the Bay of All Saints, which had the face of an Ape, the feet of a Lion, and all the rest of a man; of such a terrible aspect, that the Souldier who shot him fell down dead; but this I rather look on as an aberration of Nature then a rarity in her. 6 Beasts of such strange shapes, and such several kinds, that it may be said of Brasil, as once of Africk, Semper aliquid apportat novi; every day some new object of Admiration.

The people here are endowed with a pretty understanding: as may seem by him, who tartly blamed the covetousness of the Spanish, for coming from the other end of the world to dig for Go••d; and holding up a wedge of Gold, cryed out, Behold the God of the Christians! But in most places they are barbarous, the men and women go stark naked, and on high festival days hang Jewels in their lips: these 〈◊〉〈◊〉; days are when a company of good neighbours come together to be merry, over the rosted body of a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 whom they cut in collops, called Boucon, and eat with great greediness, and as much delecta∣tion. They have two 〈◊〉〈◊〉 qualities, as being mindfull of injuries, and forgetfull of benefits. The Men cruel without measure; and the Women infinitely lascivious. They cannot pronounce the Letters L. F. R. The reason of which one being demanded, made answer; because they had amongst them nei∣ther Law, Faith, no•• Rulers. They are able Swimmers, as well Women as Men; and will stay under water an hour together. Women in Travel are here delivered without any great pain, and presently go about their business be longing to good housewives. The good-man (according to the fashion of one kinder sorts of Husbands in England, who are said to breed their wives children) being sick in their stead, and keeping their ••ed; so far that he hath ••rothes made him, is visited by his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or Neighbours, and hath Jun••ets sent to comfort him. And amongst these there are some

Rarities, if not Monstrosities in Nature: it being said of those which live towards the Andes, that they are hairy all over like Beasts, such as Orson is fained to have been in the old Romance; and probably so ingendred also; that the Guaymares disbowell women with childe, and roast the children; and finally that the savage Nation of Camucuiara have their Paps almost down unto their knees, which they tie about their waste when they run, or go faster then ordinary.

Rivers of note I finde not any till I come to Maragnon, though that a Boundary rather betwixt this and Guiana, then proper unto this alone. If any chance to come in our way, as we cross the Country, we shall not pass them over without some remembrance. And so proceed we to the division of the Country, not into Provinces or Nations, as in other Places, but into Praefectures, or Captainships as the Portugals call them. Of which there are 13 in all, which we shall severally touch on as we trace the coast, from the Province of Rio de la Plata, unto that of Guiana; that is to say,

1. The Captainship of S. VINCENT bordering on Rio de la Plata, inhabited by the most civil People of all Brasil. Chief Towns whereof 1 Santos, at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea, capable of good Ships of burden, but distant from the Main three Leagues. A Town of no more then 120 houses, yet the best of this Praefecture; beautified with a Parish Church, and two Convents of Friers. Taken and held two moneths by Sir Tho: Cavendish, An. 1591. since that environed with a Wall, and fortified with two Castles. 2 S. Vincents better built, but not so well fitted with an Haven; of about 70 houses, and 100 Inhabitants. 3 Itange, and 4 Cananea, two open Burroughs, but capable of lesser Vessels. 5 S. Paul, upon a little Mountain, at the foot whereof run two pleasant Rivers, which fall not far off into the River of Iniambis. A Town of about 100 houses, one Church, two Convents, and a Colledge of Jesuits; neighboured by Mines of Gold found in the Mountains called Pernabiacaba. 6 S. Philips a small Town on the banks of Iniambis, which there begins to inlarge it self, and passing thence falleth at the last in the River Parana, one of the greatest Tributaries to Rio de la Plata.

2. Of RIO DE JANEIRO, or the River of January, so called because entred into that moneth by John Diaz de Solis, Ana 1515. neglected by the Portugals, it was seized on by the French under the conduct of Villegagnone, employed herein by Admiral Chastillon, a great friend of the Hugonets, to whom it was intended for a place of Refuge (as New-England afterwards for the like) but within three years after their first coming hither (An. 1558) regained by the Portugals, and the French put unto the sword. Places of most consideration in it, 1 Collignia, the Fort and Colony of the French, so named in honour of Gaspar Colligni (commonly called Chastillon) by whose incouragement it was founded. Situate on the Bay of the River Janeiro, which the French called Ganabara. 2 S. Sebastians, built at the mouth of the same bay by the Portugals, after they had expelled the French, and fortified with four strong Bulwarks. 3 Angra des Reyes, distant twelve Leagues Westward from the Mouth of the Bay; not long since made a Portugal Colony. Besides these, there are two great Burroughs of the natural Brasilians, in which are said to be above 2000 Inhabitants.

3. Of the HOLY GHOST (del Spiritu Santo) one of the most fertile Provinces of all Brasil; well stored with Cotton-wool, and watered with the River Parayba, large and full of Fish. The only Town of note in it, is Spiritu Santo, inhabited by about 200 Portugals. The chief buildings of it, a Church dedicated to S. Francis, a Monstery of Benedictines, and a Colledge of Jesuits; the chief convenien∣cy, a safe and commodious Haven, capable of the greatest Vessels.

4. Of PORTO SEGVRO, the secure Haven, so called by Capralis who first discovered it, when being tossed at sea by a terrible tempest, he had here refreshed himself. Chief Towns hereof 1. Porto Seguro, built on the top of a white Cliff, which commands the Haven; of more Antiquity then Fame; of more same then bigness; as not containing fully 200 Families. 2 Santa Crux, three Leagues from the other; a poor Town, with as poor an Harbour: the Patrimony and Inheritance of the Dukes of Avera in the Realm of Portugal. 3 Santo Amaro, or S.Omers, once of great note for making Sugars; for which use here were five Ingenios, o•• Sugar Engines; deserted by the Portugals for fear of the Sa∣vages, against whom they had not power enough to make good the place; and the Sugars destroyed of purpose, that they might not come into the hands of the barbarous People.

5 Of DES ILHEOS, or of the Isles, so named from certain I••ands lying against the Bay on which the principal Town is seated, called also I••heos, or the Iland (with like Analogie as a Town of good note in Flanders, hath the name of Insula, or Lisle) The town consisting of about 150 or 200 Fa∣milies, situate on a little River, but neighboured by a great Lake of 12 Leagues in compass (out of which that River doth arise) full of a great but wholsom Fish, which they call Monatos, some of which are affirmed to weigh eight and twenty pounds. This Colony, much endangered by the Guay∣muri, a Race of Savages more Savage then any of their Fellows: who being driven out of their own Country fell into this Praefecture, which they had utterly destroyed, if some of S. Georges Reliques, as the Jesuits tell us (but I binde no man to believe it) sent by their General from Rome, An. 1581. had not stayed their fury, and given the Portugals the better.

6. Of TODOS LOS SANTOS, or All Saints, so called from a large Bay of that name, upon which it lieth; in breadth two Leagues and an half, 18 Fathoms deep, and full of many little Ilands, but flourishing and pleasant, and well stored with Cotton Wooll. A Bay in which are many safe Stations and Roads for shipping, and therefore of great use and consequence in those furious seas. Memorable for the hardy Enterprise of Peter Heynes, a Dutch man, Admiral of the Navy of the United Provinces; who in the year 1627 seized on a Fleet of Spaniards, consisting of 26 Sail of ships (four of them be∣ing Men of War) all lying under the protection of the Forts and Castles built for the safety of that Bay. For thrusting in amongst them with his own ship only (the rest not being able to follow) he so laid about him, that having sunk the Vice Admiral, he took all the rest, conditioning only for their lives: notwithstanding all the shot which was made against him from the Ships and Castles, and 42 Pieces of Ordnance planted on the shore. Chief Towns hereof 1 S. Salvador, built on a little hill, on the North side of the Bay, by Thomas de Sousa; adorned with many Churches, and Religious hou∣ses; and fortified (besides the wall) with three strong Castles, the one called S. Antony, the other S. Philip, and the third Tapesipe. Yet not so strong by reason of some hills adjoyning which command the Town, but that it was taken by the Hollanders, An. 1624. recovered by the Spaniards the next yeer after, and since lost again. 2 Paripe more within the Land, four Leagues from S. Saviours. 3 Se∣regippe del Rey, a small Town and seated on as small a River, but amongst many rich Pastures, and some veins of silver.

7. Of FERNAMBVCK, one of the richest Praefectures for Tobacco, Sugar, and the great quan∣tity of Brasil-Wood, which is brought hence yeerly for the Diers, in all this Country; but destitute of Corn, and most other necessaries, with which supplied from the Canaries, and sometimes from Portu∣gal. Chief Towns hereof, 1 Olinda, the largest and best peopled of all Brasil: containing above 2000 persons, not reckoning in the Church-men, nor taking she great number of slaves which they keep for their Sugar-Works into the Accempt: for whose use they have here eight Parochial Churches, five Religious houses, and some Hospitals. Situate neer the Sea side, but on so uneven a piece of ground, as makes it not capable of a Regular fortification; the Haven being little, and not very commodious, but defended at the entrance by a well built Castle; and that well planted with Brass pieces. Which not withstanding, in the year 1595 the Castle and the Suburbs along the Port (wherein they used to stow all their chief Commodities) were took by Capt. James Lancaster, and some few of the English, who having tarried in the Haven above a moneth, brought home with him eight of his own ships, four French∣men, and three Hollanders which came in by chance; all laden with the choicest Merchandise of Brasil and India. 2 Amatta de Brasil, ten miles from Olinda, the Inhabitants whereof live by selling the Bra∣sil wood. 3 S. Laurenzo, a well frequented Village, but as yet unwalled. 4. Poincur, upon a River so na∣med. 5 Antonio de Cabo, neer the Cape of S.Augustines; both of good note for the great quantity of Sugars which are made in each. 6 Garasu, about five Leagues from Olinda, inhabited for the most part by poor and Mechanical persons, till the year 1632. when taken by the Hollander, and planted with a people of higher quality. This Praefecture, belonging formerly to the Earls of Albuquerque (a great house in Spain) is now wholly in the hands of the States of the Provinces united: the town of Olinda being took by them in the year 1629. the Port and all the Avenues unto it so strongly fortified, that they have hitherto enjoyed it.

8. Of TAMARACA, so called from an Iland of that name, distant about five miles from Olinda; of no great note but for the Haven, and an impregnable Castle on the top of an hill for defence there∣of. Which when the Hollanders could not take, they built a strong Bulwark at the mouth of the port, and so blocked it up, that it hath since been of no use to the Spaniard. This the least Praefecture in Brasil, but withall the ancientest; extended three Leagues onely in length, and but two in breadth: the Patrimony of the Earles of Monsanto in Portugal, who received hence yearly, when entire, thirty thousand Ducats. But his Rents much diminished, if not quite inverted, since the loss of the Haven.

9. Of PARAIBA, so called from a River of that name (but by the Spaniard called Domingo) of most note herein. On the banks whereof standeth Paraiba, the chief Town of it, at the bottom of an Arm of the Sea, about three Leagues from the Main, but capable of pretty good ships to the very Town. The Town inhabited not long since by 500 Portugals, besides Slaves and Negroes. Not wal∣led, till they began to stand in fear of the Hollanders, on the loss of Olinda, but more secured by a strong Castle on the Promontory called Cabo Delo, which the Hollanders have in vain attempted, then by any works within the Land. A Castle which acknowledgeth the French for the Founders of it, who for a while were possessed of this Tract, and gave name to an adjoyning Haven called Port Francois; but outed by the Portugal, Anno 1584. who have since held their footing in it, but with fear of the Hollanders, especially since their taking of a little Iland lying over against them, cal∣led the Isle of Noronha.

10. Of RIO GRANDE, so called from the River Poteingi (as the Natives term it) which the Portugals call Rio Grande, or the great River, not made a Praefecture till of late. For lying open, as it were, to the next Pretender, some of the French began to fix here, Anno 1597. But the King of Spain not willing to have any such neighbour, commanded the Captain of Paraiba, to drive them thence; which was done accordingly. But then the Savages beginning to rise up in Arms, the Captain of Paraiba was fain to seek aide from him of Fernambuck; by whose help having slain five thousand, and took three thousand of them, the rest became Vassals to the Portugals: who built here an impregnable Castle (which is all the footing they have in it) well manned and furnished with Ammunition and all other necessaries; very few Portugals, except those of the Garrison, being yet come over.

11. Of SIARA, a late Praefecture also, in which the Portugals have no more then a Castle, with a dozen houses or thereabouts, besides that of the Governour adjoyning to it. So named from an Haven called Siara, but of no great note, and capable but of little Vessels. Of some trade in regard of the Chrystall, Cotton-wooll, and some precious stones, found in the Country hereabouts: and certainly would be of greater, if once the Portugals would be active and pursue the Conquest; here being great plenty of Sugar Canes, but no works to make it.

12. Of MARAGNON, an Iland lying in the mouth of the great River so called, in the furthest parts of Brasil Northwards, and many Leagues distant from Siara the last of their Praefectures; the Country intervening not yet discovered, or otherwise made known unto us then by the names of the Ports and Promontories found upon the Coast. An Iland of a fruitfull soil, if pains and hus∣bandry were not wanting: affording naturally Maize, and a Root called Maniot, both which the Savages use for bread; good store of Cotton-wools, Saffron, Brasil-wood, and the best Tobacco; and in some places Balm and Amber. Watered with many fresh Rivers, and pleasant Springs: well∣wooded both for Timber and Fewell: and in a word, blessed with so temperate an Aise (though so near the Aequator) that no place can be more commodious for the life of man. The People strong of body, healthy and long lived without any boldness; industrious in their Feather-works and Manu∣factures of Cotton; the Women curious in ordering their hair, fruitfull in Child bearing, and that till so years old and sometimes more. Both Sexes naked till their Marriage; and then apparelled onely from the wast to their knees.

The Villages hereof possessed by the Natives, consisted but of four great Houses; each of them two or three hundred foot in length, and twenty or thirty foot in breadth; so placed as they re∣sembled a Quadrangular Cloyster: And in each House so many Housholds, that commonly each of their Villages or Taves (for so they called them) contained three hundred persons, and some twice that number: Of these were twenty seven in all, whose names I hold impertinent to be mustered here: The totall estimate of the People when the French came thither, amounting to 12000 Souls. For the French Trading in this Iland, and carrying themselves courteously amongst the Natives, found them not unwilling to admit a Colonie of that Nation, if sent over to them: by whose aide they might free themselves from all other Pretenders, and be instructed in the Gospel. Accordingly a Colonie, and four Capuchin Friers, are sent over to them Anno 1612. Some Savages gained unto the Faith, and a strong Castle called S. Lewis commodiously built, and planted with 22 pieces of Ordnance; the effect of that Voyage. But long they had not rested there when dis-seized by the Portugals, sent thither under the Conduct of Hierome de Albuquerque, Anno 1614. Who to the Castle of S. Lewis which the French had built, added those of S. Mary, and S. Francis, plant∣ed two Villages in the Iland by the names of S. Andrew, and S. Jago, and ever since have held it without molestation.

13. Of PARA, the most Northern Praefecture of Brasil, towards Guiana; so called from the River of Para (supposed to be a branch of the River of Amazons) which runneth thorow it. The River at the mouth of it, two miles in breadth, and in the middle of the Channel fifteen Fathoms deep: on the Banks whereof (but on an higher ground then the rest) the Portugals have built the Castle of Para, in form Quadrangular, and well walled except towards the River: the Coun∣try thereabouts inhabited by 300 Portugueze, besides the Garrison.

Now for the Fortunes of the whole, it never did acknowledge any one Supream. Divided into ma∣ny Tribes, and each Tribe governed by their Chiefs, as in other Countries. These Tribes so many, and the Muster of their names so useless, that I now forbear it. In this estate they lived when disco∣vered first; but by whom first discovered, will not be agreed on. The Spaniards, to get some colour of a Title for the Crown of Castile, ascribe it to John Pinsone, and Diego de Lepe, two of their own Country; who as they say, had Landed on it in the year 1500, before the coming of Capralis, though the same year also. The Portugals attribute the Discovery of it to Pedro Alvarez de Ca∣prali, sent by their King Emanuel to the East-Indies: who being driven over hither from the Coast of Guinea, took possession of it, and as a Monument thereof, advanced a Cross, giving the name of Sanctae Crucis, or the Holy Cross, to this new Discovery. That name changed afterwards to Brasil from the abundance of that Wood (as it is conceived) which was found amongst them. No∣tice hereof being given to the Court of Portugal, Americus Vespucius a Noble Flerentine, and af∣ter

him John de Empoli, another of that Nation in the year 1503. were by Emmanuel employed in a further Discovery. Who speeding fortunately in it, the Portugals did accordingly send over some Plantations thither. But a great controversie growing betwixt them and the Spaniard, to whether of the two it of right belonged: the Spaniard was content to yield it to the Crown of Portugal, though by the Bull or Edict of Pope Alexander the sixt (by whom the whole undiscovered World was divided betwixt those two Kings) it seemed to fall within the Grant to the Crown of Castile. Enjoyed by this Emmanuel, and the Kings succeeding till the death of Sebastian (which Sebastian the Jesuites look on as the Founder of all their Colledges in this Country) and by the Spaniards since the death of Henry (whose reign continued but a yeer) though in the name and right of the Crown of Portugal; that Nation being so prudently jealous of their interess in it, that they would suffer any of the Subjects of Spain to grow great amongst them. By them possessed entirely without any Rivals (I mean for so much of the Country as they had subdued) till of late years the Hollanders put in for a part; and got the Praefectures of Fornanback, and Todos Los Sanctos(or the Bay) by the Right of War. The rest with all the other Members of the Crown of Portugal, in the late Revolt of that Nation from the King of Spain, submitting unto John the 4th, of the house of Bragance, whom the Portugueze had made their King, Anno 1639.

OF GVIANA.

GVIANA is bounded on the East with the Main Atlantick; on the West with the Mountains of Peru, or rather some undiscovered Countries interposed betwixt them; on the North with the River Orenoque, and on the South with that of the Amazons. The reason of the name I find not, unless it be so called from the River Wia, of which more anon.

It is situate on both sides of the Line, extended from the fourth Degree of Southern, to the eighth of the Northern Latitude. The Air, notwithstanding this situation under the Aequator, affirmed to be temperate, the Eastern winds (which they call the Brizes) constantly blowing about Noon, and miti∣gating the extreme hears thereof by their cooler blasts. The Country towards the Sea side flat and level, the inland parts more mountainous and swelled with hils: in all places so adorned with Natures Tapestrie, the boughs and branches of the Trees never unclothed or left naked, (fruit either ripe or green growing still upon them) that no Country in the world could be better qualified. The particular Commodities of it we shall see anon, when the particular parts hereof come into Discourse.

Of the People it is said in generall, that they have amongst them no setled Government; and though they acknowledge some superiority in the Chiefs of their Tribes, yet it is only voluntary, as long and as little as they please. Adultery and Murder, which are only punishable, not otherwise expiated but by the death of the Offender. The richer sort have two or three Wives, and somtimes more; the poor but one, and hardly able to keep here they that have more, and they who have but one, alike jealous of them; and if they take them in Adultery, without any further ceremony or formalities of Law, they beat out their brains. Their wives, especially the elder, they use for Servants; and he which hath most such, is the greatest man. Without Religion, or any notion of a Godhead; not so far onwards on the way to the worship of the true God, as to be Idolaters: for though Idolatrie be mistaken in the proper Object, it supposeth a Deitie; and they who have this Principle, That there is a God, have learned one, and not the least of the points of their Catechism. Their Accompts amongst themselves they keep with a bundle of sticks; which they diminish or increase according to the times of their contract. Their Funerals they solemnize with a Feast, but with such diversity in the deportment of both Sexes, that whiles the Women howl extremely, the Men perform the Obsequies with singing and excessive drinking; the one as improper for a Feast, as the other for a Funeral.

Rivers of most note in it, besides 1 Orenoque. & 2 the River of Amazons, and those rather boundaries betwixt this and the neighbouring Provinces, then proper unto th•••• alone. 3 Arrawari, 4 Conawini, 5 Caspurough, or Cassipure, all falling into the same main Atlantick, betwixt the River of Amazons and Wiapoco: the last arising out of the Lake of the Arachosi half a mile broad at the mouth or influx into the Sea, and but five spans deep. 6 Wiapoco, of which more hereafter. 7 Wia, 8 Cajane. 9 Mar∣wine, 10 Essequebe, a River of twenty dayes journey long, betwixt Wiapoco and the River of Orenoque or Raliana.

The whole divided commonly into these four parts, 1 Rio de las Amazones, or the River of Amazons, 2 Wiapoco or Guiana specially so called, 3 Orenoque, and 4 the Isles of Guiana.

1. RIO DELAS AMAZONES, or the River of Amazons, containeth that part of this Country which lieth along the tract of that famous River. The soil in some places dry and barren, in others fertile and productive of the choicest fruits. Full of large Woods, and in those Woods most sort of Trees which are to be found in America: One amongst others of most note, (and perhaps peculiar to Guiana) which they call the Totock; a tree of great bulk, and as great a fruit; this last as big as a mans head, and so hard withall, that when the fruit grows ripe and ready to fall, the people dare not go into the woods without an helmet or some such shelter over their heads, for fear of beating out their brains. The Kernels of it, for the most part ten or twelve in number, have the taste of Almonds, and are said to be provocative in point of Venerie. Of which the Savages have this By-word, Pigue seeke in Saccowe p••ngean Tot••••ke; that is to say, Eat Totock, if thou wouldst be potent in the Acts of Venus. Here are also Sugar-canes in some places; and the Plant called Pita, the taste whereof is said to be like Strawberries, Claret-wine, and Sugar.

The principal Inhabitants of this part of the Country, the Yaos, Cockettuway, Patt••cui, Tockianes, Tomoes. and Wackehanes dwelling on the Continent; the Maraons, and Arowians possessed of the Ilands. Towns of note I have met with none amongst them; though every house (most of them 150 foot in length, 20 in breadth, and entertaining at the least an hundred persons) might pass sufficiently for a Village. Yet they are safer housed then so, for otherwise their houses would afford them but little com∣fort in the overflowings of the River, which drown all the Country: and therefore they betake them∣selves to the tops of trees, and there remain, like Birds, with their several families, till the waters be drawn

in again. and the earth become more comfortable for habitation. Yet I find some of these their dwel∣lings called by proper names, as 1 Matarem, 2 Roakery, 3 Anarcaprock, 4 Haaman, 5 Womians, and 6 Co••••mymne. But I find nothing but their names, and enough of that.

The first Discoverer of this River and the parts adjoyning, was Orellana the Lieutenant of Gonsales Piz••rro, whom his brother Francisco Pizarro then Viceroy of Peru had made the Governour of Quito. Moved with the noise of some rich Countries beyond the Andes, he raised sufficient forces, and passed over those Mountains; where finding want of all things for the life of man, they made a Boat, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Orellana to bring in provisions. But the River which he chanced into, was so swift of course, that he was not able to go back; and therefore of necessity to obey his fortune in following the course of that strong water. Passing along by divers desolate and unpeopled places, he came at last into a Country planted and inhabited; where he first heard of the Amazons (by those Savages called Coma∣puyaras) of whom he was bidden to beware as a dangerous people: And in the end having spent his time in passing down this River from the beginning of January to the end of August 1540. he came at last into the Sea; and getting into the isle of Cubana, sailed into Spain: the course of his voyage down the water he estimated at 180 leagues (or 5400 English miles) but found no Amazons in his passage, as himself affirmed; only some masculine women shewed themselves intermixt with the men, to oppose his landing; and in some places he found men with long hair like women; either of which might make these parts believed to be held by Amazons. But to proceed, Arriving at the Court of Spain, he got Commission for the conquest of the Countries by him discovered; and in the year 1549. he betook him∣self unto the service. But though he found the mouth of the River. one of them at least, he could never hit upon the Channel which brought him down, though attempted often. Which ill success, with the con∣sideration of his loss both in fame and fortunes, brought him to his grave; having got nothing but the honour of the first discovery, and the leaving of his name to that famous River, since called Orellana. The enterprise pursued, but with like success, by one Pedro de Orsna, An. 1560. after which the Spaniards gave it over. And though the English and the Hollanders have endeavoured an exact discovery, and severally begun some Plantations in it, yet they proved as unfortunate as the others; their Quarters being beaten up by the neighbouring Portugals, before they were sufficiently fortified to make any resistance.

2. WIAPOCO, or GVIANA especially so called, taketh up the middle of this Country, on both sides of the River of Wiapoco, whence it hath its name. A River of a long course, but not passable up the stream above 16 miles, by reason of a Cataract, or great fall from the higher ground: in breadth betwixt that Cataract and the Aestuarium, about the tenth part of a mile; at the Aestuarium or influx a whole mile at least, and there about two fathoms deep.

The Country on both sides of this River very rich and fertile; so natural for Tobacco, that it grow∣eth to nine handfuls long. Sugar-canes grow here naturally without any planting, and on the shrubs great store of Cotton, and the Dye by some called Orellana. Plenty of Venison in their Woods, and of Fish in their Rivers; their fields well stored with Beasts, which themselves call Moyres, in shape and use resembling Kine, but without any horns. The people generally of a modest and ingenious counte∣nance; Naked, but would wear cloaths if they had them, or knew how to make them. Their bread is made of a Plant called Cassavi; of which also being dried and chewed, and then strained thorow a wicker-vessel, they make a kind of drink in colour like new Ale, but not so well tasted, and of less con∣tinuance. The greatest part of their food is Fish, which they intoxicate with a strong-sented wood, and so take them up as they l••e floating on the top of the water. Much troubled with a worm like a Flea, (by the Spaniards called Nignas) which get under the nails of their Toes, and multiply there to infinite numbers, and the no less torture of the Patient, without speedy prevention: No better remedy found out, then to poure Wax melting hot on the place affected; which being pulled off when tis cold d••aws the Vermin with it, sometimes 800 at a pull. The women of such easie child birth, that they are delivered without help, and presently bring the child to his father (for they have so much natural mo∣desty as to withdraw from company upon that occasion) who washeth it with water, and painteth it with several colours, and so returneth it to the mother.

Rivers of note here are very many; no Country under Heaven being better watered, nor fuller of more pleasant and goodly streams. The names of some of them on both sides of the Wiapoco we have had before: the chief of which I take to be Wia, affirmed to be of a long course, a goodly River all the way, and at the mouth thereof to be large and broad; which passing thorow the heart of the Country in the 4 Degree & 40 minutes of Northern Latitude, may possibly occasion both the whole, and this part more specially to be called Wiana, & by the Dutch who cannot pronounce the double VV, Guyana. Certain I am that by the name of Wiana I have found it written in approved Authors. But what need further search be made after lesser Rivers, (which will offer themselves to us of their own ac∣cord) when we have a Lake to pass over like a Sea for bigness, (magnum, famosum, & vastum instar maris, as my Author hath it) by the Yaos or Jaos called Raponowinin, by the Caribes (the old Inhabitants of this Country) Parimen? Situate about a dayes journey from the River Essequebo: and neighboured by the great and famous City Manoa, which the Spaniards call El Dorado (or the Golden City) from the abundance of Gold, in coin, plate, armour, and other furniture, which was said to be in it. The greatest City, as some say, not only of America, but of all the world. For Diego de Ordas, one of the Companions of Cortez in his Mexican wars, and by him condemned for a mutinie, put into a Boat alone without any victual, and so cast off to seek his fortune; affirmed at his return, that being taken by

some of the Guianians, and by them carried to their King then residing at Manoa, he entred the City at high-noon, travelled all the rest of that day, and the next also untill night, before he came to the Kings Palace; but then he faith that he was led blindfold all the way: And therefore possibly enough this City might be no such miracle as the story makes it; Don Diego being either abused by the reports of the Savages, or willing to abuse the world with such empty fictions. For though the Spaniards and the English have severally sought, and that with incredible diligence to find out this City, yet none of them have hitherto had the fortune to fall upon it. So that I fear it may be said in the Poets language,

—Et quod non invenis usquam, Esse putes nusquam—i. e.

That Which is nowhere to be found, Think not to be above the ground.

Nor is there much more credit to be given unto his Relations of the great Court kept here by one of the Ingas; who being forsook, one of the younger Brethren of Atabaliba the last King of Peru, at the conquest of that Kingdom with many thousands of his Followers came into this Country, and subduing the Caribes, erected here a second Peruvian Monarchy. For besides that Atabaliba had no bre∣thren but Guascar and Mango who both died in Peru, how improbable must it needs appear, that this Guianian King, knowing so well the thirst of the Spaniards after Gold, would either suf∣fer him to return and disclose the secrets of his State; or send him away loaded with Gold, as tis said he did? VVho sheweth his Treasure to a Thiefe, doth deserve to lose it. And therefore letting pass these dreams of an El Dorado, let us descend to places of less Magnificence, but of greater reality. Amongst which I reckon 1 Caripo, most memorable for a Colonie of English there planted by Capt. Robert Harcourt, An. 1608. situate on the banks of the Wiacopo, near the mouth thereof, on the advantage of a Rock, and that Rock so difficult of access, that they feared no danger from an Enemy. The Ayr so found and answerable to the constitution of an English body, that of 30 which were left there for three years together, there dyed but six, and those six rather by misfortune and some cross accident, then by any diseases. 2 Gomeribo, on the top of an hill near the mouth of the Bay of Wiacopo, possessed a while by some Hollanders, but soon defer••ed. 3 Moyemon a Village of the Para∣goti, on the banks of the River Marwinen. 4 Crewinay, on the other side of the same River, possessed by the Caribes: the King of the first (for each Tribe had its several Princes) being named Maperitaka, af∣firmed to be a vertuous man, and kind to strangers; of the later, Minapa. 5 Tanparamun••n, about an hundred Leagues from the mouth of that River. And 6 Moreshego, four dayes journey from the other; both possessed by the Caribes. The King, or Cacique of those last, at Cap. Harcourts being there (of which time we speak) named Areminta; affirmed to have a skin like a piece of Buff.

The principal Families of this part, besides the Yaos, or Jagos, and the Maraons spoken of before, who possess almost all the Sea-coasts of this Country, are said to be Arwaccae, the Sapayoy, the Mayos, and the Aracou••i; of different Languages, and Customs, though neer neighbours unto one another. Originally inhabitants of the Iland of Trinidado, and the River of Orenoque: whence driven by the Spaniards they came into this Tract, and beating the old Inhabitants whom they call by the common name or Cariber, higher into the Country, possessed themselves of the Sea shores, and the parts ad∣joyning•• each Tribe or Family being governed by its several Chief, as before was intimated. The Nether••landers for a time had some footing in it, but they quickly left it; endeavouring nothing more in the ••••me of their short stay amongst them, then to make the People dis-affected to the English; of whose pretensions to these parts, and designs to plant them they had good Intelligence. And so much was confessed by some of the Natives, when they had found by good experience and acquaint∣ance, how much the English were abused in those mis-reports. Afterwards in the year 1604. Captain Charles Leigh set Sail from Woolwich on the Thames, and in May fell upon the River of Wiapoco, where he was kindly entertained, gratified with an House and Garden, and his Aide craved against the Caribes and their other Enemies. He took possession of the Country in the name of King James and the Crown of England; and caused the River of Wiapoco to be called (by his own name) Caroleigh: but that name ended with his life, and that shortly after, he dying in his return on ship-board. The design went forwards notwithstanding, and in the year 1608 an English Colony is brought hither by Captain Harcourt, a new possession taken in the name of King James, the Colony planted at Carpo before mentioned; the Country further searched into by that Noble Gentleman, then ever formerly by any, or by many since. After three years, the Colony wanting fit supply, returned home again; the Plantation never since pursued, though by some projected. Yet so far are these Savages beholding to the English Nation, that as they did defend them at their being there against the Caribes, so at their go∣ing off they taught them the use of Arms, and put them into a posture of defence; inabling them there∣by to preserve themselves against all their Enemies.

3. ORENOQUE, or the Province of the River of Orenoque comprehendeth the North parts of Guyana, lying upon and toward, the Banks of that famous River of which we have already spoken. The Country very rich and pleasant, consisting of large Plains, many miles in compass, adorned with the embroydery of Flowers, and unknown Plants, exceeding pleasant to the eye; and sometimes in∣terlaced with hills, reported to be furnished with rich Mines of Gold and Silver. The Rivers liberally

stored with Fish, and the Forrests both with Beasts and Fowls. No Country in America, not Peru it self, said to be comparable to it for abundance of Treasure. Some also add a whole Mountain of Chrystall to be seen afar off from Winecaporo: and tell us (but in generall terms) of more goodly Ci∣ties then elswhere in all Peruana, but neither the Spaniards nor the English could ever see them, though they diligently searched into most parts of this Country.

The People, as of several Nations, so of several Natures: The Capuri, and Macureos, for the most part Carpenters, live by making Cunoas or Boats, which they fell into Guiana for Gold, and to Trinadado for Tobacco, in the immoderate taking whereof they exceed all Nations. When a Cacique or Com∣mander dyeth, they make great lamentation; and after the flesh is putrified and fallen from the bones, they take up the Skeleton, and hang it up in the house where he dwelt, decking his skull with Feathers of all colours, and hanging gold Plates about the bones of his arms and thighs. Of the Tivitivas dwelling upon some of the Northern branches, it is affirmed by Sir Walter Raleigh, that are a goodly and vali∣ant People, and to have the most manly and most deliberate speech of any Nation in the World. A People which eat of nothing that is set or sown: the children of Dame Nature and therefore will not be beholding for their lively-hood unto Art, or Industry; using the tops of the Palmito Tree for Bread; Fish Deer, and Swines flesh, for the rest of their sustenance. The Assawy, Saymae, Wikeri, and Aro∣ras, affirmed to be as black as Negroes, but with smoother hair: And to use Arrows dipt in so strange a poyson, as doth not only bring death, but death with most unspeakable torments, especially if the wounded party be permitted to drink. Of the Arwacae of this Tract I finde nothing singular, but that when any of their Kings or Caciques die, their wives and neerest of the kindred beat their bones to powder, and mingle it with their drink like spice.

Places of most importance in it (for to speak any thing particularly of those many Rivers which fall into the Orenoque, were an endless labour) 1 Comolaha, on the South of Orenoque, but somewhat distant, in which they keep some Annual Fairs for the sale of Women. One of our English men, left by Sir Walter Raleigh, Anno 1595. affirmeth that he bought eight of them (the eldest not above eigh∣teen) for a half-penny red hafted knife, which he brought from England: But withall telleth us for his credit that he gave them to some Savages of his acquaintance. 2. Morequito, a known Port upon some branch of the Orenoque; of much use to the English in their first Discovery of these parts. 3 Weni∣capora so called from another branch of that River bearing this name; from whence was shewed an high Hill said to be of Chrystall, but so far off, that it was thought better to believe then to go and see. Others report of this Mountain that above it there is a mighty River, which falling down this Cataract on the lower grounds, makes a terrible noise, as if 1000 Bells were knocked one against another. And pos∣sible enough it is, that this great fall of water discerned far off, may (with the help of Sun-shine) carry some resemblance of a Chrystalline Mountain. 4 S. Thome, situate on the Main Channel of the River Orenoque, a Town of 140 houses, stretched out in length for half a mile, but slightly built; a Parish Church in the midst of it, and at the West end a Convent of Franciscan Friers. The only Town of all Guiana possessed by the Spaniards; not fortified till against the last coming of Sir Walter Raleigh, Anno 1617, but taken by him at that time, and since that by the Hollanders, An. 1629. though by both quitted not long after, it returned to the Spaniards.

The severall Nations of this Tract have been named before. Discovered first by Diego de Ordas, An. 1531. furnished with a Patent for the conquest of it by Charles the fift. But not hitting on the right Channel, or otherwise not able to overcome the difficulties which lay before him, he returned to Spain: effecting nothing but the opening of the way to others. Followed herein by Hierom de Ortal, Anno 1533. and after by Herrera, who proceeded further then the others, Anno 1536. and finally by Gon∣salvo Ximenez de Quesada and Antonio Berreo with far better fortune; who beginning their journey from the New Realm of Granada in the search of Guiana, fell casually into this great River, as Orellana did before into that of the Amazons. But yet not perfectly discovered till the yeer 1595. in which Sir Walter Raleigh having taken Prisoner this Antonio Berreo, and learning of him the success of his Expe∣dition, resolved upon the undertaking: and searched so far into the Countrey by the course of this Ri∣ver, that some have since called it Raliana. The business followed the next yeer (after his return) by Captain Lawrence Keymis, employed by Raleigh in that service, who at his coming found the Country possessed by the Spaniards, by whom 20 or 30 of the moveable houses of the Savages had been laid together like a Town and all the Natives who wished well to the English, dispersed and scattered. So that without any other effect of his journey, then the finding out the true mouth of the Orenoque (which he first discovered) he set sail for England. In the mean time it had been moved at the Court, that a Colony of English should be planted there, and some proportionable force sent over to make good the Action. But the motion upon good advice rejected, first in regard of the distance of it from the main body of our strength: and 2. because the Spaniards bordering neer upon it, might easily cast out our small Forces and make the enterprise dishonourable to the English Nation, who had then the better of him in the point of Honourable Atchievements. It was permitted notwithstanding unto pri∣vate Adventurers to try their Fortunes on it, without engaging of the State: whereupon followed the Voyages of Leigh, and Harcourt, before spoken of. But they not being able to go thorow with so great a business, let it fall again. And so it rested till the last unfortunate Voyage of Sir Walter Raleigh, li∣censed by Commission under the great Seal to search into some Mines of Gold and Silver, which he was credibly informed of when he was in this Country. A design followed with great hopes by the Undertakers, most of them being persons of honour, and well attended: but so unfortunate in the issue (the Spaniards being made acquainted with it before his coming) that at the taking of S. Thome,

he lost his own Son, and a great part of his Forces; and after his return (not able with the residue to make good his ground against the Enemy) was executed on a former Attaindure, in the old Palace of Westminster, Octob. 29. An. 1618. Of whom I cannot choose but note what is said by Camden Claren∣tieux, in his Annals: Vir erat nunquam satis Landato studio & Regiones remotas detegendi, & Navalem Angliae gloriam promovendi. And so I leave him to his rest in the bed of peace.

4. THE ILANDS which properly are accompted of as parts of Guiana, lie either scattered on the shore, or in the mouths or bodies of the greater Rivers: some of them not inhabited, others of no name; and none at all of any reckoning. Only the Isle of 1 Trinidado, and 2 Tabago, are of some esteem: which though somewhat further off from the shores of this Conntry, yet being that of Tri∣nidado lieth in the mouth of the Orenoque, and that both of them with Guiana pass but for one Prefecture or Provincial Government, we shall describe them in this place.

1. TRINIDADO, or Insula S. Trinitatis, lieth at the mouth of the River Orenoque over against Paria, from which separated by a Frith or Streit, by Columbus who first discovered it called Boca del Drago, or the Dragons mouth, because of the dangerousness of the passage. Extended from the ninth to the tenth Degree of Northern Latitude; the most Southern Angle of it called Punta del Gallo, as that on the North east Punta de Galera. The Frith or Streit but three miles over, yet made more narrow by the interposition of four or five little Ilands, which the Sea breaketh thorow with great violence, leaving only two entrances for shipping into the Golf, called the Golf of Paria. The length hereof 25 leagues, the breadth 18. of a cloudy and unhealthie Air, but a fertile Soil, abundantly well stored with such commodities as are of the natural growth of America, viz. Maize, Sugar-canes, Cotton-Wooll, and the best kind of Tobacco, much celebrated formerly by the name of a Pipe of Trinidado. Here is also a sufficiencie of Fruits and Cattel for the use of the Natives; and here and there some veins of Gold and other metals: such store of Pitch, that innumerable ships might be laden with it; but that it is con∣ceived to be unfit for the calking of ships, because it softneth in the sun. The place in which it groweth, by the Spaniards called Terra de Brea, by the Natives Pichen.

The People of the same nature and disposition with the other Americans: distinguished into several Tribes, but most of them reduced under the power of two petit Princes. But the greatest part of the Inhabitants, to avoid the tyrannie of the Spaniards, forsook their Country, and ferried over into Gui∣ana, where before we found them. The chief Town of it called S. Josephs, situate on the South side of the Iland, on the banks of a little River which the Natives call Carone, the ordinary residence of the Governour, who hath under him besides this Iland the Provinces of Guiana and El Dorado (for so go his titles) yet a small Town, consisting but of 40 houses, when it was taken An. 1595. by Sir Walter Raleigh; Antonio Berreo the Governour of it being then made prisoner, who furnished his taker with many notions (and some meerly fabulous) towards the discovery of Guiana.

This Iland first discovered by Christopher Columbus in his third voyage, An. 1497. was by him called La Trinidad, it may be with some reference to the form hereof, shooting into the Sea with three Points or Promontories. Nothing else memorable in the fortunes and story of it, but what is touched upon before.

2. TABAGO lieth on the North-east of La Trinidad, from which 8 miles distant: full of safe Harbours for the bigness, watered with 18 little Rivers, and well stored with Woods; amongst which some Palmito trees, some like that of the Brasil-wood, others not elswhere to be found. Of Fowl and Fish sufficient to maintain it self. Now called New Walcheren, with reference to an Iland of that name in Zealand, by some of the Low Countrymen, who begin to plant there.

OF PARIA.

PARIA is bounded on the East with Guiana, and the Ilands in the mouth of the Orenoque; on the West with the Golf or Bay of Venezuela, and part of the new Realm of Granada; on the North with the main Atlantick Ocean, or Mare del Noort; the Countries lying on the South not discovered hitherto.

It took this name from a mistake of the Spaniards (as Peru, and Jucutan on the like) who asking, as all men do, the names of those new Regions which they disco∣vered, and pointing to the hils afar off, were answered Paria, that is to say, high hils, or Mountains (for here begins that ledge of Mountains which are thence continued for the space of 3600 miles, to the streits of Magellane) and so hath it ever since held the name of Paria. By some Wri∣ters it is also called Nova Andalusia; but I adhere unto the former.

The nature of the soyl and people being very different, will be more properly considered in the seve∣ral parts: The whole divided into the Continent and the Ilands; which with their subdivisions, may be branched into these particulars, viz. 1 Cumania. 2 Venezuela. 3 S. Margarita. 4 Cubagna, and 5 the lesser Ilands.

1. CVMANA hath on the East the Golf of Paria, and the River Orenoque; on the West Vene∣zuela: on the North and South bounded as before. So called from Cumana, one of the Rivers of it; on the banks whereof some Dominican Fryers (who first set sooting in this Country) built themselves a Monasteri••; that name communicated afterwards unto all the rest of this Tract.

It is extended East and West to the breadth of 110 Leagues; the length thereof from North to South, said to be 400. But there is little of it known, and less of it planted by the Europeans; except some places near the Sea: there being no part of all America, the description whereof hath come so imper∣fectly to our hands, as they have of this. For except it be the names of some Bayes or Promontories, and of two or three most noted Rivers, there is not much that doth require our consideration.

The Country, for so much as hath been discovered, neither rich nor pleasant; and consequently the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 looked after: covered with shrubs, and overgrown with unprofitable Bryers and Bushes. Hereto∣fore samed for Pearl fishing, all along the Coast, from the Golf of Paria to that of Venezuela, called therefore Costa ae las Perlas; but that gainful trade hath long since failed it. Now only of esteem for a vein of most excellent Salt, found near the Promontorie of Araya, and the Bay of Cariaco; gathered and digged up thereabouts in great abundance, and yet never diminishing. The parts adjoyning take from hence the name of Salina; the Promontorie bordering on the Frith called Boca del Drago, the title or appellation of Cape Salinus. Of some strange Creatures in this Country, as the Beast called Ca∣pa, the soles of whose feet are like a shoo; a kind of Hog, which lives altogether upon Ants or Pi••mires; Parrots, and Bats, of more then ordinary greatness, I forbear to speak.

Of the People I find nothing singular, except it be, that having plenty of good fruits, as of Fish and Flesh, they use themselves to a far worse dyer, feeding on Horseleeches, Bats, Spiders, Grasshoppers, Worms, Lice, and such other Vermin. In other things they seem to have a mixture of all ill customs used amongst the Savages of Asia, Africk, and America; as multitudes of wives, prostituting these wives for the first nights lodging, to the Piacos, or Priests; and for any after, to their Guests; taking great pairs to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 their Teeth, and putting strange colours on their bodies instead of garments; high-minded, treacherous, and revengeful; accustomed to the use of poysoned arrows, which they envenom 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Snakes blood, and other mixtures. In one thing only different from the rest of their neighbours, which is the fencing of their Grounds or Orchards with a Cotton-thred, as high as ones Girdle; and an opinion which they have, that whosoever breaketh it, or goes over or under it, shall die immediatly. More safe in that perswasion, then by brazen walls.

Rivers of most note, though of little, 1 Rio de Canoas. 2. Rio de Neveri. 3 Cumana de Bordones. The chief Havens or Roads for shipping, 1 Moxino. 2 S. Foy. And 3 that called Commenagot. The places or most consideration, 1 Cumana, a Colonie of Spaniards, on the bank of the River of that name; but distant about two miles from the Sea, on which it hath a safe and convenient Harbour; the Town so hedged about with Woods, that nothing can be seen of it till one come into it, except it be the Go∣vert•••••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 house, seated upon the top of a lofty Mountain. 2 S. Jage, a strong Fortress built by the Spa∣niards 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the salt Lake, or Salinas, in the year 1622. on some intelligence that the Hollanders had a purpose to take them from him; fortified by the rules of Art, and planted with 30 pieces of Ord∣nance, the one half of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 3 S. Michael de Neveri, on the River so called, a Fort of the Spaniards. 4 Gua••iba, a Village of the Natives.

The Country first discovered in the third voyage of Christopher Columbus; but the possession of it was first taken by two Dominicans, who out of a Religious zeal to plant the Gospel in these parts; founded themselves a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the place where the burrough of Cumana was after built, An. 1513.

and doubtless had sped very well in their holy purpose, if some covetous Spaniards had not treacherously seized upon one of the Chiefs of their Tribes, and carried him with his Wife and Train into Spanish ben∣dage. For this the poor Monks suffered death; I may call it martyrdom; their death revenged by Al∣fonso de Oieda, An. 1520. and he not long after slain by the Savages, who also at the same time destroyed two Convents of Dominican & Franciscan Friers which had bin founded in the year 1518. A second force sent hither under Gonsalvo de Ocampo, wasteth a great part of the Country, beheads one of their Kings, and hangs some of his people. But that strength being withdrawn or defeated also, Diego de Castellon is sent over by the Councel resident in Hispaniola, to secure the possession of the Country; by whom the Castle first, and after the Burrough of Cumana, was built and planted. Some other Attempts there were for a further conquest, but they proved nothing but attempts; except the building of the Castle of S. Michael de Neveri by Hierome of Ortal, and the discovery of some of the inland Provinces 150 leagues from the Sea-side, by Antonio Sedenno, An. 1537. of which nothing followed, but the Registring of that tedious March.

2. VENEZVELA is bounded on the East with Cumena; on the West with the Bay of Vene∣zuela, the Lake of Maracaybo, and the New Realm of Granada. So called by Alfonso de O••eda, one of the first Discoverers of it, An. 1599. because he found a Burrough of some of the Savages situate in the middest of the waters, to which was no passage but by Boat: the word importing as much as Little Venice.

It is in length from East to West 130 leagues; in breadth where broadest about 80. The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 so plentiful of all forts both of fruit and grain; the Country so replenished with all kind of Cattel, and excellent pastures to maintain them, that the neighbouring Nations call it by the name of the Granarie. Such store there goeth from hence of Wheaten meale, Biscoct, Cheese, Hogs-flesh, Oxe hides, and Cloth of Cotton ready made, as very well deserves that title. Here is also very great plenty of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Wild-beasts for hunting, Mines of Gold and other metals; besides an infinite deal of Sarzaparilla sent to Europe yearly.

The People of the same nature and disposition with those of Cumana, with whom they do participate in all points of that Character. The women (which was there omitted) trained up to ride, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, leap, and swim, as well as the men; to till the land, and look to the business of the house, whilest the men hunt or fish, to bring in provision. They count it a great part of beauty, to have very thick thighs; which they effect, by binding their legs hard below the knee, from their very childhood. Shameless enough till married, after more reserved; though rather for fear of a divorce, then for love of modestie.

Rivers of note I meet with none; in stead of which many convenient Harbours and capacious Bayes. The chief, that called Golfo triste, from some shipwracks or the like misfortune hapning to the Namer of it. 2 The Bay of Coro or Venezuela, large and spacious, which by a Frith or Streit of half a league over, receiveth the tribute of 3 The great Lake called the Lake of Maracaybo, by the Spaniards called Lugo de Nuestra Sennora, or our Ladies Lake, in compass about 80 leagues; on the banks where of dwell many Nations of the Savages, and into which there falleth a River from the Realm of Granadae, by which the two Provinces maintain commerce with one another.

Places of most importance in it, 1 Maracapana, the furthest Port upon the East, and one of the best on all this Coast; in which the Spaniards of Cubagna had once a Garrison, under colour of defending the Country against the Savages, but in plain truth to use it for an opportunity to seize upon their persons and carry them away for Slaves. Those parts hereby unpeopled, or but meanly populou••. 2 Venezuela, the most Western Town of all the Province, commonly called Coro, situate in the Latitude of 11 Degrees▪ built on the Sea, where it hath an Haven on each side; the one capacious, but not safe; the other safe enough, but not very capacious. But being built in a sweet and healthie aire, and neigh∣boured by the richest soil of all the Country, it hath been long the ordinary seat of the Governour, and the See of a Bishop (Suffragan to the Archbishop of Domingo in Hispaniola.) Once suddenly surprized by the English, An. 1595. and burnt to ashes, but as suddenly repaired again. 3 Caravalleda, or Nuestra Sennora de Caravalada, 80 leagues from Coro towards the East, seated upon the Sea neer an unsafe Haven, and defended from assault by the Castle of Caracas, so called from the name of the Tribe in which it standeth. Neer unto which the hils arise to so great an height, that they seem to equal the Pike of Tenarisse so much talked of. 4 S. Jago de Leon, in the same tribe of the Caracas, took by the English the same year. 5 Nova Valentia, 25 leagues from S. Jago de Leon, and from Coro 60. 6 New Xeres, lately built, fifteen leagues on the South of New Valentia. 7 Nova Segovia, one league only from New Xerez; situate on the banks of Baraquicemiti, the most noted River of this tract. 8 Tucuyo, in the Valley so called; not very large, but plentifully loaded with rich Sugar canes, for which some Sugar works or Ingenios are here lately built. 9 Truxillo, or Nuestra Sennora de la Paz eighteen leagues on the South of the great Lake of Maracaybo, on which the Inhabitants hereof have a Village which belongs unto it, where they hold a Factorie for the sale of their wires. 10 Laguna, on the bottom of the Lake it self; not else observable but for the multitude of Tygers which do haunt about it.

This Country discovered by Columbus, and named by Alfonso de Oreda, as before is said, was first pretended to for Neighbourhoods-sake, by the Spaniards planted in Cubagna. Afterwards John de Anpuez, by order from the Counsell resident at Domingo in Hispeniola, was employed in the Disco∣very of it, An. 1527. But Charles the fist having taken up great sums of money of the Velseri, a weal∣thy

Family of Augspurg, pawned this Country to them; by whom Ambrosius Alfinger was sent with 400 foot and 80 horse, to take possession. But he and his Successors in that imployment, not minding so much the Conquest as the spoil of the Country; the Counsell of Domingo undertook the business once again; and in the year 1545. sent over one John de Caravayal, who treading in the steps of the Germans, or rather outgoing them in all forts of Rapine, was outed on a second order by one John Pe∣rez de Tolosa, by whom the Province was reduced into some good order. In the year 1550. the Ne∣groes, brought hither in great multitudes out of Africk, began to mutiny; but their Design discovered, and themselves all slain. Peace and contentment following after all these troubles, the Country was in little time so thorowly planted, and the Natives so incouraged in their several Tribes, that notwith∣standing the destructions made by the Germans and Spaniards, here were reckoned not long since above 100000 of the Savages, not numbring those above fifty or under eighteen years of Age; who by an Order of the Counsell of Spain for these parts of America, are exempt from Taxes.

3. MARGARITA is an Iland situate over against the Salina or Salt-Lake in Cumana; from the Main-land whereof it is distant about seven Leagues. So called from the abundance of Pearls which the Spaniards found at the first Discovery, which the Latinists call Margaritas, and from them the Spa∣niards. Which though it signifie no other then the Vulgar or common Pearl, yet here were also store of those of the greater estimate, such as the Romans by the figure of Antiphrasis called Uniones, be∣cause they always grew in couples. Nulli duo reperiuntur indiscreti, saith Plinie; unde nomen Unionum soilicet Romanae imposuere deliciae.

The Isle affirmed to be 16 Leagues in length, and six in breadth; situate under the 11. Degree of Northern Latitude. Well stored with Pearls upon the Shores, when first discovered; but even then when most plentifully stored with that Commodity, she had not water of her own to quench her thirst, compelled to fetch it from Cumana. Otherwise plentifull enough both of Maize, and Fruits. The People obsequiously servile to their Lords, the Spaniards; so long accustomed unto bondage, that it is now grown another nature. Places of most importance in it, 1 Monpater, in the East corner of the I∣land, a Fort of the Spaniards built for securing their rich Trade of Pearl fishing, and to defend their ships which lie there at Anchor: within the command whereof is a little Burrough, and the house of the Governour. 2 El valle de Santa Luzia, two Leagues from the Sea, a Spanish Colony. 3 Maka∣nao, the chief Village of the Natives.

This Iland first discovered in the third Voyage of Columbus, Anno 1498. grew suddenly into great esteem, by reason of the rich Pearl fishing, which they found on the shores thereof. And in regard the Natives were so ready to betray their Treasures (of which themselves made little reckoning) they found more favour from the Spaniards, and obtained more liberties from the King, then the rest of the Savages. Insomuch that the Spaniards either could not or would not compell them to dive into the Sea for Pearl; but bought Negro slaves from Guinea, and the Coasts of Africk, whom they inforced with great Torments to dive unto the bottom of the Sea, many times seven or eight Fathom deep, to bring up the shels, in which that Treasure was included: where many of them were drowned, and some maimed with Sharks, and other Fishes. But that rich Trade is much diminished of late, if it fail not quite. The cause thereof to be imputed to the unsatiable avarice of the Spaniards, so greedy upon Pearl, that they destroyed the very Seed, and making gain of whatsoever they could meet with, for a little present profit lost the hopes of the future. The Iland since less famous, and not much frequented. Visited to its cost in the year 1601, by the English under Captain Parker, who received here 500. l. in Pearls for the ransom of Prisoners; and took a Ship which came from the Coast of Angola, laden with 370 Negroes, to be sold for Slaves.

4. CVBAGNA is an Iland lying betwixt Margarita and the Promontory of Aroya upon the Continent; from the first distant but one League, from the other six; it self in compass about three. Rich on the shores, by the abundance of Pearls which were found about them, but very beggerly on the Land. Destitute both of grass and water, by consequence of Cattel also, except only Conies, and but few of those. So that like many a Gallant who spend all upon the back, and nothing on the belly, she had her out-side laced with Pearls, but within nothing to be found but want and hunger. Their bread and water brought them out of other Countries; and their Fruits too, if they desired to have any; here being very few Trees, and those most of Guyayacan. But so abundant in this Treasure, that the Kings Fifths for many yeers amounted to 15000 Ducats yeerly out of this poor Iland.

In this respect it was presently resorted to, and possessed by the Spaniards, who planted here a Co∣lony which they called New Cadiz: and grew in short time unto so great power, that they made them∣selves Masters of the Port of Maracapana Venezuela, one of the best upon those Seas. But in the year 1521. hearing that the Savages of Cumana had destroyed the Convent of Franciscans on the opposite Shore, they cowardly forsook the Iland, and fled to Hispaniola. Sent back again by the Counsel there, under the conduct of James de Castellon, by whom the Town was made more beautiful and strong then ever formerly. In great esteem as long as the Pearl fishing did continue; now, with that decayed. Yet still the Iland doth deserve some consideration, for a Fountain on the East part of it neer unto the Sea: continuing, though the Pearls be gone; which yieldeth a Bitumineus substance like oyl, Medicinable for some diseases, and is found two or three Leagues off, floating on the Sea: more profitable for the good of Mankinde, and more easily found, then the Pearls which sunk unto the bottom, and maintained our pride.

Four miles from hence, but appendant to it, lieth a little Iland called Coche, three miles in com∣pass, but so abundantly stored with Pearls, that it hath been worth in that one commodity for some moneths together, above a thousand pounds a moneth of our English money. First peopled, upon that occasion, An 1529. but the occasion failing, the Plantation ended, the Isle being now unpeopled, as not worth the looking after.

5. THE LESSER ILANDS of this Praefecture or Provincial Government, lie all along upon the Coast of Venezuela, from East to West; the principal of which 1 Tortuga, 12 or 14 miles on the West of Margarita; four miles in length, hardly one in breadth; but yielding such good store of Salt, that three or four ships are laded with it every year. Well furnished with Goats and Guayacan; but not else considerable: except for being naturally fenced about with Rocks, and yielding a conveni∣ent Harbour for the use of Marriners. 2 Bonaire, opposite to the Bay of Golfo triste, in the Latitude of twelve Degrees; well furnished with Sheep and Goats, and other Cattell, brought out of Spain, and peopled with some Savages out of Hispaniola, whom the Spaniards Christened and sent thither: some Spaniards with their Governour intermixt amongst them. The Iland 16 miles in compass: not fruitfull naturally but in Trees, which are great and numerous. 3 Curacaos, nine miles on the West of Bonaire, and as many in compass. Of a more fertile soyl by far, and of very rich Pastures: the People given to grazing, and make great store of Cheese, tramported thence to other places: the Iland ha∣ving towards the North, a convenient Harbour. 4 Aruba, on the North east of Curacaos, from which nine miles distant: in compass not above five miles, for the most part level. One hill it hath (amongst some others) fashioned like a Sugar-loaf. Inhabited by few Savages, and fewer Spaniards.

The other Ilands on this Coast, as the Tostigos, lying Eastwards of Margarita; 2 Blanca, 3 Or∣chilla, 4 Rocca, and 5 the Isle des Aves, or of Birds, interposed betwixt Tortuga and Bonaire; some of them rather Rocks then Ilands: few stored with any living Creatures for the use of men; and none of them at all with men to mannre and dress them: I pass over here. And so proceed from these Ilands of the Province of Paria, to those which are subordinate to the Counsel of S. Domingo, and make a Province of themselves. But first we must go back, and bring up some of the Ilands of Mare del Zur, which could not be reduced to any of the former Provinces.

And so much of PERUANA.

OF THE AMERICAN ILANDS: And first of those which are in MARE DEL ZUR.

THE AMERICAN ILANDS, scattered up and down the Shores of this New World, are commonly divided into those of Mare del Zur, or the Pacifique Ocean; and those of the Atlantick, or Mare del Noort. The first so called by Magellanus, the first Discoverer: who passing thorow those troublesome and tem∣pestuous Streits which now bear his name, found such a change upon his coming into the Main, that he gave it the name of Mare del Zur (quod à tranquillitate vocavit Mare del Sur, faith the Author of the Atlas Minor) from the calm and peaceable temper of it. By the Latines called Mare Pacisicum, in the same regard. Called also the Southern Ocean, because of its situation on the South-side of America, in reference to some part of the Golf of Mexico, and the Streits of Anian. Not known unto the Spaniards till discovered by Nonnius Vasques de Balboa, conducted hither by one of the Caciques or petit Kings of the Country about Nombre di Dios; Who seeing the Spaniards so greedy after Gold, told them that he would bring them to a place where their thirst should be satisfied. Accordingly he brought them to the opposite shore, this Balboa being the chief man in that Adventure: who discovering further on the Sea, opened the way unto Pizarro, and the rest that followed to the golden treasures of Peru: Executed notwithstanding this good service by Don Pedro de Avila, within short time after. But the more full discovery of it is to be ascribed unto Magellanus and some later Adventurers, though the Spaniards got nothing by the bargain. For formerly, as long as this Southern Sea was unknown to any but themselves, they conveyed their Gold and treasures from one place to another, from Panama to Peru from Peru to Panama, without loss or charge, and thought their Ports upon that shore to be unaccessible. But after the way unto this Sea was found out by Magellanus; Drake, Cavendish, and the rest of our English Adventurers did so scoure these Coasts, that they left them neither Port, nor Ship, which they did not ransack; as hath been evi∣denced before in some particulars.

As for the Ilands of this Sea, they lie most of them so neer the shores, as if placed there by Nature to serve as Out-works to defend the Continent. Many in tale, but few of consideration; and of those few some of the chief have been described already in their proper places, as parts and members of the Pro∣vince upon which they lie. The residue which lie too far off to come under such consideration, must be mentioned here; and those reduced to these two Heads, 1 Los Ladrones, & 2 the Ilands of John Fernandes.

1. LOS LADRONES are certain Ilands situate betwixt the main Land of America and the Philippine Ilands, in the Longitude of 185. and the 4. Degree of Northern Latitude. So called by Magellanus who first discovered them, because of the thievishness of the Inhabitants, (Insulae Latronum is their name in Latine) who had stollen his Cock boat, which he was forced by main force to recover from them. And they continue still both their name and nature. Found such by Cavendish and Noert in their several Voyages, to whom they came under colour of buying Iron (a commodity which they highly prize) but either closely or openly stealing whatsoever they met with. The people tall of stature, brown of complexion, and inclining to corpulencie; extremely active, and good Divers, continuing a long time under the water, as if alike fitted to both Elements; insomuch as the Hollanders then with Noort, to make trial of it, cast five peeces of Iron into the Sea, all fetched out by one of them: The women as good at it as the men. Both Sexes given to filthy and promiscuous lusts; for which branded (many of them) with the marks of their incontinencie, the Pox having eaten off both their Lips and Noses.

Their Religion is worshipping the Devil, whose Images they have in wood on the head of their Boats; the Chappel and the Saint fit for such devotions. But for the nature of these Ilands, and what subje∣ction the Inhabitants of it yield to the King of Spain, I am yet to seek. But like enough they yield as little as some others do, which yet are reckoned by our Authors to be parts of America.

2. The Ilands of John Fernandes, are two in number: so called from John Fernandes the first Dis∣coverer, An. 1574. each of them five or six miles in compass, and about 300 miles distant from the shores of Chile. Situate in the 33. Degree of Southern Latitude; rockie and barren, but well wooded, and those woods replenished with Goats, but their flesh not so favourie as in other places. Some store of Sanders there is in them, and of Palms no scarcitie. Plenty of Fish upon the shores, for which cause visited sometimes by the Spaniards living in Peru: and fitted with commodious Harbours and Roads

for shipping, which makes them not neglected by other Nations as they pass this way. None else of note in all this Sea, but such as lie upon the Shores of their several Provinces; which we have looked up∣on already. And therefore passing thorow the Straits, and coming up unto the Ilands of Paria, where before we left; we will now look on those of Mare del Noort, or that part of the Atlan∣tick which washeth the shores of this New world (the reason of which names we have seen before) sub∣ordinate to the Counsell or Government of S. Domingo, viz. 1 the Caribes, 2 Porto Rico, 3 Hispani∣ola, 4 Cuba, and 5 Jamaica. The rest already spoken of in their proper places.

1. THE CARIBES.

THE CARIBES or Cannibal Ilands, are in number many; 27 of them known by their proper names; the rest, of less note (though some of these of little enough) not yet so distinguished. Called thus in general, because inhabited by Cannibals and Man-eating People (at their first Discovery) as the word Caribes doth import. They lie extended like a Bow from the Coast of Paria unto the Isle of Porto Rico: of different temper, as must needs be in such variety; and therefore not within the compass of a general Character. Some of the principal we shall consider more distinctly; and for the rest it will be trouble enough to name them, or else pass them by.

1. GRANADA the neerest of this crew to the Main-land of Cumana, is situate in the Latitude of 12 Degrees and 15 Minutes; in form like a Crescent or half Moon, the two horns not a mile asunder, the whole length but six. Shaded all over with thick Woods, but notwithstanding of a rich and fruit∣full soil. A Haven in it of good use; but no Town of note. The People of the same ill condition with the other Savages, but more wit to hide it; most mischievously intended when they seem most kinde; and then the more to be avoided.

2. S. VINCENT 18 miles on the North of Granada, is of so blessed a soil, that it brings forth abundance of Sugar-Canes without charge to the Husbandman, Watered with many pleasant Rivers, and full of safe and convenient Bayes for the use of Marriners. In figue Circular, the Diameter being six miles over; the Circle by consequence eighteen. The People but of mean stature, slothfull, and studious only for their Belly: their love to which makes them to adventure in their small Boats, hewn out of the body of a Tree, to pass into the Continent, and return again, without help of the Compass; though distant from it at the neerest, above 30 miles.

3. BARBADOS on the North-east of S. Vincent, in the Latitude of 13 Degrees, and 20 Minutes. Of an Oval form, 17 or 18 miles in compass. The soil in shew like that of England, but far more fruitfull: on the East side thrusting out it self with Points and Angles, which yield some Bayes, but full of Quick Sands, and unsafe for shipping, on the South furnished with a large and commodious Har∣bour. Not very well provided of for Fruits or Cattel, till made a Colony of the English; who have brought thither from their own Country, Swine and Kine; Oranges, and the like from others. The chief Commodity made hitherto of this Plantation, comes by the planting of Tobacco; and by a kinde of course Sugar called Barbados Sugar, which must be quickly spent or will melt to nothing. Were they in stock, and not forced to make a quick return of their Commodities, they might make here as good Sugars as in other places. Yet this Plantation said to be worth all the rest which are made by the English; who (as I take it) are the sole Colony in it: The Iland but at the courtesie of the Spaniard; without whose leave and liking not of force to hold it.

4. MATININO on the North-west of the Barbados, by the Salvages called Madaninam, with little difference. Everywhere swelled with Hills, of which three most eminent for height: one of them, which way soever a man looks upon it, carrying the resemblance of an Hat. Inhabited in the time of Peter Martyr the Historian, with none but Women: afterwards, with a more fierce and barbarous Peo∣ple then the rest of these Ilands: but neither Men or Women to be seen of late: whether destroyed, or removed further from the shores for fear of their destruction, is a thing uncertain.

5. DOMINICA, seated on the North of Matinino, twelve Leagues in length; exceeding fruit∣full of Tobacco, which they sell unto the Europaeans for Hatchets, Knives, and other Instruments of Iron. Famed for two Fountains of Hot-water, and a commodious Haven at the West side of it, into which falleth a River 20 paces broad. The People as barbarous as ever Cannibals or Man eaters to this very day: At deadly enmity with the Spaniards, and to no man trusty, but where they cannot hurt or dare not. Both Sexes wear their hair long, and colour their bodies over with Oaker. Yet bloody and barbarous though they be, they are ruled by a King of their own, distinguished from the rest in his dress or habit, whom they most readily obey.

6. DESSEADA, or the Land of Desire, on the North east of Dominica, Discovered by Colum∣bus in his second Voyage; naked of Trees, and at the first sight afar off, not unlike a Galley. Of great use to the Spaniards, who always take it in their way from the Canaries to the parts of America, and back again at their return.

The like use do they make of 7. The Isle of GVADALVPE, parallel to this, but directly West∣ward: at which the Fleets which come from Spain use to take fresh water, and there disperse them∣selves to their several Ports. Eight miles in length, and of good Anchorage in most parts of the Sea adjoyning. North-cast from hence lieth

8. S. Maria del Antigna, commonly called ANTIGNA onely, and by some mistakingly ANTEGO. Seven leagues in length, and as much in breadth; difficult of access, and destitute of fresh water, but well replenished of woods, and provided of Fens. Of late times made a Colonie of the English, who do still possess it.

9. S. CHRISTOPHER, on the North-west of Guadalupe, in the Latitude of 17 Degrees & 20 Minutes. The length six miles, the breadth in many places four, and in some but two: much swelled with hils, and towards the East provided of several Salt-wiches. The French and English had sometimes in it their several Colonies: by whom the Natives were destroyed, or otherwise compelled to forsake their dwellings; convict, as was pretended, of some manifest treacheries. But the two Colonies did not long enjoy the sole possession; ejected by Frederick de Toledo, as he passed this way with his Navie; t••ough suffered to return to their former dwellings, as 〈◊〉〈◊〉 profitable then dangerous to the Crown of Spain. Their chief employment and commoditie lies in their Tobacco, by some much commended. Joyning hereto, or but a League from it at the most, is

10. The Isle of NIEVES, affirmed to be five leagues in compass; well wooded and as pleasantly watered; insomuch as the Inhabitants of the Isle of Dominica used to come hither for their pleasures, but for hunting chiefly. Now famed for some Bathes or Hot Waters, found out by the English, who in the year 1528. placed a Colonie in it. But whether subsisting of it self, or a part of their Plantation in S. Christophers, I am yet to learn.

11. SANCTA CRVX, by the Inhabitants called Ayay, on the North-west of S Christophers, and the South-east of Porto Rico, from which last distant 15 leagues. Woody and mountainous; not well provided of fresh waters; but on the West-side furnished with a safe and commodious Road, under the covert of the mountains. Amongst their fruits some that resemble a green Apple; which tasted, so i•• flames the tongue, that for 24 houres it swelleth in so great extremity, as makes it altogether useless, but after that by little and little it abates again. The like hapneth also to the face, if washed before sun∣••ising with their Fen-waters, which are very frequent in this Iland; after the rising of the sun, without any harm at all. In this there is a Colonie of the English also, but of later standing then those of S. Christophers and Barbados.

Some of the principal of the rest, 1 Anguilla, 2 Barbada, 3 S. Bartholmews, 4 S Lucies, 5 S. Mar∣tins, 6 Montferrat, 7 Rotunda, 8 Saba, 9 Virgo Gorda, & 10 Sumbrero; of which we have little but the names: the rest, though known by several names, are not worth the naming. Onely we are to adde concerning the whole Nation of Caribes, once here inhabiting, that they did usually hunt for Men, as Men for Beasts, roving as far as Porto Rico to seek after their prey; and what they caught, was sure to go to the pot, in the worst sense too. Columbus, when he was at the Isle of Guadalupe, found 30 Captive Children which were reserved to be eaten, and in their houses divers vessels filled with Mans flesh, and some upon the spit ready to be roasted. Nor had they laid aside this diet, till after the year 1564. but how long I know not: For at that time, a Spanish ship coming to water at the Isle of Dominica, they cut her Cables in the night, haled her to the land, and devoured all that were in her. But the Ilands have been of late times well cleared of these Monsters; some of them brought unto better order, but the most destroyed as the common Enemies of mankind; the Ilands where they dwelt being either totally desert∣ed, or taken up by the Europaeans and their several Colonies.

2. PORTO RICO. And 3. MONICO.

PORTO RICO lyeth on the North-west of Sancta Crux, from which distant about 15 Leagues, and near upon as many from Hispaniola, 136 Leagues from the main Land of Paria, and not much less from the Cape of Coquibocco in Rio de la Hacha, a Province of Castella Aurea. It took this name from the chief Town and Haven of it; but was called by Columbus at the first discovery S. Johannis In∣sula, o•• the Isle of S. Johns; by the Natives Boriguen.

It is situate under the 18 and 19 Degrees of Northern Latitude; in form quadrangular, but of a greater length then breadth, such as the Geometricians call oblongum: The length thereof being 30 Leagues, and the breadth but 20. The Ayr hereof very pleasant and temperate, not scorched with furious heats in Summer, nor made offensive by the fall of continual rains; exposed sometimes (chiefly in August and September) to the trouble somness of sudden tempests, called Hericanos. The soyl indifferently fruitful, though somewhat Mountainous: here being (besides other Hils of inferiour note) a ridge of high Hils which run cross the Country from the one end unto the other. Their chief commodities Sugar canes, Ginger, Cassia, and great store of Hides: the Europaean Cattle having so abundantly increased, that they kill thousands for their skins; leaving the flesh to be a prey unto Dogs and Birds. Some Mines here were of Gold and Silver, but consumed long since. And so are all the Natives also; of whom, in that respect, impertinent to give any Character.

Chief Rivers of the Iland, 1 Cairobon, 2 Boyaman: of divers fountains, and of severall and divided courses. 3 Luysa, & 4 Toa, two Rivers growing out of one. The Spring of that one in the Mountains of Guayamo, whence running Northwards in one Channel 16 Leagues together, doth afterwards divide it self into those two streams. 5 Guiano. 6 Arezibo. 7 Guabiabo; of lesser note; but all of them, as well as all the rest before, concluding in some safe and capacious Haven.

Places of most importance in it, 1 Porto Rico the chief town, built in a little Iland, on the North side of the greater, but joyned unto it with huge piles, and vast expences, by the command of Philip the first, An. 1514. Well built, with large streets, and convenient houses, according to the model of the Cities of Spain; and beautified with a fair Cathedral; the Bishop one of the Suffragans of the Archbishop of S. Domingo in Hispaniola. The town unwalled, but fortified with two strong Castles: the one of which secures the Haven, and the other the Town. In vain attempted, and with the loss of 40 or 50 men, by Sir Francis Drake, An. 1595. but taken two years after by George Earl of Cumberland, who had a pur∣pose to have peopled it with an English Colonie. Discouraged from it by the death of 400 of his men, by change of Ayr, and some intemperance of Diet; he set sayl for England, doing no other hurt to the Town or Iland, but the disfurnishing it of 70 piece of Ordnance, and some part of their treasure, which he brought home with him. 2 S. Germans, in the Western part of the Iland, but four Leagues from the Sea; once the chief of the Iland, now both unfortified, and small. 3 Arezibo, on the River so called. 4 Luysa, the most noted Port of the Eastern parts, situate on the mouth of the River so named.

Eastward hereof betwixt it and Hispaniola, lies the Iland of Mona, (might not this think we be so called by Madoc ap Owen Gwinedth, of whom before?) three Leagues in compass; rockie and of a brackish earth; but fit for the production of Limons, Orenges, and such kind of fruits, which are here in plenty. Not far off▪ but more towards the West, Monico, or Monetta, as our English call it, where they found such infinite store of Fowl, that they flew over their heads as thick as Ha••l, and made them almost deaf with the very noise; their Eggs so thick upon the ground, that they loaded two Boats with them in three hours, and could hardly pass forwards without treading on them.

But to return to Porto Rico, or the Isle of S. Johns, it was first touched upon by Columbus in his second voyage, An. 1493. but first inhabited by John Ponce of Leon, An. 1510. who being courteously enter∣tained by Aiguabana, the chief Prince thereof, planted a Colonie of Spaniards in the North part of the Iland, which he called Caparra. The Colonie ten years after that removed to Guanica, and from thence to S. Germans: carrying with it the repute of the chief town of all the Iland, upon every remove, till the building of Porto Rico, where it since hath fixed. The Iland, very populous for the bigness of it, when the Spaniards came to it: but the Natives long ago consumed by several Butcheries; and as some write, not above 1500 Spaniards in all the Country. What else concerns the storie of it, we have seen before.

4 HISPANIOLA.

HISPANIOLA lyeth on the West of Porto Rico; the distance we have seen already. By the Inhabitants called Haiti••, and by some Quisqueia; but by Columbus it was honoured with the name of Hispaniola, or little Spain; and of late times beginneth to be called S. Domingo, from the chief Town of it.

The form thereof Triangular, extended in a sharp Angle, called Cabo del Enganno, towards Porto Rico: the Western end fashioned like a large Bay, or Semicircle; the Northern point of which is named S. Nicholas; the Southern, Cabo de Donna Maria. The length affirmed to be 150 Leagues, the breadth in some places 60. in some but 30. thence growing less and less till it come unto the Eastern Angle; the whole compass estimated at 400. Situate betwixt the 18 & 20 Degrees of Northern Latitude. Of an Air much infested with Morning-heats, but cooler in the Afternoon by the constant blowing of a Sea-gale, which they there call Virason.

The Country for the most part beautiful and flourishing; the Trees alwayes in their Summer-livery, and the Meadows green, as if it did enjoy a perpetual Spring. In many places swelled with high craggie Mountains, whence the name of Hayty, that word so signifying in the natural language of the Natives. Of such an excellent herbage, that the Cattel brought hither out of Spain have increased almost beyond Arithmetick; grown wilde for want of proper Owners; and hunted unto death like the Stags of the forrest, though onely to rob them of their skins. The soil so fertile, that in the space of sixteen dayes Herbs and Roots will grow ripe, & be fit to be eaten. So plentifully stored with Ginger, and Sugar-canes, that in the year 1587. there were shipped hence 27500. pound weight of Ginger, and 900. Chests of re∣fined Sugar; an evident argument of the riches and fertility of it. A further proof hereof may be, the rich Mines of Gold, in which they used to find Gold without mixture of dross or other metals. 2 The great increase of Sugar, one Cane here filling twenty, sometimes thirty measures. 3 The wonderful yield of Corn, amounting in some places to an hundred fold. But the Mines were long ago exhausted, in∣somuch as the Inhabitants are fain to use brass-money: but in stead of those of Gold, they have found out others of Brass and Iron, and some few of Silver; but not much searched into of late for want of Workmen.

The reason of that want to be ascribed unto the Covetousness and Crueltie of the Spanish Nation: who out of an unsatiable thirst for Gold, consumed the people in their Mines; and out of the like thirst for Blood, killed so many of them, that in few years they destroyed three Millions of the Natives. And it is probably supposed, that had not Charles the 5. restrained them by a Penal Edict from com∣pelling the Natives against their wils to those works of servitude, there had not been one Native left in

all this Iland, nor in any other part of their Plantations. Such as are left, are said to be of low stature, of black hair, and a complexion somewhat inclining to that colour: not differing in manners, habit, or Religion from the Spaniards there.

Rivers of most note, 1 Ozama, on whose Banks stands Domingo, the chief Town of the Iland, ca∣pable of the greatest ships to the very Wharf. 2 Nigua, which passing thorow rich Pastures, or ma∣king the Pastures rich, by its secret vertue; runneth towards the West: as do also, 3 Yaquimo, 4 Ni∣zao, and 5 Neyba. 6 Hayna, of a contrary course to the other three. 7 Yaqui, or Jacho, which falleth into the Northern Seas. 8 Nicayagua, 9 Cocitemuco, 10 Xanique. These three last famous heretofore for their Sands of Gold. Some speak of 30000 Brooks and Rivers, which are found in this Countrey; two parts of which vast number had their Golden Sands. A thing so far beyond the charity of the strongest Faith, (though reported by a grave and Reverend Author) that I know not what Interpre∣tation to put upon it, except every Water-course, Ditch, and Gutter, may be reckoned in.

The whole divided, when the Spaniards first came amongst them, into several Provinces or King∣doms, as 1 Higuey, 2 Jacuaguia, 3 Samana, in the Eastern parts. 4 Yaquimo, 5 Boaruco, and 6 Xaragua, towards the South. 7 Guahabu, and 8 Cabaya, in the West: and in the North▪ 9 Cibao, rich in Mines of Gold; 10 Marien, the Landing place of Columbus; and 11 Maguana in the center of the Iland, the King whereof in the time of Columbus was named Conabo, of greatest power of any of those peti•• Roytelets. Another division of it hath been made by Nature, parting it by four Rivers, all rising from one Mountain in the midst of the Iland into four Divisions: the River Jache running towards the North; 2 Nubiba hastning to the South; 3 Yuna, or Junna towards the East; and 3 Hatibonico to the West. But these divisions being long since grown out of use, we will survey the chief of the Towns and Cities of it, as they come before us.

And they are 1 S. Domingo, first built by Bartholomew Columbus, Anno 1494. on the East bank of the Ozama; and afterwards (in the year 1502) removed by Nicolas de Obando, then Governour of the Iland to the opposite shore. Situate in a pleasant Country, amongst wealthy Pastures, and neighboured with a safe and capacious Haven: the houses elegantly built, most of them of stone, and the whole well walled▪ beside a Castle at the VVest end of the Peer to defend the Haven: enriched by the resi∣dence of the Governour, the Courts of Justice, the See of an Archbishop (and besides many Convents and Religious houses) an Hospital endowed with 20000 Ducats of yeerly Rent. Esteemed of greatest Trade and concourse of Merchants till the taking of Mexico, and the Discovery of Peru; since that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sensibly decaying; and now reduced unto the number of 600 Families of Spaniards; the greatest p••••t of the City, and all the Suburbs, inhabited by Negros, Mulatos. and other Strangers. Not yet 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the hurt it had by Sir Francis Drake, who in the year 1586 ••ook it by force, and held it for the space of a moneth, burning the greatest part of the houses, and suffering the rest to be redeem∣ed a certain price. 2 Salvaleon, 28 Leagues to the East of Domingo. 4 Jaguana, called also Santa 〈◊〉〈◊〉 del Porto, from a safe and beautifull Haven adjoyning to it; situate in the VVest part of the I∣land, of no great bigness, consisting of no more then 150 houses, when it was at the greatest; but made much less by Captain Newport, who in the year 1591. burnt it to the ground. 4 Cotuy, in the North of the Iland, opposite to S. Domingo, from which distant almost 60 Leagues: a little Town, but formerly of great esteem for its Mines of Gold. 5 Conception de la Vega, the foundation of Chri∣stopher Columbus; for whose sake afterwards adorned with a See Episcopal. 6 Puerto de la Plata, 40 Leagues from Domingo on the Northern shore; where built on a commodious Bay by Nicholas de O∣•••••••• before mentioned, by whom also fortified: the second Town of wealth and Trade in all the Iland. 7 Az••a, now called Compostella, a noted Haven, and much resorted to for Sugars, which it yields abundantly.

This Iland was first discovered by Columbus (for I believe not that it was any of the fortunate Ilands which we read of in the life of Sertorius) in the first voyage which he made: conducted hither by some of he Inhabitants of the Isle of Cuba. Landing, and gaining the good will of the Savages, by gentle usage, he obtained leave of one of their King or Caciques to build a Fortress in his Country, which he called Na∣vided or Natividad, leaving in it 36 Spaniards to keep possession: whom he found both mastered and murdered at his coming back. Being now better furnished for a new Plantation, he built the Town called Isabella, (in honour of Isabella Queen of Castile) near the Mines of Cibao; which afterwards was de∣serted also, and the Colonie removed unto S. Domingo: the Spaniards sending one Colonie after ano∣ther, till at last their number was increased unto 14000. besides women and children. But having rooted out the Natives by their infinite cruelties, and exhausted the riches of the Country with as infinite cove∣tousness: they betook themselves to fresher Quarters, abandoning the Iland to devour the Continent. Once had the Ilanders rebelled, and fortified themselves in the Province of Baoruco; a place so natu∣rally strong, that there was little need of the helps of Art. Not brought to leave that fastness but on such conditions as made the Spaniards less insolent, and themselves less slaves.

5. CVBA.

CVBA lyeth on the West of Hispaniola, from which parted by a Frith, or narrow Channel, inter∣posed betwixt the two Capes of S. Nicholas, and that of Mayzi. Backed on the North with a frie of Ilands, called the Lucaios, and some part of the Peninsula of Florida; extended towards the East to the extream point or Foreland of Jucutan, called Cape de Gotache, from which distant about 50 Leagues, and neighboured on the South with the Isle of Jamaica.

It is in length from East to VVest, that is to say, from Cape Mazie towards Hispaniola, to the Cape of S. Anthony, 230 Leagues; in breadth where broadest hardly 40, but fifteen in others. For the fertility of the soil contending with Hispaniola for the preheminence; but in the temperature of the Aire a great deal before it. Liberally stored with Ginger, Cassia, Mastick, Aloes, Cinnamon and Su∣gar, (not reckoning such commodities as are common unto this with others) besides great plenty of Flesh, and Fish; and of Fowl no scarcity. The Gold more drossie in the Mine, then in Hispaniola, but the Brass more perfect. Hilly, and full of lofty Mountains; but those Mountains clad with divers trees, some of which drop the purest Rosin, and the Hills sending to the Valleys many notable Rivers. Pester∣ed with many sorts of Serpents, not so much out of any ill condition of the Soyl and Air, as by an old Superstition of the Savages: in former times not suffered to kill them when they might (this be∣ing a Dish reserved for the higher Powers) not able afterwards to destroy them when it would have been suffered.

What other Savage Rites they had, is not now material, the Spaniards having took an Order that they should not trouble us in that particular. Yet thus much we may adde in memory of the first Inhabi∣tants, that an old man of 80 years, one of the Caciques of the Iland, addressed himself unto Colum∣bus at his first coming hither, advising him to use his Fortune with moderation, and to remember that the souls of men have two journeys when they leave this world; the one foul and dark prepared for the injurious and cruel person; the other delectable and pleasant for the men of peace. It is said also of them that they knew not the use of money, nor understood the niceties of Meum and Tuum: Tenants in common to the blessings which the earth brought forth, and Coheirs of Nature.

Amongst the Rarities of this Iland, they mention a Fountain out of which floweth a pitchy substance, which is found frequently on the Seas into which it falleth, excellent for the Calking of ships: Se∣condly, a Navigable River (but the name not told us) the waters of which were so hot, that a man could not endure to hold his hand in them. They tell us also thirdly of a Valley 15 Leagues from S.Jago, which produceth stones exactly round, as if made for pleasure; but yet meerly natural. But these no greater Rarities then in other places: nor altogether so great as in Hispaniola. Of which they tell us of a fair River, whose waters are Salt, and yet none but fresh streams fall into it: Of another Lake (three Leagues in compass) on the top of the Mountains, into which many Rivers were known to run without any Exit. Neither of these so strange or rare as the Cucuyo, a kinde of Scarabe or Beetel: the eyes and wings whereof when opened give so great a light, in the darkest places, that a man may see to read and write by it, as well as by Candle.

Rivers of most note, 1 Cante, much annoyed with Crocodiles (a Beast not common in these Ilands, nor elswhere in this) exceeding dangerous to such as repose themselves on the Banks of the River. 2 A∣rimao, which disburdeneth it self neer the Port of Xagua. 3 Rio de Porcos, full of Rocks and quick∣sands, at the entrances of it. 4 Rio Escondida, passing betwixt Habana, and the Port of Marancas, 5 Marien, and 6 Tanne, of less note: Besides these, there is Xagua, a safe Station and Road for ship∣ping; of a narrow entrance, but large and spacious when once entred, above ten Leagues in length, and of breadth proportionable. So fenced on all sides from the winds, that ships lie here in ••afety with∣out any Anchor. Some other Baies there be as usefull, though not so considerable.

Towns of most consequence, 1 S. Jago in the South part of the Iland, situate about two Leagues from the Main, but in the bottom of a large and capacious Gulf, the most noted Port of all these Seas. Built by Don Diego de Velasques, An 1514. Afterwards made a Bishops See, beautified with a Cathedral; some Religious houses; once not inferiour unto any for numbers of People, though now few enough. 2 Baracao, 30 Leagues on the East of S. Jago, the same Foundation as the other; and neighboured by great quantities of Eben-wood. 3 S. Salvador, by some called Bayamo, according to the old name of the Province in which it standeth; built by Velasco in the most pleasant and richest part of all the Iland; but not so fitly, as the other, for Trade and Merchandise. 4 Porto del Principe, an Haven Town in the North parts: not far from which is the Fountain of a pitchie or bituminous liquor, spoken of before; which I conceive to be much of the same nature with the Fountains of Naphta in the East. 5 Trinidad, another of Velascos foundations, nine or ten leagues Eastward of the Port of Xagua: once well frequented, but now forsaken, and meer nothing. 6 Havana, in the North parts, opposite to Florida, a noted and well traded Port; so strongly situate and fortified both by nature and Art, that it seems impregnable. The Entrances defended with two notable Castles; a greater then either opposite to the mouth of the Haven; all so commodiously built, and well planted with Ord∣nance, that they are able to keep out and scatter the greatest Navy. Neer one of them standeth an high Tower, from the top whereof notice is given unto the Guards, of every ship that cometh within view of the Watchmen. The best assurance, not only of this Iland but the Bay of Mexico; and therefore honoured for the most part with the seat of the Governour, and the greatest Trade of all these Seas: the ships which are bound for Spain from all parts of the Gulf, tarrying here for one another, till all met together, and setting fail from hence by the Streits of Bahama, amongst the Isles of the Lucaios.

This Iland one of the first which was discovered by Columbus: who having almost tired the Spani∣ards with the expectation, first fell upon the Iland of Guahanani, one of the Lacaios, to which he gave the name of S. Saviours. From thence he sailed to Baracoa, on the North of this Iland, which he caused to be called Fernandina, in honour of Ferdinand the Catholick▪ King of Castile and Aragon; at whose charge and the incouragement of Isabella his Heroick Queen, he pursued this enterprise▪ Land∣ing, he asked the People if they knew Cipango (by which name Paulus Venetus calls the Isle of Japan)

and they conceiving that he enquired after Cibao (of great note for the richest Mines in Hispaniola) pointed towards Hayty; some of them going with him to conduct him thither. Cuba by this means laid aside, and all the thoughts of Spain upon Hispaniola, where they found many golden provocations to in∣vite their stay; till hungring after more Gold, and some new Plantations, they passed over hither: and in few years by the prudent conduct of Velasco, got such footing in it, and made that footing good by so many Colonies; that their title and possession was beyond dispute; and so continueth to this day.

6. JAMAICA.

IAMAICA lyeth on the South of Cuba, from which distant 20 Leagues, and as much, or very lit∣tle more, from Hispaniola. Discovered in the second voyage of Columbus, by whom named S. Jago; that name changed afterwards to Jamaica.

It is in length from East to West about 50 Leagues, and in breadth 20. the whole compass estimated at 150. the middle of it under the 18 Degree of Northern Latitude. Of a rich soyl, abundantly pro∣vided of all things necessary: well stocked with Cattle, and no less plentifully stored with most sorts of Fruits, which either Industry or Nature have supplyed it with. Great store of Cotton-wooll; and such abundance of Jaccu (a Root whereof the Savages once made their bread) that it was deemed the Grana∣rie of the neighbouring Ilands. And were it not disfurnished of convenient Ports (which is all the want of it) would be as much frequented by the sea-faring men, as any other in those parts. Once very popu∣lous now destitute of all the natural Inhabitants: this Iland, and that of Porto Rico, loosing in few years 60000 by the Spaniards cruelties. Cruelties which not only raged upon the men, but destroyed poste∣rity: the Women, here and elsewhere so abominating their sad condition, that they strangled their Children in the birth, to the end they might not live to serve such a cruel Nation.

Chief Towns hereof (for though it be well watered, it hath no great Rivers) 1 Sevilla, in the North∣part of the Iland, beautified with a goodly Monasterie, the Abbot whereof hath all Episcopal jurisdicti∣on, and is priviledged to wear a Miter; in nothing more enobled, then that Peter Martyr the Histo∣rian (to whose Decades all succeeding Ages are to be beholding, for the Chorographie, and History of these parts of the World) was once Abbot here. 2 Mellilla, a small Town, but memorable for the un∣fortunate shipwrack of Columbus, on the shores adjoyning. 3 Oristan, on the South of the Iland, four∣teen Leagues from Sevil. 4 De la Vega, now a ruine only, once a Spanish Colonie; and of great fame for giving the title of Dukes to Christopher Columbus, and his brother Bartholmew. Since whose time nothing hapned prejudicial to the State of this Iland by the hands of any but the Spaniards; till con∣quered, but not held by Sir Anthonie Sherley, An. 1596.

Thus having took a short Survey of the several parts of this great Body; we now briefly take a view of the Government and Forces of it. The Government committed chiefly to two great Vice-Royes, the one of Nova Hispania, who resides at Mexico; the other of Peru, who abideth at Lima; the princi∣pal Cities of those Kingdoms. The first hath jurisdiction over all the Provinces of Nova Gallicia, Nova Hispania, Guatimala, Castella Aurea, and the Provinces of the Mexican Ilands; the other over those of Peru, Chile, Rio de la Plata, and the new Realm of Granada. Such scattered pieces as they hold in Guy∣ana, Paria, and the Caribes, with their Forts in Florida, being reduced to some of these. Of these the Vice Roy of Peru is of greatest power, because he hath the nomination of all the Commanders and Of∣ficers within his Government: which in the other are reserved to the King himself. But that of New Spain counted for the better preferment, because of its nearness unto Spain (in respect of the other) the beauties of the City of Mexico, and the Civilities of the People. For the administration of Justice, and ordering the Affairs of the several Provinces, there are ten chief Courts, from which there lyeth no Ap∣peal: that is to say, 1 Guadalaiara, for Gallicia Nova. 2 Mexico, for New Spain. 3 S. Domingo, for the Province of the Ilands. 4 Guatimala, for the division so named. 5 And Panama, for Castella Aurea. Then for the other Government, Quitos, Lima, and Charcas, in the Realm of Peru. 9 Imperiale, for Chile. 10 S. Foy, for the New Realm of Granada. From these, though no Appeal doth lie in matter of justice; yet both from them and the two Vice-Royes an Appeal may lie in affairs of State, or point of Grievance. And to this end there is a standing Counsel in the Court of Spain, which is called the Counsel of the Indies, consisting of a President, eight Counsellors, two Proctors Fiscal (which we call the Solli∣citors General) and two Secretaries, besides other Officers: to whom it appertaineth to take care of all matters which concern the Government of these Countries; to appoint the Vice-Royes, to dispose of all the great offices (except those of the Government of Peru) and spiritual Dignities; to appoint Visiters to go into those Provinces for the examining the actions of all Officers, hearing the grievances of the People, and to displace or punish as they find occasion; but with the Kings privity and consent.

As for the Estates of private men, they which hold Lands or Royalties from the Crown of Spain, hold them but for life (except it be the Marquess of Valsa in New Spain, of the race of Cortez) after their deaths returning to the King again; who gives them commonly to the eldest son, or the next of blood; but so that they receive it as a mark of his favour, and not from any right of theirs. And though they have many times attempted to make these Commanderies and Estates hereditarie, and offered great summes of money for it, both to Charles the fifth, and Philip the second; yet they could never get it done; the Kings most prudently considering, that these great Lords having the command of the Estates and Persons of their several Vassals, would either grinde them into powder without any remedy; or up∣on any Inquisition into their proceedings, take an occasion to revolt. Both dangers of no small impor∣tance, both by this uncertainty of their present Tenure, exceeding happily avoided.

The Revenue which the King receiveth hence, is said to be three Millions of Ducats yeerly: most of it rising out of the Fifths of the Mines of Gold and silver: the rest by Customes upon Manufactures and all sorts of Merchandise, and the Acknowledgments reserved upon Lands and Royalty. But out of this there goeth great Exits, that is to say to the two Vice-Roys 12000 Ducats; to the President and Offi∣cers of the Counsel of the Indies in Spain 20000 Ducats; to the Judges and Officers of the several Courts of Judicature very liberall Pensions; to every Arch-bishop and Bishop, of which there are 29. in all 2000 Ducats at the least, and to some much more to mend their Benefices. Then reckoning in the infinite Charges, in maintaining Garrisons, and entertaining standing Bands both of Horse and Foot, in several parts of this Estate; and the continual keeping of a strong Armada, to conduct his Plate-Fleets to Spain, there must be made a great abatement, and the sum will bear it. For howsoever at the first his Revenues came from hence without any great charge, more then the keeping of a few Soul∣diers to awe the Savages; yet after he fell fowl with England, and startled the Hollanders to Rebelli∣on, he was compelled to fortifie all his Havens, and secure his Ports, and to maintain a strong Ar∣mada at the Sea to Convoy his Treasures. Before which time, the English (as is instanced in several places) did so share in his Harvest, that they left him scarce enough to pay his Workmen; which if they should attempt again upon any breach, they would finde it very difficult, if not impossible, to effect any thing on the Coasts, as in former times; or indeed any other way but by making themselves too strong for him at Sea, and thereby either intercept his Fleets, or hinder them from coming to him to supply his needs.

And so much of the AMERICAN Ilands.